RF Guide

ACC E LLO S ON E
ENTERPRISE 3PL
RF GUIDE
90 South Cascade Avenue, Suite 1200
Colorado Springs, CO 80903 August 2015
www.accellos.com 4.0.1*
Copyright © HighJump
All rights reserved
This manual is reserved for licensed users of AccellosOne Enterprise 3PL and e-Vista. If you are not a
licensed user of AccellosOne Enterprise 3PL and e-Vista, no part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, recording or
otherwise, without the prior written consent of HighJump.
The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice and
should not be construed as a commitment of HighJump. HighJump assumes no responsibility or liability for
any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION 1
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................................. 2
AccellosOne 3PL Documentation Set ............................................................................................ 2
GENERAL SETUP PROGRAMS 5

Scan Parameter Profile (SCPR) ...................................................................................................... 6
Application Identification Block .......................................................................................... 11
Bar Code Profile Code (BAPR) ......................................................................................................11
RF Profile (MRFP) .......................................................................................................................... 15
RFCH Queries ................................................................................................................... 15
RFCH Only ........................................................................................................................ 17
RFCH Only (2) ................................................................................................................... 24
RFCH Only (3) ................................................................................................................... 28
RFCH Shared .................................................................................................................... 31
RFPU ................................................................................................................................. 35
RFPIC ................................................................................................................................ 39
RFPIC (2) .......................................................................................................................... 45
RFPIC (3) .......................................................................................................................... 51
RFPIC (4) .......................................................................................................................... 54
Miscellaneous .................................................................................................................... 59
Miscellaneous (2) .............................................................................................................. 62
Miscellaneous (3) .............................................................................................................. 66
Miscellaneous (4) .............................................................................................................. 69
Miscellaneous (5) .............................................................................................................. 74
Item RF Profile (MIRP) ................................................................................................................... 77
Miscellaneous Tab............................................................................................................. 79
Depositor Workflow Profile (DIFP) ............................................................................................... 79
RF Operator (RFOP)....................................................................................................................... 79
Activating an RF Operator in ActiveDesktop ..................................................................... 81
Extra Charge Setup for RF ............................................................................................................ 81
Warehouse Zones (WHZO)............................................................................................................ 84
Header Block ..................................................................................................................... 85
Formula Block.................................................................................................................... 86
Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 89
Overflow Sequence Block ................................................................................................. 91
RF Supervisors .............................................................................................................................. 92
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* i
O U T B O U N D S ET U P P R O G R A M S 9 3
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Customer Codes (CUST) ............................................................................................................... 94
Customer / Consignee Document Setup (CCDU)........................................................................ 96
Item Hazardous Material Violation (IHZV) .................................................................................... 97
Outbound Pallet Building .............................................................................................................. 98
Task Profile (REGI)....................................................................................................................... 101
Item Consignee Configuration (ICOC) ....................................................................................... 106
Outbound Process Configuration (CCCC)................................................................................. 107
Document Messages Block ............................................................................................. 110
Warehouse Customer Consignee OPID Rule (WCCO) ..............................................................110
Customer/Consignee Outbound Rules (CCOR) .........................................................................111
GENERAL NAVIGATION AND LOOK-UP PROGRAMS 117

Accessing RF ................................................................................................................................118
Changing Your Company .............................................................................................................118
Looking Up Inventory in RFIT ......................................................................................................118
Looking Up Inventory by Location in RFPR .............................................................................. 120
Looking Up Receipts in RFIL ...................................................................................................... 122
Looking Up Allocated Order Lines in RFOL .............................................................................. 124
Looking Up Inventory in RFLOIP................................................................................................ 127
Looking Up Locations in LOLORF ............................................................................................. 128
Looking Up Inventory in LOENRF .............................................................................................. 130
Looking Up Receipts in LORERF ............................................................................................... 131
Looking Up Orders in LOORRF .................................................................................................. 133
Looking Up Reserve Logic Customers in RFLR ....................................................................... 134
I N B O U N D P R O C ES S I N G 1 3 7
Overview of Put-Away ................................................................................................................. 138
Understanding Inbound Flows in RF ......................................................................................... 139
Overview of the Unique Identifier (UI) ........................................................................................ 139
Unloading Product in RFCH........................................................................................................ 140
Overriding the System-Assigned Location ...................................................................... 155
Entering Trailer and Pallet Information ............................................................................ 156
Performing Queries ......................................................................................................... 160
Entering Partial U-Type Receipt Lines ............................................................................ 161
ii 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Printing Labels ................................................................................................................. 162
Understanding Variances in RFCH ................................................................................. 163
Processing Variances ...................................................................................................... 164
Entering Process Values ................................................................................................. 166
Validating Process Values ............................................................................................... 168
Creating a New Line ........................................................................................................ 169
Receiving Product Under an Alternate Item Code........................................................... 170
Receiving Product on Automatic Hold ............................................................................. 172
Receiving Product with a Variable Product Breakdown .................................................. 173
Receiving Mixed Product ................................................................................................. 173
Looking Up Temperature and Trailer Information in LORE ............................................. 175
Looking Up Remarks and Messages in RFCH ................................................................ 176
Entering Temperature and Trailer Information in RFTT............................................................ 177
Putting Away Product in RFPU................................................................................................... 178
Overriding the System-Assigned Location ...................................................................... 184
Entering Variances .......................................................................................................... 185
Putting Away Product Under an Alternate Item Code ..................................................... 187
Putting Away in a Pick Line Location............................................................................... 188
Entering Process Values in RFIPS ............................................................................................. 188
Deleting a Receipt Line in RFDL................................................................................................. 190
OUTBOUND PROCESSING 193

Overview of Shipping .................................................................................................................. 195
Understanding Outbound Flows in RF ...................................................................................... 196
Understanding Pick Methods...................................................................................................... 196
Overview of RF Picking Programs ............................................................................................. 198
RFPIC (RF Pick) .............................................................................................................. 198
RFPK (RF Wave Pick) ..................................................................................................... 198
RFPV (RF Picking Voice) ................................................................................................ 199
RFINVT (RF Interleaving) ................................................................................................ 199
Picking Orders in RFPIC ............................................................................................................. 199
Picking Full Pallets from Bulk .......................................................................................... 204
Picking Cases .................................................................................................................. 206
Picking Product With Process Values ............................................................................. 211
Picking Partial Quantities of Product With Process Values ............................................. 213
Placing Product on Hold .................................................................................................. 214
Entering Pallet Information .............................................................................................. 216
Excluding Orders from Overpicking in EOSU .................................................................. 218
Picking Pick Line Product from a Non-Pick Line Location ............................................... 219
Performing Replenishments in RFPIC............................................................................. 220
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* iii

Looking Up Remarks and Messages in RFPIC ............................................................... 220
Performing Count Backs in RFPIC .................................................................................. 221
Looking Up Inventory Discrepancy Records in ICIN ....................................................... 223
Looking Up Inventory Discrepancy Records in RFCL ..................................................... 224
Removing Inventory Discrepancy Records from ICIN ..................................................... 225
Removing Inventory Discrepancy Records in RFCL ....................................................... 226
Entering Temperature and Trailer Information in RFTT............................................................ 226
Looking Up Your OPID’s.............................................................................................................. 227
Looking Up Your OPID’s in LOCN................................................................................... 227
Looking Up Your OPID’s in RFNCO ................................................................................ 228
Looking Up an Order’s OPID’s in LOOR ......................................................................... 229
Confirming Orders by OPID in RFCO......................................................................................... 230
Confirming Individual Order Lines by UI in RFCU .................................................................... 232
Reprinting Outbound Labels in RFOLP ..................................................................................... 233
Picking Cases from a Pick Line in CASE................................................................................... 236
Picking Substitution .................................................................................................................... 241
Setting Up Picking Substitution ....................................................................................... 241
Setting Up Your Picking Substitution Rules in PSPR........................................ 242
Attaching Your PSPR Profile Code to the Appropriate Code ............................ 245
Excluding Orders from Picking Substitution in EOSU ..................................................... 245
Performing Picking Substitution in RFPIC ....................................................................... 247
Entering Process Values in UOPR ............................................................................................. 250
Removing Cases That Have Been Scanned ................................................................... 254
Removing Cases That Have Not Been Scanned ............................................................ 255
Removing Cases From a Fully Scanned Order ............................................................... 256
Looking Up Summary Information ................................................................................... 258
Transferring Inbound Process Values to Outbound Orders ............................................ 258
Setting Up Catch Weight Tolerances .............................................................................. 259
Entering Process Values in RFOPS ........................................................................................... 260
Capturing the Weight Dynamically from a Bar Code ....................................................... 265
Manually Entering the Weight.......................................................................................... 270
Removing Labels That Have Been Scanned................................................................... 271
Removing Cases Either Scanned or Unscanned ............................................................ 273
Removing Cases From a Fully Scanned Order ............................................................... 274
Performing an Incomplete Scan ...................................................................................... 276
Transferring Inbound Process Values to Outbound Orders ............................................ 277
Picking Waves in RFPK ............................................................................................................... 278
Relocating Product in RFST........................................................................................................ 282
Merging OPID’s in RFMG............................................................................................................. 284
Merging Two Existing OPID’s .......................................................................................... 285
iv 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Creating a New OPID ...................................................................................................... 286
Performing Outbound Audits in RFOA ...................................................................................... 287
Assigning Orders to Loads in SELO .......................................................................................... 290
MISCELLANEOUS PROCESSING 291

Relocating Inventory in RFRL..................................................................................................... 292
Relocating Inventory (Operator Selects To Location)...................................................... 293
Relocating Inventory (Directed Move System Activated)................................................. 296
Adjusting Non-Serial Number Inventory in RFAJ ..................................................................... 301
Adjusting Out Existing Inventory...................................................................................... 301
Adjusting In New Inventory .............................................................................................. 303
Adjusting In Existing Inventory ........................................................................................ 307
Adjusting In Inventory With a Variable Quantity Breakdown ........................................... 309
Adjusting Serial Number Inventory in RFAJB ........................................................................... 310
Adjusting in Inventory ...................................................................................................... 311
Adjusting Out Cases ........................................................................................................ 313
Adjusting Out Full Pallets ................................................................................................ 314
Adjusting Out Cases Using the Remove Command........................................................ 315
Recovering From a Lost Connection ............................................................................... 317
Merging Inventory in RFMI .......................................................................................................... 318
Merging Existing Inventory Entities ................................................................................. 319
Creating New Inventory Entities ...................................................................................... 322
Adding Extra Charges to a Receipt/Order in RFEC .................................................................. 325
Scenario 1 — RF Operator Enters Charge Quantity Only ............................................... 325
Scenario 2 — RF Operator Enters Charge Code and Quantity....................................... 327
Deleting an Extra Charge ................................................................................................ 328
Assigning Check Digits to Locations in RFCD ......................................................................... 329
Entering Incidents in RFINC........................................................................................................ 331
Performing CRM Tasks in RFCE................................................................................................. 334
Checking Your Bar Codes in RFBR............................................................................................ 336
VOICE-ACTIVATED PICKING AND ORDER ASSIGNMENT SYSTEM 337

Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 338
Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking............................................................................................ 338
Setting Up Your Voice Profile in VOPR ........................................................................... 338
Setting Up Your Voice Profile (Customer) in VOPC ........................................................ 341
Setting Up Your Task Profile in REGI.............................................................................. 344
Setting Up Your RF Operators in RFOP.......................................................................... 345
Setting Up Your Check Digit Parameters in WARE (Optional) ........................................ 345
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* v
Assigning Check Digits to Locations in LOCA ................................................................. 346
Setting Up Your Reason Codes in REAS ........................................................................ 348
Activating Your Voice Terminals in MHEC ...................................................................... 349
Picking Orders in RFPV............................................................................................................... 351
Assigning RF Operators to Orders in RFOT.............................................................................. 354
Assigning RF Operators to Orders and Order Lines ....................................................... 354
Assigning RF Operators to Loads ................................................................................... 357
Assigning RF Operators to Pick Methods........................................................................ 359
Removing an Operator Assignment ................................................................................ 359
Clearing Work Assignments in CTPA......................................................................................... 360
CARTONIZATION 363
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 364
Cartonization Tab (MRFP) ........................................................................................................... 364
Carton Size Setup (CTSZ)............................................................................................................ 366
Outbound Process Configuration (CCCC)................................................................................. 368
Carton Size Code Block .................................................................................................. 370
Packing Station Code (PKST) ..................................................................................................... 371
Item Cartonization Profile Code (ICNP)...................................................................................... 373
Consignees (CONS) ..................................................................................................................... 374
Performing Manual Cartonization in RFSC................................................................................ 375
Working With Closed Cartons ......................................................................................... 379
Performing System-Driven Cartonization in RFPK................................................................... 380
Performing Second Level Cartonization.................................................................................... 387
Performing Manual Packing in EPSD......................................................................................... 388
Tracking Your Progress in EPSD .................................................................................... 393
Deleting a Carton’s Contents........................................................................................... 394
Working With Unclosed Cartons...................................................................................... 394
Looking Up Cartons in LOCN ..................................................................................................... 395
Deleting Closed Cartons in DCAR.............................................................................................. 397
EQUIPMENT TRACKING 399

Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 400
Company Code (COMP)............................................................................................................... 401
RF Checklist (MCHK) ................................................................................................................... 401
Material Handling Types (MHET) ................................................................................................ 404
Material Handling Equipment Code (MHEC).............................................................................. 406
vi 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Operator (RFOP)..................................................................................................................... 408
Locations (LOCA) ........................................................................................................................ 409
Warehouse Shift Setup (WASH).................................................................................................. 409
Looking Up Equipment Tracking Data ....................................................................................... 410
TASK INTERLEAVING 411

Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 412
Company Parameters (COMP) .................................................................................................... 412
Warehouse Activity Type Priority (WATP).................................................................................. 413
Material Handling Types (MHET) ................................................................................................ 414
Warehouse Zones (WHZO).......................................................................................................... 414
Warehouse and Location Format (WARE) ................................................................................. 415
Locations (LOCA) ........................................................................................................................ 416
Task Profile (REGI)....................................................................................................................... 416
RF Interleaving in RFITLV............................................................................................................ 417
INDEX 421
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* vii

viii 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
INTRODUCTION
Before You Begin ................................................................................................ 2
AccellosOne 3PL Documentation Set ............................................................... 2
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 1
INTRODUCTION
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
This manual contains the majority of core RF programs that are part of AccellosOne 3PL. The following core
RF programs are not included:
 RFCY (RF Cycle Count) — see Cycle Counting Guide
 RFPH (RF Entering Physical Inventory Tickets) — see Physical Inventory Guide
 RFPL/RFPR (Replenishment) see Allocation and Wave Manager
 OLOP (Outbound Loading Process) see Operations 2 Guide
AccellosOne 3PL Documentation Set
The AccellosOne 3PL documentation set includes 12 volumes:
Allocation and Wave allocation setup, inbound and outbound allocation, pick lines and replenishment,
Manager reserve logic and Wave Manager
Billing and Invoicing billing setup, cash posting system, maximum and minimum charges, renewal stor-
Guide age, extra charges, invoicing, accessorial bill later and bill immediate charges, rollup
invoicing and billing/invoicing reports
Core Documents core documents, maintain programs for core documents, document overlays, cus-
Guide tomizing the accessorial invoice, Oracle Reports, BarTender Label Printing
Cycle Counting Guide setup and operational programs for cycle counting as well as the cycle counting
reports
Guide to Active- logging on to and off from ActiveDesktop, the alerts system, e-Filing, selecting your
Desktop/A13PL company, working with menus and programs, basic queries, Signature Capture
Standard Reports core reports in AccellosOne 3PL

Guide
Operations 1 Guide receiving and confirming product, printing receiving documents, shipping R-type and
P-type orders, printing order documents, entering inventory adjustments, relocating
product, entering hold adjustments
Operations 2 Guide appointment planner, back orders, batch picking, manual packing, customer relation-
ship management, EDI, faxing and auto-printing, item substitution, kitting, labor track-
ing, Operational Board, pallet control, inventory attributes, item process values,
outbound load building, quick response labels
Physical Inventory setup and operational programs for physical inventory as well as the physical inven-
Guide tory reports
RF Guide setup programs for RF (Radio Frequency), RF receiving, RF picking, entering pro-
cess values in RF, voice-activated picking, order assignment system, equipment
tracking, interleaving, cartonization, outbound pallet building
2 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
INTRODUCTION
Setup Guide mandatory setup programs including warehouses and locations, isolators, inventory
level profiles, customers, charge codes, item profiles, items, carriers, shippers, con-
signees
System Administra- operator and menu setup, company and program access, operator restrictions, purg-
tion Guide ing and archiving, conversions, special verify programs, translation manager
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 3
INTRODUCTION
4 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
GENERAL SETUP PROGRAMS
Scan Parameter Profile (SCPR) ......................................................................... 6
Bar Code Profile Code (BAPR) ........................................................................ 11
RF Profile (MRFP).............................................................................................. 15
Item RF Profile (MIRP) ...................................................................................... 77
Depositor Workflow Profile (DIFP) .................................................................. 79
RF Operator (RFOP) .......................................................................................... 79
Extra Charge Setup for RF ............................................................................... 81
Warehouse Zones (WHZO) ............................................................................... 84
RF Supervisors.................................................................................................. 92
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 5
Scan Parameter Profile (SCPR)
In this program, you define your scan parameters for bar coded labels. SCPR allows you to break up a bar
code into its component parts and capture a separate value for each part. For example, the first four
characters of the bar code could represent the lot number, characters 6 to 10 could represent the weight and
characters 11 to 14 could represent the serial number.
In the Header Block of SCPR, you define your scan profile code, description and total length. In the Detail
Block of SCPR, you define whether the bar code is inbound or outbound, its type (weight, serial number, etc.),
starting and end position, the action required when it is scanned and its data type. You can have as many
records in the Detail Block as you require. For example, if a bar code consists of three parts (one for the
weight, one for the level 2 value and one for the serial number), you would set up three records in the Detail
Block for that scan parameter profile.
If you are capturing weights, serial numbers or a temperature, the profiles that you set up in SCPR must be
attached to the appropriate items in ITEM. If you are capturing inventory levels that were unknown at the time
of receipt entry (that is, blind receiving), the SCPR profile(s) are NOT attached to the appropriate items in
ITEM.
NOTE SCPR only supports bar code scanning of items with no more than two
SKU’s in their quantity breakdown (for example, pallet/case). You cannot scan bar
codes of items with three or more SKU’s in their quantity breakdown (for example,
pallet/case/each).
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Scan Profile Code Mandatory
Your scan profile code.
Description Mandatory
The description for your scan profile code.
Scan Profile Industry If you enter 128, your label will be defined as a UCC-128 label.
Type
6 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Variable Length Y = Yes

N = No
Set this flag to Yes if the bar code that you are attaching your scan parameter
profile to is a variable length bar code. Otherwise, set the flag to No.
Scan Profile Code Length Mandatory
The total length of the bar code.
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( D E TA I L B L O C K )
Inbound/Outbound I = Inbound
O = Outbound
B = Both
If you specify I for Inbound, the portion of the bar code that you are capturing
is restricted to an inbound RF process. If you specify O for Outbound, the por-
tion of the bar code that you are capturing is restricted to an outbound RF pro-
cess. If you specify B for Both, the portion of the bar code that you are
capturing can be used in either an inbound or outbound RF process.
Sequence Mandatory
In this field, you specify the sequence of each scanned in value. The
sequence that you enter need not match the physical layout of the bar coded
label.
You can extract an inventory level from multiple sequences in a bar code. For
example, if your bar code is 0123456789, you can define two sequences for
the level 3 value: sequence 1 for positions 1 to 2 and sequence 2 for positions
9 to 10. Your level 3 value extracted from the bar code would be 0189.
The extraction of an inventory level from multiple sequences of a bar code is

only available in RFCH blind receiving.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 7
Type EDT1 = YYMMDD

EDT2 = MMDDYYYY
IGNO = Ignore Entry
LEV1 = Inventory Level 1
OTHR = Other
PLTQ = Pallet Quantity (custom code required)
PLTW = Pallet Weight (custom code required)
SER = Serial Number*
TEMP = Temperature
UI = Unique Identifier
WGTN = Weight Net
The type of value that you are capturing. If a portion of the bar code that you
are scanning contains information that you do not wish to capture, you can
use the IGNO (Ignore Entry) option. Any part of a bar code assigned this type
will not be captured by AccellosOne 3PL.
NOTE If you use two or more values such as CUBE, HGT, LEN and WID in
the same scan parameter profile, each value must be captured on a separate
label. Only the values of SER, LEV1/2/3/4, UI, WGTG and WGTN can be
combined together and captured from a single label.
* For the serial number portion of the UCC-128 label only if you are cap-
turing a serial number and net weight.
Start Position Mandatory for fixed position bar codes
The position of the start character of the value that you are capturing. For
example, if the total length of your bar code is 10 characters and the portion of
the bar code that you are capturing is position 3 through 7, you would enter 3
in this field.
End Position Mandatory for fixed position bar codes
The position of the last character of the value that you are capturing. For
example, if the total length of your bar code is 10 characters and the portion of
the bar code that you are capturing is position 3 through 7, you would enter 7
in this field.
You can also define the end position by leaving this field blank and entering
the appropriate value in the Length field.
8 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Start Character Reserved for future use
The number, letter or special character indicating the start of the portion of the
bar code that you wish to capture.
End Character Reserved for future use
The number, letter or special character indicating the end of the portion of the
bar code that you wish to capture.
Length Only applicable to fixed position bar codes
The length of the portion of bar code that you are capturing If you are using
the UCC-128 label, the length is usually 48.
Action The following actions are supported:
01 = Entry
02 = Validation
If you select Entry, validation may or may not occur depending on the value
being captured. If you select Validation, AccellosOne 3PL validates the value
against a list of valid values.
Date Format In this field you can specify the date format of any dates scanned in from a
SSCC label and saved in AccellosOne 3PL as an inventory level.
Unit of Measure Code Only required if you enter a weight, cube or linear measurement in the Type
field
The unit of measure for the captured value.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 9
Data Type CHAR = Character

DATE = Date
INT = Integer
MONY = Money
NUM = Number
This field controls the formatting of values that you capture. If you select
DATE, the number that you enter will be formatted as a date. If you select
MONY, the number that you enter will be formatted in dollars and cents (for
example, $99.99).
Use CHAR for serial and purchase order numbers.
Decimal Position Only applicable to scanned in values with a data type of MONY or NUM
The position of the decimal point. For example, if you specify 2 and your cap-
tured value is 12345, AccellosOne 3PL will record the value as 123.45. If you
do not specify the position of the decimal point, all numbers will be captured
as integers.
Weight Modifier Only applicable to scanned in values whose unit of measure code is a weight
(KGS or LBS)
If required, you can specify a weight modifier and the scanned in weight will be
multiplied by the modifier.
Validate Item Code Only available for item code validation
P = Position-Based
L = Left Starting Position
R = Right Starting Position
Item code validation allows you to validate the item code in RFOPS and
UOPR when the item code in the bar code is shorter than the item code in
ITEM. That is, the level 1 in the bar code is a subset of the full level 1 in ITEM.
In this field, you specify the position of the item code in the bar code.
Item Code Start Position Only available for position-based validation
The start position for the item code.
10 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Bar Code Profile Code (BAPR)
Item Code End Position Only available for position-based validation
The end position of the item code.
Item Code Length for The number of characters from the right or left that comprise the item code.
Right/Left Starting Posi-
tion
SCPR (Scan Parameter Profile) screen showing scan parameters for scan profile code L12
APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION BLOCK

Used to set up the MARS bar code.
In this program, you set up your bar code profile codes. Bar code profile codes are only required if you wish to
scan in inventory levels or UI (Unique Identifier) values that are embedded in a bar code label. If the value
that you are scanning is not embedded in another code (that is, the level 1 or 2 or 3 label contains no other
value or extra characters), you do not need to set up a bar code profile in BAPR.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 11
UI values can be scanned in RFCH, RFPIC and many other RF programs. Inventory levels, on the other
hand, can only be scanned in RFCH. For each profile that you set up in BAPR, you define the value being
scanned (LEV1, LEV2, LEV3, LEV4, UI), the scan parameter code to which it is attached, the bar code length
and the bar code ID.
If you are capturing two or more inventory levels in RFCH, you can do so from multiple bar code labels. For
example, you could scan in levels 1 and 2 from bar code label A and level 3 from bar code label B.
Consider the following SCPR and BAPR setups for various bar coded labels. In the following examples, “---”
represents an inventory level, UI, weight or serial number that you wish to capture, while “999” represents
non-AccellosOne 3PL information in the bar code that you do not wish to capture.
BAR CODE(S) SCPR SETUP BAPR SETUP ITEM SETUP
---L1--- N/A N/A N/A
---L3--- N/A N/A N/A
999---L1--- A profile with one detail record The SCPR profile set up in the N/A
whose type is set to LEV1. previous column must be
attached to a bar code profile
whose bar code type is set to
LEV1.
---L2---999 A profile with one detail record The SCPR profile set up in the N/A
whose type is set to LEV2. previous column must be
whose bar code type is set to
LEV2.
---L1---L2---L3--- A profile with three detail The SCPR profile set up in the N/A
records: one whose type is set to previous column must be
LEV1, another whose type is set attached to a bar code profile
to LEV2 and a third whose type whose bar code type is set to
is set to LEV3. LEV1.
999---L1--- Two profiles required: one with a Two records required: one for the N/A
detail record set to LEV1 and level 1 label and one for the level
---L2---999 one with a detail record set to 2 label. The appropriate SCPR
LEV2. profile must be attached to each
record.
999---L1---999---L2---999 Two profiles required. The first Two records required: one for the N/A
profile will contain two detail level 1/2 label and one for the
999---L3---999 records: one set to LEV1 and level 3 label. The appropriate
one set to LEV2. The second SCPR profile must be attached
profile will contain a single record to each record.
set to LEV3.
---UI---999 A profile with one detail record The SCPR profile set up in the N/A
whose type is set to UI. previous column must be
whose bar code type is set to UI.
12 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
BAR CODE(S) SCPR SETUP BAPR SETUP ITEM SETUP
999---WEIGHT--- A profile with one detail record N/A The SCPR profile must
whose type is set to WGTG or be attached to the item.
WGTN.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Bar Code Profile Code Mandatory
Your bar code profile code.
The description for your bar code profile code.
Bar Code Type The following bar code types are supported:
LEV1 (Inventory Level 1)
UI (Unique Identifier)
SER (Serial Number)
YYMMDD
NOTE When the same label contains two or more inventory levels in
SCPR, the bar code type is set to the lowest inventory level. For example, if
your label format is 999---LEV2---LEV3, your bar code type would be set to
LEV3, which is the lowest inventory level.
Scan Parameter Profile Mandatory

Code (SCPR)
The bar code profile’s scan parameter profile code.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 13
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Bar Code ID Optional
The bar code’s ID. This ID identifies the manufacturer of the product. The
number of characters in this field must equal the end position - the start posi-
tion + 1.
NOTE Although bar code ID’s are optional in BAPR, they should be used
whenever they are available. If you do not specify a bar code ID, operators will
be confronted with a pick list whenever two bar codes have the same length. If
the RF operator selects the wrong code from the pick list, he or she could cap-
ture bad data.
Start Position Mandatory if you enter a bar code ID
The starting position of the bar code ID.
End Position Mandatory if you enter a bar code ID
The ending position of the bar code ID.
Variable Length Only available for variable length bar codes based on the GS-1 standard.
The length of the variable portion of the bar code.
Bar Code Length Mandatory
The total length of the bar code. This length must match the length of the scan
parameter profile code in SCPR.
Size of Fixed Part in Vari- Only available for variable length bar codes based on the GS-1 standard.
able Length Bar Code
See your Accellos implementation consultant for further information on this

field.
ASCII Value of Separator Only available for variable length bar codes based on the GS-1 standard.
in Variable Length Bar
Code
See your Accellos implementation consultant for further information on this
field.
14 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
BAPR (Bar Code Profile Code) screen showing setup for bar code L12
RF Profile (MRFP)
In this program, you set up your RF profile code. The RF profile code defines the default values and available
options in the core RF programs. Once you set up your RF profile code in MRFP, you must attach it to the
appropriate customer(s) in CUST.
RFCH QUERIES
This tab shows your RFCH query options.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 15
RF Profile (MRFP)
RFCH Queries tab
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F C H Q UE R I E S )
Customize Query Results Yes

in RFCH No
If you set this field to Yes, you can customize the RFCH pick list in query
mode. For example, if you set the Receipt Number and Warehouse Code
fields to Yes and all the other fields to No, only the receipt number and ware-
house code will appear in the RFCH pick list when you perform a query.
If you set this field to No, you cannot customize the RFCH pick list and all val-
ues — customer code, receipt number, receipt line number, all inventory lev-
els, etc — will display in this list.
16 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F C H Q UE R I E S )
RFCH pick list screen showing customization
Receipt Number If you set this field to Yes, the receipt number will appear in the RFCH pick list
when you perform a query.
Receipt Line Number If you set this field to Yes, the receipt line number will appear in the RFCH pick
list when you perform a query.
Inventory Level 1 If you set this field to Yes, inventory level 1 will appear in the RFCH pick list
Warehouse Code If you set this field to Yes, the warehouse code will appear in the RFCH pick
list when you perform a query.
Quantity If you set this field to Yes, the quantity will appear in the RFCH pick list when
you perform a query.
Hold Code If you set this field to Yes, the hold code will appear in the RFCH pick list when
you perform a query.
RFCH ONLY
This tab shows various RFCH options.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 17
RF Profile (MRFP)
RFCH Only tab
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F C H O NLY)
Label Document Printed Optional
If you enter a document code in this field, the RF operator will be prompted to
print the document in RFCH should he/she create a new receipt line. The doc-
ument code that you enter in this field must have a document type of LA
(Label) in DOCU.
Show Temperature and Not required

Pallet Blocks Enter temperature, trailer/seal number and pallet block
Enter pallet block only
Enter trailer/seal number only
Enter temperature only
Enter trailer/seal number and pallet block
Enter temperature and trailer/seal number
Enter temperature and pallet block
18 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Show Temperature and

Pallet Blocks In this field, you specify which information an RF operator can enter for each
receipt: temperature only, pallet block only, trailer/seal number only, etc. The
options in this field are not mandatory; that is, if temperature entry is activated,
the RF operator can enter a temperature in RFCH, but is not required to do so.
RFCH screen showing prompt for temperature and trailer number information
Perform Trailer Checks Only available if the entry of trailer numbers is activated in the Show Tempera-
ture and Pallet Blocks field
Yes
No
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator will be prompted to perform a series
of trailer checks. If you set this flag to No, the RF operator will NOT be
prompted to perform any trailer checks.
RFCH screen showing trailer check
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 19
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow New Lines Yes (1)

No (2)
Stay in New Line Mode (3)
Allow New Line from Existing Entity on Receipt, Do Not Show New Line
Message (4)
If you select option 1, the RF operator can create new receipt lines in RFCH
with the CL (Create Lines) command and will be prompted to either mark a
receipt as complete or create a new line when finishing the last line of a
receipt.
If you select option 2, the RF operator cannot create new receipt lines in
RFCH and will not be prompted to do so when finishing the last line of a
receipt.
If you select option 3, the RF operator will NOT be prompted to either mark a
receipt as complete or create a new line and the header flow of the receipt will
NOT be advanced.
If you select option 4, the RF operator can only add a new line if the new line
consists of an existing inventory entity on the receipt. For example, the RF
operator receives 20 cases for pallet ID 123 and later discovers an additional
case for the same pallet ID. That case can be added, but a case for pallet ID
456 (which is not on the receipt) cannot be added.
20 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Duplicate Inventory No Validation (1)

Disallow Duplicate Inventory Entities (2)
Disallow Duplicate Inventory UI’s (3)
Disallow Duplicate Inventory Entities, No User Override (4)
Disallow Duplicate Inventory UI’s, No User Override (5)
This flag allows the RF operator to check for duplicate inventory in RFCH
when the line type is U for Unknown in ENRE. If you select option 1, no pop-
up message will appear when the RF operator receives duplicate inventory in
RFCH.
If you select option 2, a pop-up message will appear when the RF operator
receives a duplicate inventory entity and he/she will be prompted to accept or
reject the duplicate scan.
If you select option 3, a pop-up message will appear when the RF operator
receives a duplicate inventory UI and he/she will be prompted to accept or
reject the duplicate scan.
If you select option 4, the RF operator will not be allowed to receive a dupli-
cate inventory entity.
If you select option 5, the RF operator will not be allowed to receive a dupli-
cate inventory UI.
Default Staging Ware- If you enter a staging location and warehouse, the Loc and Whse fields will be
house/Location Code populated with these values when you are performing two-step put-away with
manual staging. You can either accept the defaults or enter a new staging
location and warehouse.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 21
RF Profile (MRFP)
Must Use Tie/Hi/Loose to No

Calculate Receiving Yes
Quantity Yes With Variance Check in P-Type Lines
If you set this flag to No, the Tie, Hi and Loose fields in RFCH will be disabled
and the RF operator can only enter the total quantity for a receipt line.
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator will be required to enter the tie, hi
and loose quantities for each receipt line and the Qty field in RFCH will be dis-
abled. For example, a tie, hi and loose quantity of 5/10/03 would equal 53
cases, while a tie, hi and loose quantity of 5/10/-1 would equal 49 cases. The
Yes option is designed to force RF operators to perform more accurate counts
and reduce receiving errors.
If you set this flag to Yes With Variance Check in P-Type Lines, the following
will occur. If the line quantity calculated from the tie/hi/loose quantities entered
by the operator in RFCH does not match the expected quantity in ENRE, the
operator will be allowed to enter the tie/hi/loose quantities a second time. If
there is still no match, the variance must be processed by a supervisor in
RFCV.
Variance Rules Variance screen for all users

Variance screen for supvr. only
Only allow if supvr. approved
This field determines whether or not the Variance screen is displayed when
the quantity entered does not match the expected quantity. If you select the
“Variance screen for all users” option, any user can process a variance. If you
select the “Variance screen for supvr. only” option, non-supervisors will not be
able to press F3 to zero out the line.
If you select the “Only allow if supvr. approved” option, when non-supervisors
press F3 to zero out the line a supervisor must sign on and approve the trans-
action.
NOTE Regardless of the option that you choose, the variance itself is
always tracked in LORE even if the Variance screen does not display.
Tolerance Check for PO Reserved for future use.
22 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Enter Quantity Break- No

down for U-Type Line Yes
Set Quantity Breakdown to Line Quantity for IQBP With 2 SKU Classes
If you select No, the RF operator cannot change the quantity breakdown for a
U-type line in RFCH. If you select Yes, the RF operator can change the quan-
tity breakdown for a U-type line in RFCH; that is, override the quantity break-
down entered in ENRE. If you select “Set Quantity Breakdown to Line
Quantity for IQBP With 2 SKU Classes”, the item’s quantity breakdown will be
automatically set to the line quantity entered in RFCH.
The following requirements must be met for the Yes and “Set Quantity Break-
down to Line Quantity ...” options:
 the item is set up as a variable quantity breakdown item in ITEM
 the item has been received on a U-type line in ENRE
 the inventory entity is new (that is, it has not been previously received in the
warehouse)
RFCH screen showing prompt for quantity breakdown
Expiry Date Rules Disable expiry date entry for U-type line
If you select this option, the expiry date entry screen will NOT display in RFCH
even though manual entry of expiry dates has been activated for the item in
ITSH.
If you leave this field blank, the expiry date entry screen will display in RFCH if
manual entry of expiry dates has been activated for the item in ITSH.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 23
RF Profile (MRFP)
Enter/Change Hold Code Allow Entry/Change of Hold Code (default value)

Disallow Change of Hold Code. Allow New Hold Code.*
Disallow Entry/Change of Hold Code*
Skip Hold Code
If you select “Allow Entry/Change of Hold Code“, the RF operator can enter
new hold codes and change existing hold codes in RFCH. If you select “Disal-
low Change of Hold Code. Allow New Hold Code.’, the RF operator can enter
new hold codes but cannot change existing hold codes in RFCH.
If you select “Disallow Entry/Change of Hold Code”, the RF operator will have
access to the Hold field in RFCH but cannot change a hold code. If you select
“Skip Hold Code”, the RF operator will have no access to the Hold field and as
a consequence will not be able to change the quantity.
* The two non-default options in this field are NOT available when an item hold profile is
set up in IHOP and attached to an item in ITEM.
RFCH ONLY (2)

This tab shows additional RFCH options.
MRFP screen showing RFCH Only (2) tab
24 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F C H O NLY 2 )
Validate Item Weight/ Not Required

Cube Setup Check Weight and Cube
This field allows you to check whether the base SKU of the item being
received has a weight and cube greater than zero.
If you select “Not Required”, no check will be made of the item’s base SKU
weight and cube.
If you select “Check Weight and Cube”, AccellosOne 3PL will perform the
check. If the item fails the check, the RF operator will be forced to enter the
missing values in RFCH before receiving the receipt line. RFCH in turn will
update the missing values in the Quantity Breakdown Block of ITEM.
Extra Charge Entry Type See “Extra Charge Setup for RF” on page 81 for further information.
Concatenate Inventory Only available for U-type lines in which the RF operator selects the receipt
Level in U-Type Line number from a pick list
Concatenate Level 2 to Beginning of Current Value

Concatenate Level 2 to End of Current Value
If you select either of these two options, a scanned in value such as a date
code (for example, 101101) will be appended to either the beginning or end of
the level 2 value.
For example, office staff create a U-type receipt line in ENRE and enter the
level 2 value normally. In RFCH the RF operator scans in a value and that
value is concatenated to the level 2 value entered in ENRE.
Keep First Location Entry No

and Skip the Field Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator can skip the Location field after his or her
first entry and put-away the remaining receipt lines in the same location.
Allow Change to Receiv- No

ing Mode Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator can switch from one-step put-away to two-
step put-away (or vice versa) in RFCH.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 25
RF Profile (MRFP)
Special Receiving Mode U Line Receiving, Enter UI, Scan Serial as Inventory Level
Types RFCH to Gen Stag Loc, RFPU to PnD Loc, Then to Final Loc*
RFCH to Gen Stag Loc, RFPU to PnD Loc, Then to Final Loc
RFCH Overrides*
In this field, you can select a special receiving type mode required for your
facility. If you leave this field blank, special receiving type modes will be deac-
tivated.
*These two special receiving mode types require special setup. See the section on
three-step put-away in “Unloading Product in RFCH”.
Validate Inventory Level Your scan parameter profile code for validating inventory levels in RFCH
from Bar Code Using receiving. This code is a default scan parameter code at the customer level. In
SCPR Code ITEM, you can override your customer default by entering an SCPR code in
the Scan Parameter Code for Inventory Validation (SCPR) field.
If an invalid inventory level is scanned in RFCH, the RF operator will not be

allowed to proceed.
Door Rules Door Not Used

Enter/Update Door in RFCH
If you select Door Not Used, the RF operator cannot select or change a door
assignment. If you select Enter/Update Door in RFCH, the RF operator can
enter/change a door assignment.
Display Quantity Break- No

down Yes
If you select No, the item’s quantity breakdown will be suppressed in RFCH. If
you select Yes, the item’s quantity breakdown will be displayed in RFCH.
RFCH showing quantity breakdown displayed
26 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Put-Away of Multi- No

ple Pallets in RFCH Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator can put-away multiple pallets in the same
location in a single step; that is, the RF operator scans two or more UI’s in
RFCH but only enters the location once.
The following restrictions apply:

 all product has the same level 1
 equipment tracking must be activated in COMP
 the Location Required flag in MHET must be activated
 the pallets do not contain mixed hold codes
Enter Quantity Break- No

down for P-Type Line Yes
Set Quantity Breakdown to Line Quantity for IQBP With 2 SKU Classes
If you select No, the item’s quantity breakdown cannot be changed in RFCH. If
you select Yes, the RF operator can change the quantity breakdown in RFCH;
that is, override the quantity breakdown entered in ENRE. If you select “Set
Quantity Breakdown to Line Quantity for IQBP With 2 SKU Classes”, the
item’s quantity breakdown will be automatically set to the line quantity entered
in RFCH.
The following requirements must be met for the Yes and “Set Quantity Break-
down to Line Quantity ...” options:
 the item is set up as a variable quantity breakdown item in ITEM
 the item has been received on a P-type line in ENRE
 the inventory entity is new (that is, it has not been previously received in the
warehouse)
RFCH screen showing prompt for quantity breakdown
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 27
RF Profile (MRFP)
Update Expiry Date for P- No

Type Line Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator can override the expiry date for P-type lines
in RFCH. The item shipping profile (ITSH) attached to the item must have
expiry date entry activated (Enter Expiry Dates = Yes).
RFCH screen showing prompt for expiry date
RFCH ONLY (3)

This tab shows additional RFCH options.
MRFP screen showing RFCH Only (3) tab
28 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Capture Photo When Only available for Intermec CK71 devices

Unloading First UI
Yes
No
If you select Yes, you can capture images when unloading first UI. If you
select No, image capture will be deactivated when unloading first UI.
Capture Photo When UI Only available for Intermec CK71 devices

is Put On Hold
Yes
No
If you select Yes, you can capture images when placing UI on hold. If you
select No, image capture will be deactivated when placing UI on hold.
Duplicate Receiving Create Second Line With Remainder (1)

Rules if Qty. Entered < Prompt User to Zero Out Second Line (2)
Qty. Received Zero Out Second Line Automatically (3)
In this field, you specify your receiving rules when the quantity entered in
RFCH is less than the quantity received in ENRE.
EXAMPLE
quantity entered (ENRE) = 100 CS
quantity received (RFCH) = 99 CS
With option 1, AccellosOne 3PL will create a second line with a quantity of 1.
With option 2, the RF operator will be prompted to zero out the second line. If
the RF operator selects Yes, the result will be option 3; if the RF operator
selects No, the result will be option 1.
With option 3, AccellosOne 3PL will automatically create a second line with a
quantity of 0.
Allow Mixed Pallet for Yes

Items With Same ILOP No
If you select Yes, you can receive mixed pallets in RFCH for items with the
same ILOP code. If you select No, you cannot receive mixed pallets in RFCH.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 29
RF Profile (MRFP)
Use Repetitive Scan With Level 1

ALIT Starting With Inven- Level 2
tory Level 3
Level 4
In this field, you can activate grocery style scanning in RFCH. Grocery style
scanning is used when receiving product such as clothing that does not come
in a standard pallet/case quantity breakdown and therefore each piece
received must be individually scanned.
One scan can represent a quantity of one for that item or any other quantity
that you define. AccellosOne 3PL will calculate the count automatically based
on the number of pieces scanned and your setup in ALIT.
Sort Sequence Code This sort sequence code allows you to define a custom sort sequence for
(SOSE) receipt lines in RFCH. When you enter RFCH and key in a receipt number, the
receipt lines will be sorted according to your SOSE code. If you leave this field
blank, receipt lines in RFCH will be sorted in receipt line number order.
Receiving Qty. Must be No

Less Than or Equal to Yes
Item Pallet Qty.
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator cannot receive oversized non-stan-
dard pallets. For example, if an item's quantity breakdown is 50 cases per pal-
let and the ENRE quantity for a given receipt line is 1 pallet or 50 cases, the
RF operator cannot enter a quantity greater than 50 cases.
EXAMPLES: (quantity breakdown of 50 cases per pallet)

ENRE quantity: 1PLT RESULT: normal processing
RFCH quantity: 1 PLT
ENRE quantity: 1 PLT RESULT: normal processing

RFCH quantity: 2 PLT
ENRE quantity: 1 PLT RESULT: normal processing

RFCH quantity: 50 CS
ENRE quantity: 1 PLT RESULT: receipt quantity rejected

ENRE quantity: 1 PLT 30 CS RESULT: normal processing

RFCH quantity: 1 PLT 31 CS
ENRE quantity: 51 CS RESULT: receipt quantity rejected

30 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Skipping of Level Only applicable if the Validate Inventory Level from Bar Code Using SCPR
Validation Code field is activated.
No
Yes
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator can continue to receive a receipt
line in RFCH even if inventory level validation based on SCPR fails.
Special Item Process Execute Item Process Capture Before Staging Location Entered
Capture Mode
If you select Execute Item Process Capture Before Staging Location Entered,
the RF operator scans process values before entering a staging location. If
you leave this field blank, the RF operator scans process values after entering
a staging location.
RFCH SHARED
This tab shows options available in both RFCH and RFPU.
RFCH Shared tab
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 31
RF Profile (MRFP)
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F C H S H AR E D)
Show Default Quantity in Yes

RFCH/RFPU No
RFPU Only
Variance Screen Only
If you select Yes, AccellosOne 3PL will display the received quantity of the
receipt line from ENRE as the default quantity in RFCH/RFPU. You can press
Enter to confirm it in these programs or you can enter a new quantity.
If you select No, the received quantity from ENRE will not be displayed in
RFCH/RFPU.
If you select RFPU Only, AccellosOne 3PL will display the received quantity of
the receipt line from ENRE as the default quantity in RFPU.
If you select Variance Screen Only, AccellosOne 3PL will display the received
quantity of the receipt line from ENRE only on the Variance screen.
RFCH/RFPU Quantity Only available for P-type receipt lines

Must Match ENRE Quan-
tity
Must match ENRE (1)
Matching not required (2)
Warn if mismatch with ENRE (3)
No warning if mismatch with ENRE (4)
Receive no more than original lines expected quantity in RFPU (5)
Must match ENRE in RFCH. No more than original line expected quantity
in RFPU (6)
If you select option 1, the entered quantity in RFCH/RFPU must match the
expected quantity in ENRE. If the two quantities do not match, the RF opera-
tor will not be able to process the receipt line.
If you select option 2, the entered quantity in RFCH/RFPU need NOT match
the expected quantity in ENRE and a warning message is only generated
when the received quantity is greater than the expected quantity.
If you select option 3, a warning message will be generated when the entered
quantity in RFCH/RFPU does not match the expected quantity in ENRE, but
the RF operator will be allowed to proceed.
32 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
If you select option 4, no warning message will be generated when the

entered quantity in RFCH/RFPU does not match the expected quantity in
ENRE.
If you select option 5, matching is not required in RFCH. However, the entered
quantity in RFPU cannot exceed the expected quantity in ENRE.
If you select option 6, the entered quantity in RFCH must match the expected
quantity in ENRE and the entered quantity in RFPU cannot exceed the
expected quantity in ENRE.
Supvr. Must Authorize Yes

Location Overrides in No
RFCH/RFPU/RFRL blank = No
If you select Yes, RF operators cannot override a system-assigned put-away

location without the approval of a supervisor. If you select No, RF operators
can override system-assigned locations without the approval of a supervisor.
NOTE The approval of a supervisor is NOT required to override a put-

away location with a staging location.
Validate One Process Only available for P-type receipt lines

Value
RFCH Only
RFPIC Only
RFCH and RFPIC
RFCH Only in Supervr. Override Mode
None
This flag allows the RF operator to validate the serial number and other infor-
mation such as level 1 and 2 values in bar code labels. Validation will only
occur for P-type receipt lines when the full quantity is received and all process
values have been entered or scanned in.
If you set this field to RFCH Only, RFPIC Only or RFCH and RFPIC, the RF
operator will be prompted to scan in one label from each pallet for validation
purposes in the appropriate program. Should the label be missing or not valid,
the RF operator will not be able to complete the receipt in RFCH or the order
in RFPIC.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 33
RF Profile (MRFP)
If you set this field to RFCH Only in Supervr. Override Mode, the RF operator
will be prompted to scan in one label from each pallet for validation purposes
in RFCH. Should the label be missing or not valid, the RF supervisor login
screen is displayed. When the supervisor logs in, he or she will be prompted
to select how long to turn off process value validation: either turn off for just
that pallet or for all pallets on that receipt or all pallets of that item on that
receipt.
RFCH screen showing supervisor options
If you set this flag to None, no validation of the serial number or other informa-
tion on a bar code label will occur.
Advance Receipt Header Yes (default)

When Last Line Con- No
firmed
If you select Yes, the receipt header will be automatically confirmed when the
last receipt line is confirmed in RFCH/RFPU. If you select No, the receipt
header will NOT be automatically confirmed when the last receipt line is con-
firmed in RFCH/RFPU.
The No option allows you to add new receipt lines after all receipt lines on a
receipt have been confirmed.
Maximum Quantity In this field, you specify the maximum quantity for any given receipt line in
Allowed in RFCH/RFPU RFCH/RFPU. If you do not enter a number, the maximum quantity allowed in
RF receiving for a receipt line is 9999.
34 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Put Away Partial Pallet to Yes

Reserved Area No
Yes, With Allowing Over a Pallet as a Full Pallet
If you select No, partial pallet put-away to a reserved area is deactivated and
normal put-away rules to a non-reserved area apply.
If you select Yes, partial pallet put-away to a reserved area is activated and
the following logic applies:
 if received quantity = zero or null, halt the receiving process and send a
“SEE SUPERVISOR” message to RF operator
 if received quantity = standard quantity breakdown, pallet is deemed to be a
full pallet
 if received quantity < standard quantity breakdown, pallet is deemed to be a
partial pallet
 if received quantity > standard quantity breakdown, halt the receiving pro-
cess and send a “SEE SUPERVISOR” message to RF operator
If you select Yes With Allowing Over a Pallet as Full Pallet, the same logic as
Yes will apply with the following exception:
 if received quantity > standard quantity breakdown, no message is gener-
ated and normal put-away continues
RFPU
This tab shows various RFPU options.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 35
RF Profile (MRFP)
RFPU tab
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (RFPU)
Validation Rules for Put- Stop operator from proceeding

Away to Pick Line Allow operator to proceed (reserved for future use)
Omit validation of location
If you select “Stop operator from proceeding”, the RF operator will not be able
to put-away product in RFPU to a pick line location that is not set up for that
product in PIIT. If you select “Omit validation of location”, the RF operator will
able to put-away product to any pick line location without restriction.
Allow Put-Away to Stag- Yes

ing Location No
If you select No, the RF operator cannot put-away product to a staging loca-
tion in RFPU. If you select Yes, the RF operator can perform three-step put-
away; that is, put-away product to a staging location in RFPU. When product
is assigned to a staging location, the receipt’s flow remains at STPU (Start
Put-Away) and is not advanced to PUCO (Put-Away Complete) until a non-
staging location is eventually entered.
36 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Variance Handling Variance screen deactivated

Variance screen no sup. override
Variance screen with sup. override
Variance screen for sup. only
If you select “Variance screen deactivated”, the Variance screen does not dis-
play for any user. If you select “Variance screen no sup. override”, the Vari-
ance screen displays for all users and no supervisor override is required to
enter a variance. If you select “Variance screen with sup. override”, the Vari-
ance screen displays for all users and a supervisor override is required to
enter a variance. If you select “Variance screen for sup. only”, the Variance
screen displays for supervisors only and no supervisor override is required to
enter a variance.
NOTE Regardless of the option that you choose, the variance itself is
always tracked in LORE even if the Variance screen does not display.
Validation Rules for Sys- No validation for system-assigned locations and overrides allowed
tem-Assigned Locations Validation required WHEN system assigns location and overrides
allowed
Validation required ONLY for system-assigned locations and overrides
allowed
If you select “No validation”, the RF operator can press Enter in RFPU to
accept a system-assigned location without the need to re-enter it. If you select
“Validation required WHEN ...”, the RF operator must re-enter or scan in your
put-away location in RFPU to confirm it.
If you select “Validation required ONLY ...”, the RF operator must re-enter or
scan in your put-away location in RFPU to confirm it only when the location is
assigned a location type in LOTP whose Directed Put-Away flag has been set
to Yes.
Event-Driven Cycle See the Cycle Counting Guide for further information on event-driven cycle
Count Profile (CYCP) counts.
Allow Quantity to be No
Updated Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator can enter or modify the quantity of a receipt
line in RFPU. If you select No, the cursor will skip over the Qty field and the
quantity cannot be entered or modified.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 37
RF Profile (MRFP)
Enter/Change Hold Code Allow Entry/Change of Hold Code

Disallow Change of Hold Code. Allow New Hold Code
Disallow Entry/Change of Hold Code
f you select “Allow Entry/Change of Hold Code“, the RF operator can enter
new hold codes and change existing hold codes in RFCPU. If you select “Dis-
allow Change of Hold Code. Allow New Hold Code.’, the RF operator can
enter new hold codes but cannot change existing hold codes in RFPU. If you
select “Disallow Entry/Change of Hold Code”, the RF operator will have no
access to the hold code field in RFPU.
Maximum Number of F3 In this field, you specify the maximum number of times that the RF operator
(NX) Allowed Per ILOP can press F3 (NX) in RFPU to display a suggested put-away location.
Sequence
Allow Put-Away of Multi- No

ple Pallets in RFPU Yes*
If you select Yes, the RF operator can put-away multiple pallets in the same
location in a single step; that is, the RF operator scans two or more UI’s but
only enters the location once. If you select No, the RF operator must put-away
each pallet individually.

* Does not support directed put-away. That is, only the flows INST and STPU can have
the Assign Location flag set to Yes.
Allow Receiving of Multi- Disallow Receiving Multiple Lines Together

ple Lines Together Allow Receiving of Multiple Lines Together
If you select “Allow Receiving of Multiple Lines Together”, the RF operator can
put-away multiple receipt lines in a single step if the following conditions are
met:
 all lines have the same UI
 all lines are in the same location with the same hold code (if any)
 all items have three or four inventory levels
 the quantity entered is the total quantity and it is entered in the lowest SKU
NOTE If you used Directed Move Inbound to assign locations and the pal-
let has mixed items, the ILOP profile from the item with the largest quantity in
the pallet is used to produce a to location.
38 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Change of Warehouse Confirmation Required

Rules Allow Change of Warehouse Code, No Confirmation Required
Do Not Allow Change of Warehouse Code
If you select “Conformation Required”, the RF operator will be prompted to

confirm the change in warehouse code. If you select “Allow Change of Ware-
house Code, No Confirmation Required”, the RF operator will not be prompted
to confirm the change in warehouse code. If you select “Do Not Allow Change
of Warehouse Code”, the RF operator will not be able to change the ware-
house code.
RFPIC
This tab show various RFPIC/RFPK options.
RFPIC tab
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 39
RF Profile (MRFP)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (RFPIC)
Default Mode Only Case Picking

Only Pallet Picking
Case Picking
Pallet Picking
If you select “Only Case Picking”, the RF operator cannot select pallet or nor-
mal mode (NM) in RFPIC. If you select “Only Pallet Picking”, the RF operator
cannot select case pick mode (CP) in RFPIC (unless he or she is picking from
a pick line location). If you select “Pallet Picking”, the RF operator will be
prompted to confirm pallet or normal mode (NM) as the default picking mode
in RFPIC. If you select “Case Picking (CP)”, the RF operator will be prompted
to confirm case pick mode as the default picking mode in RFPIC.
Once the RF operator selects a mode in RFPIC, that mode remains in effect
for all orders until the RF operator exits RFPIC or changes his or her mode by
pressing F2.
If the RF operator is picking from a pick line location, the mode is automati-
cally set to Case Picking regardless of the option that the RF operator selects
in this field.
Allow Loading Before Yes

Completion of Picking No
Process
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator can start loading in OLOP before
picking all product on the order in RFPI/RFPIC. If you set this flag to No, the
RF operator must pick all product on the order in RFPI/RFPIC before loading
in OLOP.
Duplicate Pallet Label Allow Duplicate Pallet ID’s (1)

Rules Disallow Duplicate Pallet ID’s (2)
Operator Decision in all Orders (3)
Disallow Duplicate Pallet ID’s in Open Orders (4)
Operator Decision in Open Orders (5)
Allow Duplicate Pallet ID’s in Its Own Order Only (6)
If you select 1, duplicate pallet ID’s will be allowed without restriction. If you
select 2, duplicate pallet ID’s will never be allowed.
If you select 3, the RF operator will be prompted to accept or reject a duplicate

pallet ID for all orders. If you select 4, duplicate pallet ID’s will not be allowed
in open orders. If you select 5, RF operator will be prompted to accept or
reject a duplicate pallet ID for open orders only. If you select 6, duplicate pallet
ID’s will be allowed only within an individual order.
40 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Partial Picking in Allow all, no restriction

Normal Mode Allow last remaining partial inventory and full pallets
Allow full pallets only
Allow PALL pick method only
This flag governs which order lines appear in the RFPIC pick list when work-
ing in normal mode.
If you select “Allow all, no restriction”, all order lines regardless of pick quantity
appear in the RFPIC pick list. If you select “Allow last remaining partial inven-
tory and full pallets”, only full pallet picks and partial quantities representing
the last remaining inventory in a location appear in the RFPIC pick list.
If you select “Allow full pallets only”, only full pallet picks appear in the RFPIC
pick list. The RF operator must switch to case pick mode to pick partial order
lines.
A partial quantity is defined as 60% or more of the total quantity in the loca-
tion. For example, if there are 50 cases in a location and you need to pick 30,
you can scan in the 20 cases to be removed rather than the 30 cases to be
picked. This option is designed to save time by reducing the number of cases
scanned.
If you select “PALL pick method only”, only full pallet picks generated by the
Wave Manager appear in the RFPIC pick list.
Assign PID on Full Pallets In NM Mode

or Last Inventory No
In CP Mode as the first pick
If you set this flag to “In NM Mode”, the lowest level or pallet ID will be added
to the Process Block of the order under the code CP for case pick when pick-
ing full pallets or picking the last entity in a location in normal mode.
If you set this flag to No, the lowest level or pallet ID will NOT be added to the
Process Block of the order under the code CP for case pick.
If you set this flag to “In CP Mode as the first pick”, the lowest level or pallet ID
will be added to the Process Block of the order under the code CP for case
pick after the first pick in case pick mode.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 41
RF Profile (MRFP)
Number of Days for Label The “value greater than zero” option requires a custom label from Accellos.
Validation
If you enter a value greater than zero in this field, AccellosOne 3PL will vali-
date a case’s date in RFPIC. Should the Number of Days for Label Validation
value be less than the order to arrive date minus the date embedded in the
case's bar code label, the message “Too old for order” will display and you will
not be able to pick the case.
If you enter zero or leave this field blank, the RF operator can scan in the
cases to be removed from a full pallet rather than the cases to be picked when
picking a partial quantity.
Allow Suspended Holds Split Order Line, No Suspended Hold

If you select “Split Order Line, No Suspended Hold” and place product on hold
in RFPIC, the order line will be split but no suspended hold will be placed on
the product that is not picked and the new order line can be picked at any
time. With this option, the F3 (HD) command in RFPIC is not available.
Allow Suspended Holds

Only Allow if Supervisor Approved
If you select “Allow Suspended Holds”, non-supervisory operators can place
product on suspended hold in RFPIC. If you select “Only allow if Supervisor
approved”, the following rules will apply:
 non-supervisory operators can place product on suspended hold in RFPIC if
approved by a supervisor (HD command)
 a partial pick will require the approval of a supervisor
With both these options, the order line will be split into two: line 1 will contain
the pick quantity and line 2 will contain the remaining quantity that could not
be picked. Line 2 will be placed on suspended hold and AccellosOne 3PL will
attempt to reallocate the line 2 quantity.
Split Order Line, Allow Suspended Hold

Split Order Line, Supervisor Approved
If you select option “Split Order Line, Allow Suspended Hold”, non-supervisory
operators can place product on suspended hold in RFPIC. If you select “Split
Order Line, Supervisor approved”, the following rules will apply:
 non-supervisory operators can place product on suspended hold in RFPIC if
approved by a supervisor (HD command)
 a partial pick will NOT require the approval of a supervisor
42 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
With both these options, the order line will be split into two: line 1 will contain
the pick quantity and line 2 will contain the remaining quantity that could not
be picked. Line 2 will NOT be placed on suspended hold and AccellosOne
3PL will NOT attempt to reallocate the line 2 quantity.
NOTE The option that you select in this field can be overridden at the item
level in the program MIRP (Item RF Profile Code) by selecting a different
option for a given item.
Disallow Process Value Yes

Scanning No
If you select Yes, the RF operator cannot scan process values in RFPIC.
Instead, he/she must scan these values in UOPR. If you select No, the RF
operator can scan process values in either program.
Allow Picking Outside Yes

Pick Line No
This flag allows you to pick pick line product from a non-pick line location such
as bulk or rack when multiple replenishments for the same product cause
overcrowding in your pick line. This choice is available when the full order
quantity is not available in the pick line location and a replenishment has been
generated.
For example, suppose your order quantity is 10 cases, there are only five
cases in the pick line and the replenishment quantity is 60 cases. The RF
operator can choose to pick the 10 cases from a bulk or non-pick line location
instead of waiting for a replenishment and picking from the pick line. The 10
cases picked from bulk is subtracted from the replenishment quantity; 60 -10 =
50.
If you select Yes, pick line picking from a non-pick line location is activated. If
you select No, pick line picking from a non-pick line location is not allowed.
Replenishment Rules for REPI done inside of RFPIC

Pick Line REPI done separately (default)
Determined by the user
If you select “REPI is done inside of RFPIC”, the RF operator can perform
replenishments in RFPIC. If you select “REPI is done separately”, the RF
operator can only perform replenishments in RFRP or RFPL. If you select
“Determined by the user”, each time that the RF operator logs in, he/she will
be prompted to select a replenishment mode.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 43
RF Profile (MRFP)
Display Original Order Only available for consolidated picking after consolidating your orders in COPI
Number/Quantity for Con- (Consolidated Picking)
solidated Picks
No Display
Display at UI Field
If you select No Display, the original order number and quantity will not be dis-
played when the RF operator selects a consolidated line. If you select Display
at UI Field, RFPIC will display the original order number, quantity and SKU in
a pop-up window after the RF operator selects the UI value.
RFPIC screen showing display of original order number and

quantity
44 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Display Pallet Screen Do not display

Display before Picking
Display on completion of Picking
Display after RFSC
If you select “Do not display”, the Pallet Block will not display in RFPIC and the
RF operator will not be able to ship, receive or exchange pallets in this pro-
gram. If you select “Display before Picking”, the Pallet Block will display before
picking in RFPIC. If you select “Display on Completion of Picking”, the Pallet
Block will display after picking in RFPIC.
If you select “Display after RFSC”, the Pallet Block will display after performing
manual cartonization in RFSC.
RFPIC screen showing Pallet Block
RFPIC (2)
This tab shows additional RFPIC/RFPK options.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 45
RF Profile (MRFP)
RFPIC (2) tab
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (RFPIC 2)
Activate Inventory Count Always

Never
If Quantity Reaches or Falls Below Threshold Quantity
Every 2nd / 3rd / 4th / 5th / 6th / 7th / 8th / 9th Line
CP mode options
If you select “Always”, the RF operator will be required to enter an inventory

count for each pick location in RFPIC. If you select “Never”, inventory counting
in RFPIC will be deactivated. If you select “If Quantity Reaches or Falls Below
Threshold Quantity”, a count will be required only if the on-hand quantity
reaches or falls below the threshold quantity.
If you select one of the line options (every 2nd, 3rd, 4th, etc. line), a count will
be required only for every 2nd, 3rd, 4th, etc. pick.
46 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Inventory Count Rules Only available if Activate Inventory Count = Always
These rules govern what happens in RFPIC when the inventory count for the
location that is entered by the RF operator does not match the on hand quan-
tity.
Ignore investigations
No record will be created in ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation) and the RF
operator can pick the order line.
Supervisor must override

The RF operator cannot pick an order line unless a supervisor logs in and
either accepts or rejects the discrepancy. Regardless of the supervisor’s deci-
sion, the order line can be loaded in OLOP. If the supervisor accepts the dis-
crepancy, no record will be created in ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation). If
the supervisor rejects the discrepancy, a record is created in ICIN.
Flow advancement not allowed

A record will be created in ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation) and the RF
operator cannot load an order line in OLOP.
Super. override/No flow adv.

The RF operator cannot pick an order line unless a supervisor logs in and
either accepts or rejects the discrepancy. If the supervisor accepts the dis-
crepancy, the order line can be loaded in OLOP and no record will be created
in ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation). If the supervisor rejects the discrep-
ancy, the order line cannot be loaded in OLOP until the record is cleared in
ICIN.
Threshold Quantity to Ini- Only available if you select If Quantity Reaches or Falls Below Threshold
tiate Count Quantity in the Activate Inventory Count / Hold field
Your threshold quantity for initiating an inventory count.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 47
RF Profile (MRFP)
Automatically Assign Pal- Yes

let ID No
SSCC18 Pallet Sequence Number
If you select Yes, a unique pallet ID will be generated in RFPIC while in CP

(case pick) mode and the cursor will automatically advance to the Printer field.
The system-generated pallet ID cannot be changed by the RF operator.
If you select No, the RF operator has two choices when prompted for a pallet
ID in RFPIC while in case pick mode:
 he or she can press Enter to have AccellosOne 3PL generate a unique pal-
let ID
 he or she can enter or scan in a pallet ID not generated in AccellosOne 3PL.
The Yes option requires a label document in either the Label Document or
Quick Response Label Document fields. If all your consignees use quick
response labels, a label document is not required in the Label Document for
RF Picking field. If some consignees use quick response labels while others
do not, you must enter a label document in both fields.
If you do not use quick response labels, a label document is not required in
the Quick Response Label Document field.
If you select SSCC18 Pallet Sequence Number, the unique pallet ID gener-
ated in RFPIC will be a valid SSCC 18 pallet sequence number.
Label Document Only available if Automatically Assign Pallet ID = Yes
If you enter a label document in this field, the Label field in RFPIC when work-
ing in CP (case pick) mode will be populated with the label document number.
If you set up a detail record in DOCU for this document specifying both the
printer and operator, the Printer field in RFPIC will be populated with the RF
operator’s printer.
Quick Response Label Only available if Automatically Assign Pallet ID = Yes

Document
If you enter a label document in this field, the Label field in RFPIC when work-
ing in CP (case pick) mode will be populated with the quick response number.
If you set up a detail record in DOCU for this document specifying both the
printer and operator, the Printer field in RFPIC will be populated with the RF
operator’s printer.
48 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Sort Sequence Code Optional

(SOSE)
The sort sequence code used to sequence or “snake” the pick list of picking
tasks in RFPIC. You can apply these advanced SQL statements to either item
codes, location codes or inventory entities.
When you activate sort sequencing, the RF operator can initially pick any item,
location or inventory entity from the sorted list, but once this initial choice is
made the RF operator must finish picking the item, location or inventory entity
in RFPIC before proceeding to another item, location or inventory entity.
For example, suppose you set up a sort sequence based on item and there
are three different items on a given order: item A, item B and item C. When the
RF operator enters RFPIC and selects any item on the order — say item B —
he or she must pick all order lines containing item B before picking another
item. The same logic applies to the remaining items on the order; once a given
item is selected, all order lines containing that item must be picked before pro-
ceeding to another item.
Pick list in RFPIC shown in location code sequence (A107, A107, B102)
NOTE The table name (c_invt, e_ord_d5d1 or m_loc) is required in your

SQL statement.
If you do not specify a sort sequence code, picking tasks in the pick list will be
sequenced in location code sequence.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 49
RF Profile (MRFP)
Sort Sequence Based on Item

Location
Inventory Entity
The value that the sort sequence is based on.
Event-Driven Cycle See the Cycle Counting Guide for further information on event-driven cycle
Count Profile (CYCP) counts.
Enter Outbound Pallet ID Only available for case pick mode in RFPIC/RFITLV
Before Picking
No
Yes
If you select No, the RF operator must enter label parameters after picking his/
her order line(s). If you select Yes, the RF operator must enter label parame-
ters before picking his/her order lines.
Generation of Outbound Not Required (1)

Pallet ID Label OPID Generated by System - Validation Required (2)
OPID Generated by System - No Validation (3)
OPID Generated by Users - No Validation (4)
OPID Generated by Users - Validation Required (5)
In this field, you set your label printing options for the outbound pallet ID label
in RFPIC and RFPK.
50 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
If you select option 1, no label will print and the PRT field will be bypassed.
If you select option 2, the RF operator must press Enter in the LABEL field to
generate an AccellosOne 3PL OPID. Then he/she scans in this OPID to vali-
date it.
If you select option 3, the RF operator must press Enter in the LABEL field to
generate an AccellosOne 3PL OPID, but does not perform a scan to validate
it.
If you select option 4, the RF operator must manually enter or scan in your
own non-AccellosOne 3PL OPID. If you select option 5, the RF operator must
manually enter or scan in your own non-AccellosOne 3PL OPID twice.
Extra Charge Entry Type See “Extra Charge Setup for RF” on page 81 for further information.
RFPIC (3)
REPIC (3) tab
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 51
RF Profile (MRFP)
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S RF P I C ( 3 )
Display Location/UI Rules Display Location/UI When Picking from Pick Line
Display Location/UI for All Locations
Display and Bypass Location/Qty in NM Mode
Display and Bypass UI (non-reserve)
Display and Bypass UI When Picking from Pick Line
Skip Location-From and Go to UI; Show Line Qty and Skip Qty field in
NM Mode
Depending on the option that you choose, you can speed up picking by elimi-
nating certain key strokes and validations in RFPIC.
Separate Hazmat by Item No

in Each Pick Yes
If you define segregation rules for hazardous product in IHZV (Item Hazard-
ous Material Validation) and set this flag to Yes, your segregation rules will
apply to RFPIC and RFMG. If you set this flag to No, any segregation rules
defined in IHZV will be ignored in RFPIC and RFMG.
Warehouse/Location for Reserved for future use.

Kit Lines
Rules for Picking by Item/ Validate Item/UPC for All Locations (1)
UPC Validate Item/UPC in Pick Line Locations (2)
No (3)
If you select option 1 or 2, the UPC code scanned by the operator will be
checked against the UPC code set up in ALIT. If the inventory levels linked to
the UPC code in ALIT match the inventory levels of the pick order line, the
pick will be accepted as valid. If, on the other hand, the inventory levels linked
to the UPC code in ALIT do NOT match the inventory levels of the pick order
line, the pick will be rejected.
Option 1 performs the validation for all locations, while option 2 performs the
validation for pick line locations only.
If you select option 3 (No), no validation of the level 2/3/4 values in ALIT will
occur. For one-level accounts only, the operator can scan in either the item
code (level 1) or the UPC code.
52 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Capture OPID Cube and For custom use only

Dimension
In RF Pick
In RF Sorting
If you select In RF Pick, the RF operator can capture in RFPIC the cubic
dimensions in meters and the gross weight in kilograms for each carton/pallet.
If you select In RF Sorting, the RF operator can capture in RFSC the cubic
dimensions in meters and the gross weight in kilograms for each carton/pallet.
If you leave this field blank, the capture of cubic dimensions and gross weight
will be deactivated in RFPIC and RFSC.
Disable Last Label Scan Reserved for future use.

in RFPK
Use Bookmark in Picklist Yes option not available if Sort Sequence Code (SOSE) field populated
No
Yes
If you select Yes, the first order line in the picklist selected by the RF operator
will be bookmarked. When the RF operator finishes picking that line and
returns to the pick list, the pick list will display the next order line after the
bookmark rather than the first order line in the pick list.
Allow Case Pick While in No

CART Mode in RFPK Yes
If you select Yes, pick method 7 (Less Than Full Pallet) will be activated in
RFPK.
Allow Reusable Cartons Reserved for future use.

in RFPK
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 53
RF Profile (MRFP)
Supervisor Override Override Required for Reduce Order Qty Only

Required for BATP in Override Required for Short of Inventory Only
RFPK Override Required for Both Reduce Order Qty and Short of Inventory
Override Not Required for Exceptions
In this field, you specify under which circumstances a supervisor override is

required when the RF operator is wave picking in RFPK in batch label pick
mode.
If you select “Override Required for Reduce Order Qty Only”, a supervisor
override is required when the RF operator reduces the order quantity. For
example, the order quantity is 10 eaches, there are 10 eaches in the location
and RF operator picks five eaches.
If you select “Override Required for Short of Inventory Only”, a supervisor

override is required when the RF operator shorts an order line. For example,
the order quantity is 10 eaches, there are 10 eaches in the location but five
are damaged. The RF operator picks five eaches and shorts the remaining
five.
If you select “Not Required for Exceptions”, the RF operator can reduce the
order quantity and/or short an order line without a supervisor override.
Automatically Confirm No
Order After Last Pick Yes
If you select Yes, the order will be automatically confirmed when the RF oper-
ator picks the last line. If you select No, the order must be manually confirmed
in CHOF.
NOTE The Yes option does not allow any flows between FIPI (Finish Pick-
ing) and COOR (Confirm Order).
Enter Pallet Type No

Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator must enter a valid pallet type defined in
PALL in RFPIC. If you specify a pallet code for a consignee in the Pallet Code
field in CONS, RFPICK will validate that any pallet code entered during order
picking for that consignee will match the consignee's pallet code.
RFPIC (4)
54 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
MRFP (RF Profile Code) screen showing RFPIC (4) tab
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 55
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Relocation if Allo- No

cated Product Blocked Yes
If you select Yes, RFRL (RF Relocate) will display whenever the RF operator
enters an “invalid UI”; that is, the UI is in the correct location, but is not allo-
cated to the order. If you select No, an error message will display whenever
the RF operator enters an “invalid UI” and RFRL will not be available.
The purpose of this flag is to make it possible to move product when it is

directly in front of and therefore blocking product allocated to an order.
Display and Pick SKU Display and PIck in Lowest SKU

Display in Order Line SKU, Pick in Lowest
If you select “Display and Pick in Lowest SKU”, pick quantities will always dis-
play in the lowest SKU even if this SKU differs from the SKU quantity in
ENOR. Likewise, the pick SKU entered by the RF operator will always be the
item’s lowest SKU.
If you select “Display in Order Line SKU, Pick in Lowest”, the display SKU will
be that of the order line in ENOR while the pick SKU entered by the RF opera-
tor must be the item’s lowest SKU.
Allow Pick of Multiple No

OPID’s in an MHE Yes
If you select Yes, the RF operator in RF picking programs can pick multiple
pallets and deliver them to a staging location in a single step. This option is
available only if the MHE code is captured upon login to RF.
If you select No, the RF operator is restricted to a single pallet per pick.
56 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Display Rules for Default Last Staging Location in Previous Pick, Scan not Required
Staging Location Display Last Staging Location from Order, Scan Required
Display Last Order Staging Location and Load Staging Location, Scan
Required
Display Last Staging Location from Order, Scan not Required
In this field, you specify your display and scanning rules for the default staging
location.
Picking Methods for PnD Full Pallet Only

Location All Pick Modes
The pick mode(s) allowed for PnD locations.
Display Order of Items Item, Description

and Descriptions in Pick Description, Item
List
The display order of items/descriptions in the RFPIC pick list.
Display Pick Quantity in No

Higher UOM Yes
If you select Yes, the pick quantity will display in the highest UOM or SKU type
(usually PLT).
Validate OPID Using If you set up a special verifier SQL record in MSVS, you can perform custom
MSVS Code validation of your OPID’s.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 57
RF Profile (MRFP)
Capture Pallet Spots For custom use only.
Scan From Location in No

RFPIC Yes
If you select No, the From Location field is automatically populated by Accel-
losOne 3PL and no scan by the operator is required. If you select Yes, the
from location must be scanned by the operator for each pick.
Apply Mask to UI in Left 01 to Left 25

RFPIC Right 01 to Right 25
You can mask up to 25 characters of the UI from either the left or the right to
prevent RF operators from cheating by typing in rather than scanning the UI.
Inventory Count Investi- Investigation for Every Picked Unconfirmed Order and OPID
gation Type
If you select “Investigation for Every Picked Unconfirmed Order and OPID”, an
ICIN record will be created for all on order inventory in the warehouse whose
inventory levels match the inventory levels of a single picked pallet with a
countback variance.
If you leave this field blank, an ICIN record will be created for the current pallet
being picked only should that pallet have a variance during an RFPIC count-
back. All other pallets for unconfirmed orders containing the same inventory
will NOT be assigned an ICIN record.
When a supervisor logs into RFPIC to investigate a variance, the following

screen will appear:
58 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
If the supervisor enters Y for Resolved, no ICIN record will be created for the
current pallet being picked if there is a variance. However, ICIN records will be
created for all other pallets on open orders whose first three inventory levels
match the inventory levels of the current pallet.
When selecting the resolved option, the supervisor will be prompted to confirm
the quantity. If the supervisor quantity matches the system quantity, no ICIN
record is created. If the supervisor quantity does not match the system quan-
tity, one of the following will occur:
 if the quantity entered is less than the system quantity, the difference will be
placed on SUSP hold and the required number of ICIN records will be gen-
erated
 if the quantity entered is greater than the system quantity, the prompt “Move
excess to designated location with label” will display and the required num-
ber of ICIN records will be generated
If the supervisor enters N for Not Resolved, no ICIN records will be created
and the RF operator will be prompted to re-pick the order line.
Inventory Count Display Ignore Count When Outbound Qty = Inbound Qty = Item Setup Qty
Type
If you select this option, no inventory counts will be generated when the stan-
dard quantity breakdown (say, 50 cases per pallet) is the same as both the
inbound quantity and the outbound quantity. That is, a full pallet was received
and is now being shipped in its entirety.
Use Tie/Hi/Loose to Cal- No

culate Inventory Count Yes
Quantity
If you select No, the RF operator must enter the total quantity of product in a
location when performing a countback. If you select Yes, the RF operator will
be prompted to enter the tie, hi and loose quantities; AccellosOne 3PL will
then calculate the total quantity.
MISCELLANEOUS
This tab shows various miscellaneous options.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 59
RF Profile (MRFP)
Miscellaneous tab
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S M I S CE L L A N E O U S
Display Order Lines by Item

Item/Location in RFPI Location
If you select Item, order lines will be sorted in item code order in RFPI. If you
select Location, order lines will be sorted in location code order.
Picklist Rules in RF Relo- Picklist and validation

cate Picklist. No validation (default)
No picklist. Must validate
If you select “Picklist and validation”, the RF operator can select the from loca-
tion from a picklist and must scan in the from location to validate. If you select
“Picklist. No validation”, the RF operator can select the from location from a
picklist, but does not scan in the from location. If you select “No picklist. Must
validate”, the RF operator cannot select the from location from a picklist, but
must scan in the from location to validate.
60 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Validation Rules for Relo- Stop operator from proceeding

cate to Pick Line Allow operator to proceed
Omit validation of location
If you select “Stop operator from proceeding”, the RF operator will not be able
to put-away product in RFPU to a pick line location that is not set up for that
product in PIIT. If you select “Allow operator to proceed”, a warning message
will display when the RF operator attempts to put-away product to a pick line
location not set up for the product. However, the RF operator can bypass the
warning message by pressing F3 to process. If you select “Omit validation of
location”, the RF operator will able to put-away product to any pick line loca-
tion without restriction.
Validate Level Number in Optional

Physical
Refer to the Physical Inventory Guide.
Validate Quantity in Order Yes

Move No
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator must enter the quantity being
moved when relocating product in RFST. The quantity being moved is the
number of cases/eaches or other SKU that has been assigned to an outbound
pallet ID in RFPIC. If you set this flag to No, the quantity being moved is not
entered when relocating product in RFST.
Validate From Location in Yes

Order Move No
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator must enter the from location when
relocating product in RFST. If you set this flag to No, the from location is not
required.
Location Type of To Loca- Any Location

tion in Order Move Staging Location Only
Pick Location Only
Staging Location Excluding Door Location
The required location type of your to location when relocating product in

RFST.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 61
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Directed Move in Yes

RF Relocate No
If you set this flag to Yes, the RF operator can perform directed moves in
RFRL. AccellosOne 3PL will select the best possible to location for a reloca-
tion based on your directed move stock parameters set up in ILOP. If you set
this flag to No, the RF operator cannot perform directed moves in RFRL.
Display From Relocation Yes

Quantity in RF Relocate No
If you select Yes, AccellosOne 3PL will display the from relocation quantity in
the QTY field in RFRL and position the cursor in the LOC TO field. The RF
operator can either proceed to relocate all product in the location or can press
F9 and change the quantity.
The from relocation quantity will be displayed in “cooked” format; that is, 1 pal-
let/25 cases instead of 125 cases or 5 cases/10 eaches instead of 110
eaches. This option is designed for facilities where relocating all inventory in a
location is the rule rather than the exception.
The following conditions must be met before the from relocation quantity will
display:
 all product in a given location belongs to the same inventory entity
 the quantity contains more than one SKU type; for example, there are two
pallets, 20 cases in a location or 30 cases plus 10 eaches in a location.
If you select No, the from relocation quantity will not be displayed in RFRL.
Allow RFCY Supervisor Reserved for future use.

Count
Print Inventory Access/ Reserved for future use.

REPI Quantity Label
Document Code for This field allows you to specify a document code for replenishment labels. A
Quantity Labels custom document from Accellos is required.
MISCELLANEOUS (2)
This tab shows additional miscellaneous options.
62 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Miscellaneous (2) tab
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S M I S CE L L A N E O U S ( 2 )
Use Pick Ticket Instead Yes

of RF Pick No
If you select Yes, RF operators picking in RFPK will not have access to order
lines assigned to either the CART or EACH pick method. These order lines
must be picked manually outside of RFPK.
If you select No, RF operators picking in RFPK will enjoy full access to all
order lines regardless of pick method.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 63
RF Profile (MRFP)
Rules for Uniqueness of Per Document

Serial Number Per Item for a Document
Per Entity for a Document
blank
This field allows you to define how AccellosOne 3PL checks for duplicates in
the following RF programs: RFIPS, RFOPS and UOPR.
If you select Per Document, no duplicate serial numbers will be allowed within
the same receipt/order. If you select Per Item for a Document, no duplicate
serial numbers within will be allowed for the same item on a single receipt/
order. If you select Per Entity for a Document, no duplicate serial numbers will
be allowed within the same inventory entity on a single receipt/order. If you
leave this field blank, duplicate serial numbers will be allowed without restric-
tion.
If the MRFP rule is violated, the RF operator will not be allowed to proceed.
Allow Merging Orders/ See “Merging OPID’s in RFMG” on page 284

Items to One OPID Within
Load (RFMG)
Allow Merging Up To Level 1

Level (RFMG) Level 2
Level 3
You can merge inventory entities at inventory levels other than the lowest. For
example, suppose you select Level 1 and merge two pallets with different lot
numbers and pallet ID's. The adjusted out lot number and pallet ID will be lost
and the adjusted in lot number and pallet ID quantity will be adjusted accord-
ingly.
Refresh Screen After Yes

Each Relocation (RFRL) No
If you select Yes, a blank RFRL screen will display for the RF operator after
each relocation. If you select No, RFRL will not refresh after each relocation.
Confirm OPID for Pick CART

Method in RFCO
If you select CART, order lines assigned the pick method of CART can have
their OPID’s confirmed in RFCO. If you leave this field blank, order lines
assigned the pick method of CART can only be confirmed in CHOF (that is,
they cannot be confirmed in RFCO).
64 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
RF Relocation Executed Scan Location to Execute Relocation

by UI Scan Only
Scan Location to Execute Relocation; UI Scan Only
In this field, you select how you want to execute a relocation. If you select
“Scan Location to Execute Relocation”, the RF operator must scan the from
location to execute the relocation and pressing F3 (Process) is not required. If
you select “UI Scan Only” in this field, the RF operator must scan the UI to
execute the relocation. If you select “Scan Location to Execute Relocation; UI
Scan Only”, the RF operator must scan both the from location and the UI to
execute the relocation.
Allow Mixed Pallet Allow Relocation of Mixed Pallets in RFRL
If you select this option, you can relocate a mixed pallet (multiple items, lots,
date codes, etc.) in a single relocate action. A pallet license relocate will move
all inventory records associated with the pallet.
Show RF Confirm OPID Yes

Summary No
If you select Yes, a pop-up screen displays in RFCO showing an order sum-
mary for each OPID. The summary shows the pick method as well as the total
number of units in the OPID.
Create RF Confirm OPID Yes

Audit No
If you select Yes, a time-stamp message is inserted in the Time Block of

LOOR indicating that the OPID was confirmed in RFCO. If you select No, no
time-stamp message is inserted in the Time Block of LOOR.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 65
RF Profile (MRFP)
RFOA Audit Level Level 1

Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
RFOA allows you to perform an audit of staged product before it is loaded

onto the truck. In this field, you define your inventory level for such audits.
For example, if you select Level 1, the RF operator will perform a count for
each item on the order. If, on the other hand, you select Level 2, the RF oper-
ator will perform a count for each lot on the order.
RFOPS Sort Sequence In this field, you can define a sort sequence for your process values in
Code (SOSE) RFOPS. For example, an unsorted list of process values might appear as fol-
lows:
 carton ID
 carton ID
 carton ID
 weight
 weight
 weight
After sorting, the same list of process values could appear in a more logical
order:
 carton ID
 weight
 carton ID
 weight
 carton ID
 weight
MISCELLANEOUS (3)
66 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Other Inventory Count In this field, you select the RF program(s) in which you wish to perform count
Programs backs.
Activate Inventory Count Always

Never
If Quantity Reaches or Falls Below Threshold Quantity
If you select “Always”, a count back is required each time the RF operator puts
away/relocates/replenishes product. For put-away activities, the location
counted is always the to location. For relocation and replenishment activities,
the RF operator counts the inventory in the from location.
If you select “If Quantity Reaches or Falls Below Threshold Quantity”, a count
back is only required if the quantity in the to location (for RF receiving) or the
from location (for RF relocation and replenishment) falls below the threshold
quantity that you define in the Threshold Quantity to Initiate Count field.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 67
RF Profile (MRFP)
Inventory Count Rules Require Supervisor Override

Ignore Investigation But Lock the Entity (reserved for future use)
Ignore Investigation
These rules govern what happens when the inventory count for the location
that is entered by the RF operator does not match the on hand quantity. If you
select “Require Supervisor Override”, a supervisor will be required to log in
and approve the discrepancy. If you select “Ignore Investigation”, the RF oper-
ator can proceed normally to the next pick/relocation/put-away, etc.
Threshold Quantity to Ini- Only available if you select If Quantity Reaches or Falls Below Threshold
tiate Count Quantity in the Activate Inventory Count field
Your threshold quantity for initiating an inventory count.
Inventory Count for All RF Item

Based On
If you select “Item”, the RF operator will count each item in a given location. If
you leave this field blank, the RF operator will count each inventory entity in a
given location.
Rules to Allow Short / Disallow Short / Delete Line

Delete Line in RFIPS Allow Short / Delete Line
In this field, you activate/deactivate the shorting/deleting of receipt lines in

RFIPS.
Suggested Location Follow Order

Rules in RFST Follow Assigned Staging Location
In this field, you define the suggested or default to location in RFST. If you
select “Follow Order”, the suggested location will be the to location where the
last OPID was staged. In other words, the suggested to location is always the
to location chosen in the previous order line.
If you select Follow “Assigned Staging Location”, the suggested location will
be the staging location assigned to the order line in either SELO or the Wave
Manager. It will not change for a given order even if the RF operator overrides
the suggested to location.
68 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Display To-Location in Yes option only available if Suggested Location Rules in RFST is activated
RFST
Yes
No
If you select Yes, the suggested to location is displayed. If you select No, the
suggested to location is not displayed.
Default Staging Ware- Custom use only.

house/Location Code in
CASE
Enter Adjustment Infor- Yes

mation No
If you set this flag to Yes and enter an adjustment in RFAJ, you will be
prompted to enter an adjustment code (ADJU), a reason code (REAS) and
remarks for each adjustment. If you set this flag to No, you will not be
prompted for an adjustment code, reason code and remarks.
Allow Relocation of Multi- Yes

ple Pallets in RFRL No
If you select Yes, the RF operator can relocate multiple pallets in the same
only enters the location once.

MISCELLANEOUS (4)
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 69
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Replenishment of Yes

Multiple Pallets in RFRP No
If you select Yes, the RF operator can replenish multiple pallets in the same
only enters the location once.

70 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Mixed Put-Away, Up to level 1

Move up to Inventory Up to level 2
Level Up to level 3
If you select “Up to level 1/2/3”, the RF operator can put-away and move mul-
tiple pallets in the same location in a single step. The multiple pallets can con-
tain mixed inventory up to the inventory level selected. For example, pallets
from different receipts, appointments and inbound loads containing different
level 2’s and 3’s can be placed on the same forklift and put-away together if
you select “Up to level 1”.
This field applies to the following programs: RFCH, RFPU, RFST, RFRL,
RFRP and OLOP.
If you leave this field blank, the RF operator cannot put-away/move mixed
product in a single step.
Reason Code Required Yes

to Override System- No
Assigned Location Yes with Location Overridden (reserved for future use)
If you select Yes, the RF operator will be required to enter a reason code in
RFCH/RFPU if he or she overrides the system-assigned location code or
requests an alternate location. The reason code will be stored on the receipt
line and a time stamp will be created.
RFCH screen showing pick list for reason code
Max. Number of F3 (NX) In this field, you specify the maximum number of times that the RF operator
Allowed Per ILOP can press F3 (NX) in RFRL to display a suggested relocate location.
Sequence in RFRL
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 71
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Multiple Pallet Yes

Moves in RFST No
If you select Yes, the RF operator can relocate multiple pallets in the same
location in a single step; that is, the RF operator scans two or more UI’s in
RFST but only enters the location once.

Show Quantity Break- Yes

down Screen No
If you select Yes, the item quantity breakdown will display as a pop-up mes-
sage in the following programs: RFPIC, RFPK, RFRL, RFPR, RFRP, RFCH
and RFPU.
Allow Skipping of Yes

Inbound Serial Number No
Validation in RFOPS
If you set this flag to Yes, you can skip the validation of inbound serial num-
bers when shipping serial number product in RFOPS. AccellosOne 3PL will
create a new system-generated outbound serial number for the product being
shipped. This feature is designed to save time and improve efficiency by elim-
inating the need to perform a validation scan for each case.
For example, you are entering a transfer order to transfer serial number prod-
uct from one account to another.
RFOPS screen showing F1 (SE) command
The RF operator selects ME (Manual Entry). After entering the weight, the RF
operator can press F1 (SE) to create a new system-generated serial number.
72 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Weight Reduction Yes

for Standard Weight Item No
in RFOPS
If you set this flag to Yes, you can reduce standard weight product by entering
a quantity; for example, 5CS. The quantity entered by the RF operator must
be less than or equal to the order quantity. When the RF operator presses F2
(RC), the following prompt will appear:
RFOPS screen showing option 2
Enter Gross Weight in Yes

RFSC No
If set to Yes, the RF operator will be required to enter the gross weight when
closing a carton in RFSC. The weight measure code for the carton will be
defined in DITP (Depositor Item Profile).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 73
RF Profile (MRFP)
Allow Put-Back of Out- In this field, you define put-back rules when the RF operator performs a partial
standing REPI Quantity replenishment (for example, less than a full pallet) because blocked or dam-
aged product is preventing a full replenishment.
EXAMPLE
Item quantity breakdown: 50 cases per pallet
replenishment quantity from bulk: 45 cases (less than a full replenishment)
order quantity: 10 cases
No
A second replenishment of five cases is created (50 - 45 = 5) for the original
pick line location.
Yes
RF operator is prompted to perform a second replenishment of 5 cases to
either the original pick line location or to another pick line location.
Cancel REPI Task

If the on-hand quantity in the pick line location is greater than the on order
quantity, the second replenishment is deleted. If the on-hand quantity in the
pick line location is NOT greater than the on order quantity, a second replen-
ishment is created for the original pick line location (same as No option).
Enable UI Scanning in Custom use only.

Cycle Counts
Suspend Flow Advance- Yes

ment in Outbound Audit No
If you select Yes, the order line will NOT be advanced to the next flow even
though your count matches the order line quantity when you perform an out-
bound audit in RFOA. If you select No, the order line will be advanced to the
next flow when your count matches the order line quantity in RFOA.
MISCELLANEOUS (5)
74 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
RF Profile (MRFP)
Retain OPID to in RFMG Yes

No
If you select Yes, the OPID to value remains displayed on the screen after the
merge so that the RF operator can continue to merge into the same OPID.
Validate Manual Entry Yes

Process in RFOPS No
If you select Yes, the following validations will occur when manually entering
catch weights and serial numbers in RFOPS:
 the entry length and data type must match your setup in IPRO
 the outbound weight/serial number must match the inbound weight/serial

number
 if the outbound weight does not match the inbound weight, it must be within
the weight tolerance percent defined in ITEM
If you select No, only the entry length and data type must match your setup in
IPRO.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 75
RF Profile (MRFP)
Disallow REPI When Yes

Location Reaches Maxi- No
mum Capacity
If you select Yes, replenishments will be canceled when the replenishment
quantity plus the on-hand quantity in the pick line location exceeds the loca-
tion's capacity. If you select No, replenishments will NOT be canceled when
the replenishment quantity plus the on-hand quantity in the pick line location
exceeds the location's capacity.
NOTE The Yes option in MRFP will be ignored if you have shelf live over-
rides in CCOP (Customer/Consignee Override of PIPR) for an order triggering
a replenishment.
Validate Serial Number Yes

(SN) From Picking Pro- No
cess
If you select No, serial number validation will be deactivated in RFSC. If you
select Yes, serial number validation will be activated in RFSC and a valid
serial number must be scanned for all product being packed in RFSC.
The purpose of the additional scan in RFSC to make sure that the serial num-
ber scanned during RFPIC is the same serial number going in the box during
packing.
Display Minimum Number Yes

of REPI Records in No
Demand Mode
If you select Yes and there are multiple replenishment records for the same
item, AccellosOne 3PL will show only the replenishments that are needed to
satisfy the order quantity. Other replenishments that are required to satisfy the
minimum quantity for the location will not appear in active demand mode.
For example, suppose there are 255 cases in a pick location with 305 on
order. Although there are three replenishments for a total of 144 cases, only
60 cases are needed to meet the order quantity and therefore only one replen-
ishment (the one for 60 cases) will show in demand mode.
76 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Item RF Profile (MIRP)
Override Quantity Break- Override Quantity Breakdown Type

down - Actual (if > Std) or
Std If you select Override Quantity Breakdown Types, the following rules will apply
to RFCH and RFMI:
 if the pallet quantity associated with the UI is less than the standard item
quantity breakdown, use the standard quantity breakdown
 if the pallet quantity associated with the UI is greater than or equal to the
item quantity breakdown, use the actual quantity breakdown
 for a pallet/case/each breakdown, the standard case/each configuration will
not change
NOTE
The quantity breakdown entered in RFCH will overwrite the quantity break-
down entered/set up in ENRE and EDI.
In this program, you set up your suspended hold and inventory count rules at the item level. If you define a
profile in MIRP and attach it to an item in ITEM, the suspended hold/inventory count rules in MIRP will
override your suspended hold/inventory count defaults for a given customer defined in MRFP.
MIRP screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 77
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F P I C TA B )
Code Your item RF profile code.
Description The description for your item RF profile code.
Allow Suspended Holds The following options are identical to the options in the Allow Suspended
Holds field in MRFP:
Split Order Line, No Suspended Holds
Allow Suspended Holds
Only Allow if Supervisor Approved
Split Order Line, Allow Suspended Hold
Split Order Line, Supervisor Approved
The following options are only available in MIRP:

Split Order Line, Zero Out Remaining Quantity, No Suspended Hold
Split Order Line, Zero Out Remaining Quantity, Allow Suspended Hold
Split Order Line, Zero Out Remaining Quantity, Supervisor Approved
The various zero out remaining quantity options allow the picker to pick any
quantity up to the order line quantity. For example, if the order line quantity is 5
cases, the picker can pick 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 cases. AccellosOne 3PL will auto-
matically zero out the remaining lines so that the order will ship without the
need to reallocate the missing product or manually delete the lines in ENOR.
Show Full Item Descrip- Yes

tion in RFCH No
If you select Yes, a pop-up box will display showing both the main item
description and the alternate description in RFCH. if you select No, no pop-up
box will display in the program.
Show Full Item Descrip- Yes

tion in RFPIC No
If you select Yes, a pop-up box will display showing both the main item
description and the alternate description in RFPIC. if you select No, no pop-up
box will display in the program.
Activate Event-Driven See the Cycle Counting Guide for further information on event-driven cycle
Cycle Count in RFPIC counts.
Activate Inventory Count If you select an option in this field, it overrides the option that you selected in
MRFP.
78 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Depositor Workflow Profile (DIFP)
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( R F P I C TA B )
Inventory Count Rules If you select an option in this field, it overrides the option that you selected in
MRFP.
Threshold Quantity to Ini- If you select an option in this field, it overrides the option that you selected in
tiate Count Back MRFP.
MISCELLANEOUS TAB
If you select any options in these fields, they override the option(s) that you selected in MRFP.
Depositor Workflow Profile (DIFP)
Certain flows are mandatory for inbound and outbound processing in DIFP. Refer to the appropriate program
(RFCH, RFPI, RFPIC, etc.) to see which flows are required for a given program.
RF Operator (RFOP)
In this program, you set up your RF operators and define their default company and Vocollect Voice
password. In the Detail Block, you define which task profiles they are allowed to work in as well as their
material handling type and activity type exclusions.
RF operators in RFOP are required in the following cases:
 you perform voice-activated picking using Vocollect Voice
 you pick by assignment in RFVP (RF Voice Pick)
 you assign tasks to operators in RFOT (RF Operator Task Assign)
 you wish to track the equipment used by each RF operator and restrict certain RF operators to certain
activity types and equipment types
 you perform task interleaving in RFITLV (RF Interleaving)
RF operators must be set up in OPER (Operator Code) before they can be set up in RFOP.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Operator Mandatory
(defined in OPER)
Your operator code.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 79
RF Operator (RFOP)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Default Company Mandatory
The company in which the RF operator will work. If you use Vocollect Voice
and the operator has to switch companies, you must manually change the
operator’s company in RFOP. If you pick your orders in RFPIC, you do not
need to manually change the operator’s company in RFOP as the operator
can perform this task in RFPIC.
Password Only required if you do voice-activated picking
The operator’s Vocollect Voice password.
MHET Types Exclusions See “RF Operator (RFOP)” on page 408 for further information.
Activity Type Exclusions See “RF Operator (RFOP)” on page 408 for further information.
Task Profile Enter the RF operator’s task profile.
1 Enter RFOP.
2 Click on Create.
3 Key in your operator code and press Enter or press F10 to select it from the pick list.
4 Key in the operator’s default company and press Enter or press F10 to select if from the pick list.
5 If required, key in the operator’s voice password and press Enter.
6 In the Task Profile Block, key in your task profile and press Enter or select it from the pick list.
7 Repeat the above step for each additional task profile that you wish to assign to the operator.
80 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Extra Charge Setup for RF
RFOP screen showing operator PAUL assigned to task profile 1
8 Click on Exit to exit.

9 When prompted to save your changes, click on Yes.
ACTIVATING AN RF OPERATOR IN ACTIVEDESKTOP

If the RF operator is a new AccellosOne 3PL operator who has never logged on to ActiveDesktop, he or she
must log on to ActiveDesktop to change his or her password. You cannot log on to a RF device with the
default password defined in INST (Installation Parameters).
1 Log on to ActiveDesktop and proceed to change your password. Once your new password is accepted,
you can log on to a RF device using this password.
You can add extra charges to a receipt or order in RF using the program RFEC (RF Extra Charge). You can
also enter extra charges directly in RFPIC (for outbound orders) and in RFCH (for inbound receipts). You
activate extra charge entry in RF by making the appropriate changes to your extra charge profile in ECHP
(Extra Charge Profile).
Extra charge entry in RF is only available for customer-based extra charges; that is your ECHP profile is
attached to a customer. AccellosOne 3PL does not support RF extra charges attached to an item.
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( E CH P )
Charge Code (CHAR) The charge code that you enter must be unique in ECHP within a given
inbound or outbound workflow. You cannot use the same charge code under a
different sequence for a given inbound or outbound workflow.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 81
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( E CH P )
Allow RF Entry / Allow There are three possible scenarios for these two fields:
Override of Charge
Quantity in RF Allow RF Entry = No
Allow Override of Charge Quantity in RF = No
In this scenario, the RF operator cannot add extra charges in RF.
Allow RF Entry = No
Allow Override of Charge Quantity in RF = Yes
In this scenario, the RF operator can select one or more extra charges from a
predefined list and can enter any charge quantity for the selected charge(s).
Allow RF Entry = Yes

Allow Override of Charge Quantity in RF = Yes
In this scenario, the RF operator must manually enter his or her extra charges
(if any) and can enter any charge quantity for the entered charges.
Flow Process Code Optional

(FLPR) for RF
If you enter a flow, the extra charge can only be added at this inbound or out-
bound flow. If you leave this field blank, the extra charge can be added at any
inbound or outbound flow.
Other fields Refer to the Billing and Invoicing Guide for further information.
82 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
ECHP screen showing fields for extra charge entry in RF
For inbound extra charges, you must set the Extra Charge Entry Type flag on the RFCH Only 2 tab in MRFP
to the appropriate value.
Extra Charge Entry Type Allow Extra Charge Entry When Completed
Allow Extra Charge Entry When Exiting
If you select “Allow Extra Charge Entry When Completed”, the extra charge
screen will display when you finish checking/unloading the receipt line. If you
select “Allow Extra Charge Entry When Exiting”, the extra charge screen will
display when you exit RFCH.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 83
Warehouse Zones (WHZO)
For outbound extra charges, you must set the Extra Charge Entry Type flag on the RFPIC tab in MRFP to the
appropriate value.
Extra Charge Entry Type Allow Extra Charge Entry When Completed
Allow Extra Charge Entry When Exiting
If you select “Allow Extra Charge Entry When Completed”, the extra charge
screen will display when you finish picking the order line. If you select “Allow
Extra Charge Entry When Exiting”, the extra charge screen will display when
you exit RFPIC.
In this program, you subdivide your warehouse into separate zones. Each zone can be considered a separate
work area and the same order or receipt can be assigned to multiple RF operators working in different zones.
A zone can be a section of your warehouse or a set of racks (for example, all floor-level racks could be zone
1, all second-level racks could be zone 2, etc.).
There are seven zone types in WHZO:
Directed Put-Away Directed put-away zones allow you to define overflow sequences for directed
put-away in the Overflow Sequence Block. For example, if no locations are
available in put-away zone 1, try put-away zone 2 then put-away zone 3.
General General zones have no collection or drop off points assigned to them.
Sorting Area Sorting Area zones types have a drop off point assigned to them; that is, they
require a location code in the header block of WHZO.
Material Handling Type This zone type is used for material handling type integration.
P&D P & D zones types have a collection point assigned to them; that is, they
require a location code in the header block of WHZO.
Interleaving Interleaving zone types are used in RFITLV.
Voice Voice zone types are used for voice-activated picking.
84 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
A100 A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A106

(P & D location)
A107 A108 A109 A110 A111 A112
P & D zone consisting of 12 locations in aisle A with a P & D location (A100)
HEADER BLOCK
In this block, you define your warehouse zone code and description, your zone type code and your
warehouse/location code for sorting or P & D zones types.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Warehouse Zone Code Mandatory
Your code for this zone.
A meaningful description for this zone.
Zone Sort Value Mandatory
Set this field to 1 for all zones.
Labor Standard Modifier See the section on Operational Board in the Operations 2 Guide.
Communication Refer- Reserved for future use

ence
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 85
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Zone Type Code D = Directed Put-Away

G = General
M = Material Handling Type
S = Sorting Area
P=P&D
I = Interleaving
V = Voice
The zone type field allows you to define collection and drop off points for a
zone and to assign to it a specific material handling equipment type.
If you select General, the zone will have no collection or drop off points. If you
select Sorting Area, the zone will have a collection point for outbound product.
If you select P & D, the zone will have a drop off or pick-up point for product.
Task Required Only available if Enable Task Interleaving in COMP = Create Tasks According
to Zone Setting
See “Warehouse Zones (WHZO)” on page 414.
Warehouse Code Mandatory if zone type = S or P

(defined in WARE)
The warehouse code of the location that you wish to attach to the zone.
Location Code Mandatory if zone type = S or P

(defined in LOCA)
The sorting or P & D location that you wish to attach to the zone.
Material Handling Type For Accellos use only.

Inbound Code

Outbound Empty Code

Outbound Partial Code
FORMULA BLOCK
The Formula Block appears in Create Record mode only. It allows you to specify warehouse and location
restrictions (for example, a range of locations) for the zone. When you exit the Formula Block, the system will
automatically add the locations that you specify to the zone.
86 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
If your location codes contain spaces or hyphens (-), you must use the caret character (^) before the space or
hyphen.
EXAMPLE 1
If your range is … You enter …
R 0K 001 1 to R 0K 044 5 R^ 0K^ 001^ 1-R^ 0K^ 044^ 5
EXAMPLE 2
If your range is … You enter …
P-OA-001-1 to P-OA-099-2 P^-OA^-001^-1-P^-OA^-099^-2
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Inbound/Outbound Only available for zone types of G
I = Inbound
O = Outbound
B = Both
If you specify Inbound, the locations added by the system will all be flagged as
inbound locations. If you specify Outbound, the locations added by the system
will all be flagged as outbound locations. If you specify Both, the locations
added by the system will all be flagged as both inbound and outbound loca-
tions.
If you are setting up a P, S or M zone type, the value that you enter in this field
is ignored because the zone type is either self-defined or defined in other pro-
grams.
Warehouse Code Mandatory

(defined in WARE)
Only locations belonging to the warehouse(s) that you specify can be added to
the zone. See the following paragraph for a list of the operands that you use to
specify one or more warehouses.
Location Code Mandatory

(defined in LOCA)
Your location restrictions for the zone. See the following paragraph for a list of
the operands that you use to specify one or more locations.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 87
The following operands can be entered in the Warehouse Code and Location Code fields:
= match of characters entered
(=) not equal to
> greater than or equal to
< less than or equal to
- from X to Y (a range)
EXAMPLES
=1 Any location code beginning with 1

(for example, 1, 111, 199, 1ABC)
=1,=2 Any location code beginning with 1 or 2

(for example, 1, 111, 299, 2ABC)
(=1) All warehouses except warehouse 1
(=1),(=2) All warehouses except warehouses 1 and 2
>F101 All locations greater than or equal to location F101

(for example, F102, F199, F4, G99, etc.)
<D101 All locations less than or equal to location D101

(for example, A101, B999, D100, etc.)
A101-C999 Locations A101 through C999
88 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Warehouse Zone Codes showing Formula Block
PROCEDURE
1 Enter WHZO.
2 Click on Create Record.
3 Key in your zone code and press Enter.
4 Key in your description for the zone code and press Enter.
5 Key in 1 as your zone sort value and press Enter.
6 Press Enter to bypass the Labor Standard Modifier field.
7 Press Enter to bypass the Communication Reference field.
8 In the Zone Type Code field, key in the appropriate value (G for General, I for Interleaving, S for Sorting
Area, P for P & D or I for Interleaving) and press Enter.
If you enter G or I: If you enter P or S:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Key in your warehouse code

and press Enter.
b) Key in your location code and
press Enter.
c) Press Enter the required num-
ber of times to bypass the
material handling type fields.
9 Press Enter to bypass the Task Interleaving field.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 89
Warehouse Zone Codes showing Formula Block
10 When the Formula Block appears, do one of the following:
For G or I type zones: For P or S type zones:
a) Key in I for Inbound, O for Out- a) Key in B for Both in the Inbound/
bound or B for Both in the Outbound field and press Enter.
Inbound/Outbound field and
press Enter.
11 In the Warehouse Code field, key in your warehouse code restriction (for example, “=”) and press Enter.
12 In the Location Code field, key in your location restrictions (for example, “>”) and press Enter. Accel-
losOne 3PL will retrieve all locations that meet the criteria that you specify and display the Locations
Block. If there are no location restrictions, leave this field blank.
Warehouse Zone Codes showing External Messages
13 If you wish to print, fax or e-mail your External Messages, click on Select Printer. Then key in the appro-
priate printer code or use the pick list function to select it. Next click on Execute Report. If you selected
either fax or mail as your printer, the Fax/Mail Entry pop-up window will appear. Enter your fax number or
e-mail address and any other required information and then click on Send e-mail or Send fax.
90 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
14 Click on Exit to close the External Messages window. The locations that you specified in the Formula
Block will be added to your zone.
15 Click on Location Block.
Warehouse Zone Codes showing 28 locations assigned to Zone 2
16 If required, you can manually add or remove a location in the Location Block. To add a location, click on
Create Record and key in your warehouse code, your location code, your inbound/outbound value and
your zone type.
If you wish to remove a location from the Location Block, move your arrow key to the appropriate location
and press Enter until your cursor is positioned in the Inbound/Outbound column. Then click on Delete.
If you wish to change the Inbound/Outbound flag, key over the default value of B for Both with either I for
Inbound or O for Outbound.
When you finish making your changes, click on Return to Main.
17 When you finish setting up your zone, click on Master Block and then Exit to exit.
OVERFLOW SEQUENCE BLOCK

If product cannot be put-away in a given warehouse zone, you can define an overflow sequence for
warehouse zones in the Overflow Sequence Block. The overflow zones must have the same zone type code
as the header zone.
Warehouse zones used in directed put-away require a zone type code of D (for Directed Put-Away).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 91
RF Supervisors
WHZO screen showing overflow zone codes
RF Supervisors
RF supervisors have certain privileges that are denied to non-supervisory RF operators; for example, they
can zero out receipts lines in RFCH when a variance is encountered. See the System Administration Guide
for further information on setting up an RF supervisor.
92 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
OUTBOUND SETUP PROGRAMS
Overview ............................................................................................................ 94
Customer Codes (CUST) .................................................................................. 94
Customer / Consignee Document Setup (CCDU)........................................... 96
Item Hazardous Material Violation (IHZV) ....................................................... 97
Outbound Pallet Building ................................................................................. 98
Task Profile (REGI).......................................................................................... 101
Item Consignee Configuration (ICOC)........................................................... 106
Outbound Process Configuration (CCCC).................................................... 107
Warehouse Customer Consignee OPID Rule (WCCO) ................................ 110
Customer/Consignee Outbound Rules (CCOR) ........................................... 111
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 93
Overview
Overview
The following graphic shows the various setup programs for outbound processing.
RFOP
REGI CCCC WCCO
MHET REGI WATP Task profiles are attached to outbound process

configurations. If required, OPID mix/no mix rule in
WCCO overrides CCCC.
RF operators set up in RFOP are attached to material

handling equipment types, task profiles and warehouse
activity types.
PKST CCCC ITEM
CCDU
CTSZ ICNP
Document codes and pick methods are attached to

In cartonization setup, packing stations are defined in
various combinations of customer/consignee/carrier in PKST, carton size codes are attached to outbound
CCDU. process configurations and item cartonization profile
codes are attached to items.
Customer Codes (CUST)
Make sure that the Consolidation Method for Allocated Lines field in CUST is set to Multiple Location Lines
NOT Allowed.
94 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Customer Codes (CUST)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Consolidation Method for Multiple Location Lines Allowed (default value)

Allocated Lines Multiple Location Lines NOT Allowed
If you set this field to Multiple Location Lines Allowed, AccellosOne 3PL will
not create additional order lines when an order line picks from more than one
location. If you set this field to Multiple Location Lines NOT Allowed, Accel-
losOne 3PL will create additional order lines to ensure that no order line has
more than one location line.
For example, if an order line of 30 cases requires picks from three different
locations, AccellosOne 3PL will create two additional order lines for a total of
three: line 1 (10 cases), line 2 (15 cases) and line 3 (5 cases).
The Multiple Location Lines NOT Allowed option requires P-type order lines in
ENOR.
The advantage of this feature is faster picking of large order lines by splitting
the work into multiple tasks that can be performed by multiple operators. If you
activate this feature, three operators could work on the same order line if that
line picked from three different locations. If you deactivate this feature, the
entire order line could only be picked by a single operator.
CUST (Customer Code) screen showing Consolidation Method for Allocated Lines set to Multiple
Location Lines NOT Allowed
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 95
Customer / Consignee Document Setup (CCDU)
Customer / Consignee Document Setup (CCDU)
In this program, you set up your label document(s) and pick methods for RFPIC, RFPK and RFSC.
Documents set up in CCDU are not flow dependent and do not need to be attached to the appropriate
outbound flow in DIFP.
You can set up a single label document for all customers/carriers/consignees or you can define a specific
label document for certain customer/carrier/consignee combinations. For example, in RFPIC label 1 will print
for customer A, label 2 will print for customer B and label 3 will print for all other customers.
You can also define different documents for different pick methods: for example, print label 1 when each
picking and print label 2 when pallet picking.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Customer Code The customer that the label document applies to or .ALL for all customers.
Consignee Code The consignee that the label document applies to or .ALL for all consignees.
Carrier Code The carrier that the label document applies to or .ALL for all carriers.
Pick Method Batch Label Pick

Each Pick
Label Pick
Non-RF Packing Station
Packed via Packing Station
Pallet Pick
RF Merge
System-Driven Cartonization Each Pick
The pick method that the label document applies to. If you leave this field
blank (that is, no pick method), the pick method is CASE.
Document Code Your document code for the unique customer/consignee combination. This
document code must be set up in DOCU.
Interface Flag If you are printing an actual document on a physical printer, leave this flag
blank. If you are sending your CCDU information to another device for further
processing, click on this flag to select it.
96 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
Item Hazardous Material Violation (IHZV)
CCDU screen showing bill of lading document for customer A2, all carriers, all consignees and all
picking methods
Item Hazardous Material Violation (IHZV)
In this program, you define your segregation rules for outbound pallets and containers; for example,
hazardous class 1.1 (Explosives) cannot be mixed with hazardous class 1.2 (Explosives). The segregation
rules apply to RFPIC (RF Pick) and RFMG (RF Merge OPID). To activate hazmat segregations rules in these
programs, you must set the Separate Hazmat by Item in Each Pick flag in MRFP (RFPIC 3 tab) to Yes.
If the rules in IHZV are violated, the RF operator will be not be able to pick the line in RFPIC or merge the
OPID in RFMG.
IHZV screen showing classes 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 as restricted classes for class 1.1
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 97
Outbound Pallet Building
The Pallet Build engine allows you to generate picking assignments (outbound pallets) based on predefined
pallet building rules. The built pallets are stored in the database, allowing you to view and evaluate pending
work in either Pulse or d'Amigo. Pallet building is only available for orders assigned to a wave in Wave
Manager and picked in RFITLV (RF Interleaving).
The Pallet Build engine will automatically generate pallet build assignments based on the following rules:
 all cartons must be on the same order
 the maximum cube for full pallet/half pallet (REGI) cannot be exceeded
 the maximum weight (REGI) cannot be exceeded
 “like” product (that is, the same alternate reporting type/code) will be kept together (ITEM)
 the pallet build restrictions defined in IPBR must be respected
There are four setup programs for the Pallet Build engine:
 IPBR (Item Pallet Build Restrictions)
 ITEM (Item Codes)
 REGI (Task Profile)
 CONS (Consignees)
In IPBR you set up your pallet build restrictions, defining which items can be placed together on the same
pallet. For example, if you add the code R1 in the Header Block and the code R2 in the Detail Block, items
assigned your R1 pallet restriction code can never be placed on the same pallet as items assigned your R2
pallet restriction code.
If you select the Allow Only on Top checkbox, items assigned the pallet build restriction code in the Detail
Block can be placed on top of but not underneath items assigned the pallet build restriction code in the
Header Block. Your IPBR code is then attached to the appropriate items in ITEM.
IPBR screen
98 4.0.1* RF GUIDE
ITEM screen showing IPBR code of R1
In ITEM, you define the following:

Stackability Indicator Code In this field, you define how heavy or light the item is compared to other items.
You can choose any value from Category 1 (base item or very heavy) to Category 5 (the lightest possible
item). The Pallet Build engine will not allow you to place heavier items on top of lighter items.
Stackability Quantity in Highest SKU In this field, you define the maximum number of units that can be
stacked on top of each other. For example, if the item’s highest SKU is cases and you enter 10 in this field,
the maximum number of cases that can be stacked on top of each other is 10. This field is for reporting
purposes only.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 99
ITEM screen
In REGI you define the following: Alternate Reporting Type/Alternate Reporting Code, Maximum Pallet Height
and Maximum Number of Cartons.
REGI screen
In CONS, you set the Single Item Per Outbound Pallet flag to the appropriate value. If you set this flag to
Yes, the Pallet Build engine will check this flag and restrict outbound pallets to a single item.
100 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Task Profile (REGI)
CONS screen showing flag set to No
Task Profile (REGI)
In this program, you set up your task profile. A task profile defines various picking options for RF operators.
For each task profile that you set up, you can define the following options:
 the default staging location and warehouse
 the picking path mode or sequence in which locations are picked
 the sort sequence code (if any) and picking path mode
 the alternate reporting type/code for a pallet assignment
 the maximum pallet weight and/or cube for a pallet assignment when that pallet assignment contains
mixed product
REGI is a mandatory setup program for the following programs/functions:
 voice-activated picking
 outbound pallet building
 picking by assignment in RFPV
 task interleaving in RFITLV
If you pick by order line in RFPIC and do not use assignments, task profiles are not required.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 101

Task Profile (REGI)
Task profilers are attached to operators in RFOP. They can also be attached to Outbound Process Configu-
ration (CCCC). If required, you can set up different task profilers for different combinations of customer,
consignee and carrier in CCCC.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Task Profile Mandatory
Your task profile.
A description for your task profile.
Voice Profile Code See “Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking” on page 338.

(VOPR)
Default Customer Voice See “Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking” on page 338.

Profile Code (VOPC)
Staging Location Optional
The default staging location for the task profile. If you do not specify a default
staging location, the RF operator will be required to specify a staging location
during picking.
Warehouse Optional
The warehouse to which the default staging location belongs.

(SOSE)
The sort sequence or “snaking” of your locations within the task profile. This
sort sequence is applied to a picking path mode. If you do not enter a sort
sequence code, the sequence of your pick locations will be based on the
option that you select in the Picking Path Mode field.
Length of UI Check Digit See “Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking” on page 338.
102 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Task Profile (REGI)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Picking Path Mode Cartons for one item all on one pallet
With this option, work assignments will be sequenced in item code order. That
is, the first item on the order will be picked first followed by any other order
lines containing that item. Only after the first item is fully picked will Accel-
losOne 3PL start picking the second item.
This option ignores any weight and cube limits that you define for a pallet.
Once the RF operator starts picking an item, all product goes on the current
pallet regardless.
If the first item is fully picked and there is room on the pallet, the second item
will be picked and placed on the same pallet.
NOTE This picking path mode will lead to more pallets containing a single
item only, but at the cost of more travel time because of skipped locations.
Keep items together as much as possible

Same as “Cartons for one item all on one pallet”, but pallet weight and cube
limits are enforced. That means that one item can be split into two or more
pallets if required.
Pick in location sequence, do not split order lines

With this option, work assignments will be sequenced in location code
sequence, but the splitting of order lines will not be allowed. For example, sup-
pose you define 250 lbs. as your maximum pallet weight and you have four
order lines in the following location code sequence: line 1 (100 lbs.), line 2
(100 lbs.), line 3 (100 lbs) and line 4 (50 lbs.).
AccellosOne 3PL will sequence your work assignments as follows: line 1, line
2, line 4 and line 3. That is, line 4 will be picked before line 3 because adding
line 3 to lines 1 and 2 would lead to a split order line, while adding line 4 to
lines 1 and 2 would not.
Pick in wine sequence

Custom use only.
Pick in location sequence

With this option, work assignments will be sequenced in location code
sequence and order line splitting will be allowed.
Alternate Reporting Type Optional

/ Code
In these two fields, you define “like” items for the Pallet Build engine. If you
populate these fields with an alternate reporting type/code, only product with
the same alternate reporting type/code can be placed on the same pallet.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 103

Task Profile (REGI)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
OPID Prefix Optional
The prefix for your OPID’s (outbound pallet ID’s).
Spoken Length See “Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking” on page 338.
Spoken Value Numeric See “Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking” on page 338.
Maximum Pallet Weight Optional
The maximum weight for a full pallet. If the weight of the order line exceeds
this maximum, AccellosOne 3PL will split the line into two or more work
assignments.
Maximum Half Pallet Optional

Cube
The maximum cube for a half pallet.
Weight Measure Code The weight measure code for the Maximum Pallet Weight field.
Maximum Pallet Cube Optional
The maximum cube for a full pallet. If the cube of the order line exceeds this
maximum, AccellosOne 3PL will split the line into two or more assignments.
Max. Number of Cartons The maximum size of a pallet assignment for the Pallet Build engine.
Linear Measure Code The linear measure code for the Maximum Pallet Cube field.
Maximum Pallet Height The maximum height for a full pallet. If the height of the order line exceeds this
maximum, AccellosOne 3PL will split the line into two or more assignments.
Max. Number of Opera- In this field, you define “congestion” in a warehouse aisle for interleaving pur-
tors poses; that is, if the number of operators in a task profile exceeds this number,
the extra operators will not be assigned any tasks until one or more existing
operators completes his or her task(s).
1 Enter REGI.
104 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Task Profile (REGI)
REGI screen
2 Key in your task profile and press Enter.

3 Key in a description for your new task profile and press Enter.
4 Key in your voice profile code and press Enter.
5 If required, key in your staging location and press Enter.
6 If required, key in your staging warehouse and press Enter.
7 If required, select the appropriate sort sequence code from the pick list.
8 Enter or select any other required parameters for your task profile.
9 When you finish setting up the general parameters for your task profile, click on Save .
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 105

Item Consignee Configuration (ICOC)
REG screen showing task profile 1
10 Click on Exit to exit REGI.
Item Consignee Configuration (ICOC)
In this program, you can define the outbound pallet quantity by consignee when building outbound pallets
(pallet build, case picking, OPID merge) for an outbound order. ICOC must be activated in CCOR by setting
the Use Consignee Item Configuration flag to Yes for the appropriate consignee record.
ICOC screen
106 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Outbound Process Configuration (CCCC)
In this program, you set up your pallet wrapping rules for different customer/carrier/consignee combinations.
You can also override certain MRFP settings for a specific customer/carrier/consignee combination. For
example, suppose your default picking mode is set to case picking in MRFP; however, based on your CCCC
setting for a specific customer/carrier/ consignee combination, you can establish normal mode picking instead
of case pick for that combination.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Customer Code The customer that the outbound process configuration applies to or .ALL for
all customers.
Carrier Code The carrier that the outbound process configuration applies to or .ALL for all
carriers.
Consignee Code The consignee that the outbound process configuration applies to or .ALL for
all consignees.
Number of Times Pallet Only required for pallet wrapping

Wrapping is Required
If pallet wrapping is required for a pallet being built in the warehouse, enter the
number of times in this field.
Number of Times Pallet Only required for pallet wrapping

Wrapping is Required for
Pallet Pick
If pallet rewrapping is required for a full pallet pick (that is, the pallet was
already wrapped when it was received into the warehouse), enter the number
of times in this field.
Number of Hours from Only available if task interleaving is activated

Ship Date to Release Full
Pallet Pick Task
In this field, you specify the number of hours before the ship date that a full
pallet pick task is created.
Task Profile Code (REGI) The outbound process configuration’s task profile.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 107

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Default Mode in RFPIC Only required if you pick in RFPIC
If you select a mode in this field, it will override your default picking mode in
MRFP.
OPID Assignment Rules Only required if you pick in RFPIC
No Restriction
Per Item
Per OPID, OPID entered by user, QRS label by line
Per Order
Per Order Line
Per Order Line in NM Mode
In this field, you define your OPID assignment rules for case pick mode in
RFPIC.
If you select Per Item, a single OPID per item is required. That is to say, the
same item cannot be assigned to two or more OPID’s. If you select Per Order,
a single OPID per order is required. If you select Per Order Line, a single
OPID per order line in case pick mode is required. If you select Per Order Line
in NM Mode, a single OPID per order line in normal mode is required.
If you select Per OPID, OPID entered by user, QRS label by line, AccellosOne
3PL will generate a QRS value for each OPID entered by the user. This option
is only available for QRS orders in which the user enters an OPID for each
order line.
If you select No Restriction, the same OPID can be assigned to any number of
items, orders or order lines.
Allow Partial Picking in Allow all, no restriction

Normal Mode Allow last remaining partial inventory and full pallets
Allow full pallets only
If you select an option in this field, it will override the option that you selected
in MRFP.
Workflow Profile Code If you enter a workflow profile code in this field, it will override the workflow
(DIFP) profile code(s) attached to the customer and consignee.
108 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
AccellosOne Ship Date Current Date

Ship to Date
if you select Current Date, AccellosOne Ship will use the current date as the
ship to date sent to the parcel carrier even if that date differs from the order
ship to date in AccellosOne 3PL. If you select Ship to Date, AccellosOne Ship
will use the order ship to date in AccellosOne 3PL as the ship to date sent to
the parcel carrier.
UCC-128 Package Type Carton

Container
Pallet
The UCC-128 packaging type.
Maximum Gross Weight The maximum gross weight for an OPID in RFPIC/RFMG (that is, pallet build-
per OPID ing, case picking and OPID merging).
Maximum Net Weight per The maximum gross weight for an OPID in RFPIC/RFMG (that is, pallet build-
OPID ing, case picking and OPID merging).
OPID Weight Measure The unit of measure for the maximum weight.
Code
OPID Alert Percentage The percentage of the maximum weight at which an alert will be generated for
the RF operator in RFPIC. If the operator selects Yes at the Continue? prompt,
he or she can pick the selected line even though it is overweight.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 109

Warehouse Customer Consignee OPID Rule (WCCO)
CCCC screen
DOCUMENT MESSAGES BLOCK

In this block, you can attach a message code to a document code for a specific combination of customer/
carrier/consignee. This block is a further refinement of the document print messages logic in DPME.
If there are multiple messages attached to the same document, you can specify the sequence of messages
appearing on the document by entering a sequence number in the Seq. No field.
Document Messages Block
Warehouse Customer Consignee OPID Rule (WCCO)
In this program, you define your mix/no mix OPID rules for each warehouse/customer/consignee combi-
nation. The Allow Mixing Items in OPID flag in WCCO overrides your OPID Assignment Rules in CCCC. It
110 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Customer/Consignee Outbound Rules (CCOR)
also overrides your Single Item Per Outbound Pallet setting in CONS. Mix/no mix OPID rules apply to the
programs RFPIC, RFPK, RFITLV and RFMG.
NOTE: If an order requires the generation of a SSCC label, item codes cannot be mixed.
WCCO screen
In this program, you define your product mixing rules for case picking, pallet building and OPID merging as
well as your SSCC/MCP label requirements.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Customer Code The customer for the outbound rules.
Consignee Code The consignee for the outbound rules.
Ship Newer Product Y = Yes

N = No
If you set this flag to Yes, allocation will only allocate product whose expiry
date is greater than or equal to previously shipped inventory from that cus-
tomer to that consignee.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 111

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
OPID Inventory Level No Optimization (1)

Optimization Type Inventory Level 2 (2)
Inventory Level 3 (3)
If you select 1, mixing of inventory at all levels will be allowed. If you select 2,
mixing of inventory up to level 2 will be allowed. If you select 3, mixing of
inventory up to level 3 will be allowed. If you select 4, no mixing of inventory at
any level will be allowed.
OPID Expiry Date Optimi- Not allow (1)

zation Type A single expiry date per OPID is allowed.
Allow based on specified dates (2)

You can specify a minimum number of shelf life days, a maximum number of
shelf life days and/or a maximum number of days between your minimum and
maximum number of shelf life days.
Allow based on number of shelf life days (3)

You can specify a minimum number of days to expiry.
Allow any dates (4)

Any expiry date is allowed on an OPID.
Minimum Number of Only available if OPID Expiry Date Optimization Type = 2

Shelf Life Days
If you enter a minimum number of shelf life days in this field (say, 10), all prod-
uct on the same pallet must have a shelf life of at least 10 days.
Maximum Number of Only available if OPID Expiry Date Optimization Type = 2

Shelf Life Days
If you enter a maximum number of shelf life days in this field (say, 20), all
product on the same pallet must have a shelf life of greater than 20 days.
Number of Days Between Only available if OPID Expiry Date Optimization Type = 2
Min./Max. Dates
In this field, you specify the maximum number of days between your minimum
number of shelf life days and your maximum number of shelf life days. If there
is a conflict between this value and your minimum/maximum number of shelf
life days value, the more restrictive condition will apply.
112 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Number of Days Between Only available if OPID Expiry Date Optimization Type = 3
Multiple Expiry Dates in
OPID
If you enter a number in this field (say, 90), any product with an expiry date
greater than 90 days can be mixed.
Use Consignee Item Y = Yes

Configuration N = No
If you set this flag to Yes, you can define outbound pallet quantity by con-
signee in ICOC. If you set this flag to No, outbound pallet quantity by con-
signee in ICOC is deactivated.
SSCC Label Required Y = Yes

N = No
If you set this flag to Yes, an SSCC label will be generated. If you set this flag
to No, no SSCC label will be generated. This field overrides the Generate
UCC-128 Sequence Number flag in CONS (Consignees).
Use Client SSCC Only available if SSCC Label Required = Yes
Y = Yes
N = No
If you set this flag to Yes, the following requirements must be met:
 the SSCC number is received via EDI
 it is assigned to an LPN
 a full pallet is picked
If you set this flag to No, the SSCC label will be generated by AccellosOne
3PL.
Number of SSCC Labels Only available if SSCC Label Required = Yes

to Print
The number of SSCC labels to print.
Retail Ready Reserved for future use.
SSCC Number Range Only available if SSCC Label Required = Yes
Your number series for SSCC labels in NUSE (Number Series)
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 113

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Print Customer Name Y = Yes

N = No
If you set this flag to Yes, the customer name will print on the e label. If you set
this flag to No, the customer name will not print on the label.
Print Inventory Level on No Printing (1)

Labels Inventory Level 2 (2)
The inventory level to be printed on the label or No Printing.
Single Order per OPID Y = Yes

N = No
If you set this flag to Yes, OPID’s will be restricted to product belonging to a
single order. If you set this flag to No, an OPID can contain product from multi-
ple orders.
The option that you select in this field overrides the option that you select in
the OPID Assignment Rules field in CCCC.
MCP Label Required Y = Yes

N = No
If you select Yes, an MCP label is required. If you select No, an MCP label is
not required.
114 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CCOR screen showing default values
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 115

116 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

GENERAL NAVIGATION AND LOOK-UP
PROGRAMS
Accessing RF .................................................................................................. 118
Changing Your Company ............................................................................... 118
Looking Up Inventory in RFIT ........................................................................ 118
Looking Up Inventory by Location in RFPR ................................................. 120
Looking Up Receipts in RFIL ......................................................................... 122
Looking Up Allocated Order Lines in RFOL ................................................. 124
Looking Up Inventory in RFLOIP ................................................................... 127
Looking Up Locations in LOLORF ................................................................ 128
Looking Up Inventory in LOENRF ................................................................. 130
Looking Up Receipts in LORERF .................................................................. 131
Looking Up Orders in LOORRF ..................................................................... 133
Looking Up Reserve Logic Customers in RFLR .......................................... 134
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 117

GENERAL NAVIGATION AND LOOK-UP PROGRAMS
Accessing RF
Accessing RF
You access RF through an RF device. To access RF through an RF device, log onto Tera Term or some other
terminal emulation software.
Changing Your Company
The company that you are currently working in is displayed on the RF Main Menu. If you wish to change this
company, you key in your new company code and press Enter.
1 Enter the RF environment.
current company
RF Main Menu
2 Check the company code in the top left-hand side of your screen.
3 If you wish to change companies, key in your new company code and press Enter.
4 Proceed to enter the RF program that you wish to use.
Looking Up Inventory in RFIT
You look up your inventory in RFIT. For the item or items that you specify, RFIT shows the level 2, 3 and 4
values, whether the item is on hold, the location in which the item is stored and the on-hand, on-order, on-
receipt and available quantities.
You can enter up to six search criteria for any given query. For example, you can specify your customer code
only and RFIT will show all product belonging to that customer. If you enter your customer code and item
code, RFIT will show all product for the item that you specify. If you enter customer code, item code and level
2 value, RFIT will show all product for the level 2 value that you specify.
118 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Looking Up Inventory in RFIT
If you enter no search criteria, RFIT will show all product in your warehouse regardless of customer.
NOTE You can only look up records in RFIT that have positive inventory. If you
wish to look up inventory with zero balances, you must use LOEN (Look Up Inven-
tory).
FUNCTION KEYS
Criteria Mode
F2 Eq (Execute Query) Searches for the record(s) that meet the

criteria that you specify in Criteria mode.
F4 Rt (Return to Main) Switch to Main Mode.
Main Mode
F1 En (Enter Criteria) Switch to Criteria Mode.
F4 Ex (Exit) Exit program.
1 Enter RFIT.
RF — Item Look-Up
2 Enter or scan in the appropriate search criteria. You can query by one or more of the parameters shown
below. If you do not want to enter a parameter (for example, you want to look up all items regardless of
level 2 and 3 values), press Enter to bypass the appropriate fields. You can query by one or more of the
following:
 customer code
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 119

Looking Up Inventory by Location in RFPR
item code

level 2, 3 and 4 value


 hold code
3 When you finish entering your search criteria, press F2 to execute your query.
1 = current record
displayed
3 = number of
records that met the
criteria that you
specified
RFIT screen showing three records for item A1
4 If your query resulted in multiple records being retrieved from the database, use your arrow keys to scroll
forward and backward through the records that matched the criteria that you specified.
5 Press F1 to perform another query or press F4 to exit.
You can look up inventory by either item or by location in RFPR. For each item or location that you specify,
RFPR shows the level 2, 3 and 4 values, whether the item is on hold, the location in which the item is stored
and the available, on hand, on order and replenishment quantities.
There are two types of searches that you can do in RFPR: you can search for all inventory records including
plus records or you can exclude plus records from your search results. A plus record is a temporary record
generated by the system when you allocate an order for a reserve logic customer. The inventory levels that
are unknown at the time of allocation are indicated by a plus sign.
If you query by location code and warehouse, the search results are sorted in customer code and levels 1/2/
3/4 sequence. If you query by any other criteria, the search results are sorted in location code, inventory
access code sequence.
FUNCTION KEYS
All Modes
F1 EN (Enter Criteria) Switch to Criteria Mode.
120 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FUNCTION KEYS
F2 QU (Execute Query) Searches for the record(s) that meet the

This query retrieves all eligible inventory
records including plus records.
F3 QR (Query Reserve) Excludes plus records from your search

results.
F4 EX (Exit) Exit program.
1 Enter RFPR.
RF — Look Up Product and Location
2 Enter or scan in the appropriate search criteria. You can query by one or more of the following:
 customer code
 item code
 level 2 and 3 value
 location and warehouse code
 hold code
3 When you finish entering your search criteria, do one of the following:
If you wish to look up all If you wish to exclude plus

inventory including plus records: records in your query results:
a) Press F2 (QU). a) Press F3 (QR).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 121

Looking Up Receipts in RFIL
RFPR screen (record 40) showing available, on-hand, on order and replenishment quantities for loca-
tion A103
The AV.Q field shows the available quantity, the OH.Q field shows the on-hand quantity, the ORD field
shows the on order quantity and the REPI field shows the replenishment quantity.
You look up your allocated unconfirmed receipts in RFIL. If the receipt is confirmed or unallocated, you cannot
look it up in RFIL. There are three options in RFIL:
 you can look up all allocated lines on an unconfirmed receipt
 you can look up all lines that have been staged but not put-away (if you do not stage your product, this
option is not available)
 you can look up all lines that have been put-away
RFIL shows the quantity of each receipt line in the lowest SKU. For example, if your receipt line has a quantity
of two pallets and there 60 cases to a pallet, the quantity in RFIL will read 120.
FUNCTION KEYS
Results Mode
F1 AL (All) Shows all staged/put-away receipt lines.
F2 RC (Received) Shows all receipt lines that have been

staged but not put-away.
F3 PU (Put-Away) Shows all receipt lines that have been put-

away but not confirmed.
122 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FUNCTION KEYS
F4 RT (Return to Main) Switch to Main Mode.
Main Mode
1 Enter RFIL.
RF — RF Receipt Line Look-Up
2 Key in your receipt number and press Enter.

3 Press F1 (All) to display the first receipt line on the receipt.
1 = current line
displayed
5 = total number
of lines on receipt
Receipt 1204 showing line 1 of a five-line receipt
4 Use your arrow keys to scroll forward and backward to view each receipt line.
5 If you stage your product before you put it away, press F2 (Receiving) to view product that has been
staged but not put-away.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 123

Looking Up Allocated Order Lines in RFOL
RFIL screen showing two lines of staged product
6 If you have multiple lines of staged product, use your arrow keys to scroll forward and backward to view
each line.
7 Press F3 (Put-Away) to view product that has been put-away.
RFIL screen showing three lines of product that have been put away
8 If you have multiple lines of product that have been put-away, use your arrow keys to scroll forward and
backward to view each line.
9 When you finish looking up your receipt, press F4 the required number of times to exit.
You look up your allocated unconfirmed order lines in RFOL. If the order line is confirmed, you cannot look it
up in RFOL. For each order line that you look up, RFOL shows the order number, customer code, line
number, warehouse code, location type, up to four inventory levels, hold code (if any), quantity, location and
OPID (if any). Locations with a quantity of zero are not shown.
There are three options in RFOL:
124 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

 you can look up all unconfirmed order lines (that is, the order is either allocated or picked)
 you can look up unconfirmed order lines that have been allocated but not picked
 you can look up unconfirmed order lines that have been picked
NOTE The allocated and picked options in RFOL always show the allocated and
picked lines for the currently selected order. If you wish to look up all allocated or
picked lines regardless of order, you must start a new query. You cannot query on all
allocated or picked lines if there is an order displayed on your screen.
Order line records in RFOL are sorted by order number followed by location code.
FUNCTION KEYS
Results Mode
F1 AL (All) Shows all order lines that have been either

allocated or picked.
F2 AO (Allocated) Shows all order lines that have been allo-

cated but not picked.
F3 PI (Picked) Shows all order lines that have been

picked but not confirmed.
Main Mode
1 Enter RFOL.
RF — Order Line Look-Up
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 125

2 Enter or scan in the appropriate search criteria. You can query by one or more of the parameters shown
below. If you do not want to enter a parameter (for example, you want to look up all orders regardless of
warehouse), press Enter to bypass the field.
 order number
 warehouse code
 location type code
3 After pressing Enter in the Location Type field, press F1 (All) to display the first order line on the first
order.
1 = current record
displayed
133 = total num-
ber of order lines
for all uncon-
firmed orders
Order Line Look-Up showing ALL option
4 Use your arrow keys to scroll forward and backward to view each order line on each unconfirmed order.
5 Press F2 (Allocated) to view the order lines for the currently selected order that have been allocated.
There are two allo-

cated lines for order
1512
Order Line Look-Up showing allocated lines for order 1512
6 Use your arrow keys to scroll forward and backward to view each order line that has been allocated.
7 Press F3 (Picked) to view the order lines of the currently selected order that have been picked.
126 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Looking Up Inventory in RFLOIP
There are three lines

that have been picked
for order 1528
Order Line Look-Up showing picked lines for order 1528
8 When you finish viewing your orders, press F4 the required number of times to exit.
Looking Up Inventory in RFLOIP
This program allows you to look up inventory information by scanning in a serial number from a bar code
label. For each serial number, RFLOIP shows the customer code, up to four inventory levels, the warehouse
and location, and the on-hand and available quantities. You can scan in the entire bar code label or you can
manually key only the serial number portion of the bar code.
You cannot look up serial numbers if the product is on a confirmed order.
FUNCTION KEYS
Criteria Mode
F2 EQ (Execute Query) Searches for the record(s) that meet the

Main Mode
F1 EN (Enter Criteria) Switch to Criteria Mode.
1 Enter RFLOIP.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 127

Looking Up Locations in LOLORF
RF — Look Up Item Process
2 Enter or scan in your serial number.
RF — Look Up Item Process showing inventory information for serial number 0001
This RF look-up program is similar to the non-RF program LOLO (Look Up Location Information). It is
designed to be viewed on a truck-mounted RF device with a wider screen and allows warehouse personnel
full access to AccellosOne 3PL’s location information.
Refer to the Operations 1 Guide for detailed information on LOLO.
1 Enter LOLORF.
128 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RF - Look Up Location
2 Key in your search criteria and press F2 (Execute Query).

3 When AccellosOne 3PL retrieves the location(s) that you selected, press F3 (Inventory Block) to see the
inventory in the location(s).
RF - Look Up Location
4 When you finish looking up; your location, press F4 (Location) and then F4 (Exit).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 129

Looking Up Inventory in LOENRF
Looking Up Inventory in LOENRF
This RF look-up program is similar to the non-RF program LOEN (Look Up Entity Information). It is designed
to be viewed on a truck-mounted RF device with a wider screen and allows warehouse personnel full access
to AccellosOne 3PL’s location information.
Refer to the Operations 1 Guide for detailed information on LOEN.
1 Enter LOENRF.
RF - Look Up Entity Information

3 When AccellosOne 3PL retrieves the inventory that you selected, press F3 (Location Block) to see the
inventory in the location(s).
130 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Looking Up Receipts in LORERF
RF - Look Up Entity Information
4 When you finish looking up your inventory, press F4 (Inventory) and then F4 (Exit).
This RF look-up program is similar to the non-RF program LORE (Look Up Receipts). It is designed to be
viewed on a truck-mounted RF device with a wider screen and allows warehouse personnel full access to
AccellosOne 3PL’s receipt information.
Refer to the Operations 1 Guide for detailed information on LORE.
1 Enter LORERF.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 131

RF - Look Up Receipts

3 When AccellosOne 3PL retrieves the receipts that you selected, press F3 (Line Block) to see the receipt
lines.
RF - Look Up Receipts
4 When you finish looking up your receipts, press F4 (Receipt Block) and then F4 (Exit).
132 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Looking Up Orders in LOORRF
Looking Up Orders in LOORRF
This RF look-up program is similar to the non-RF program LOOR (Look Up Orders). It is designed to be
viewed on a truck-mounted RF device with a wider screen and allows warehouse personnel full access to
AccellosOne 3PL’s order information.
Refer to the Operations 1 Guide for detailed information on LOOR.
1 Enter LOORRF.
RF - Look Up Orders

3 When AccellosOne 3PL retrieves the orders that you selected, press F3 (Line Block) to see the order
lines.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 133

Looking Up Reserve Logic Customers in RFLR
RF - Look Up Orders
4 When you finish looking up orders, press F4 (Order Block) and then F4 (Exit).
You look up inventory by location for reserve logic customers in RFLR. For each location that you specify,
RFLR shows the on-hand, on order replenishment and available quantities at the inventory level that the
customer reserves at. For example, if a three-level customer reserves at level 2 (lot number), RFLR will show
quantities for each unique lot in a given location.
Locations in which the available quantity is less than or equal to zero are not shown and inventory on hold is
not included in the location quantities.
If your query retrieves multiple locations, locations are sorted by the expiry date of product in the location.
FUNCTION KEYS
Criteria Mode
F2 Eq (Execute Query) Searches for the record(s) that meet the

Main Mode
F1 En (Enter Criteria) Switch to Criteria Mode.
134 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FUNCTION KEYS
F3 RL (Relocate) Enter RFRL to perform a relocate.
F4 Rt (Return to Main) Switch to Main Mode.
1 Enter RFLR.
RF — Look Up Reserve Logic Customer
2 Key in your level 1 value and press Enter. If two customers have the same item code, a pick list will dis-
play. Use your arrow keys to position the cursor over the item code that you wish to look up and press
Enter to select it.
3 If required, key in your level 2 value and press Enter.
4 If you have four inventory levels and reserve at level 3, you can key in a level 3 value and press Enter.
5 If required, key in your location code and press Enter.
6 If required, key in your warehouse code and press Enter.
7 When you finish entering your search criteria, press F2 (Qu) to query.
RF — Look Up Reserve Logic Customer showing level 2 quantities for location S100
8 If your query retrieves multiple locations, use your arrow keys to scroll through the list of locations.
9 When you finish looking up your reserve logic inventory by location, press F4 twice to exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 135

136 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
Overview of Put-Away .................................................................................... 138
Understanding Inbound Flows in RF ............................................................ 139
Overview of the Unique Identifier (UI) ........................................................... 139
Unloading Product in RFCH ........................................................................... 140
Entering Trailer and Pallet Information ...................................................... 156
Performing Queries .................................................................................... 160
Overriding the System-Assigned Location ................................................. 155
Entering Partial U-Type Receipt Lines ....................................................... 161
Printing Labels ........................................................................................... 162
Understanding Variances in RFCH ............................................................ 163
Processing Variances ................................................................................ 164
Entering Process Values............................................................................ 166
Validating Process Values ......................................................................... 168
Creating a New Line .................................................................................. 169
Receiving Product Under an Alternate Item Code ..................................... 170
Receiving Product on Automatic Hold ....................................................... 172
Receiving Product with a Variable Product Breakdown ............................. 173
Receiving Mixed Product ........................................................................... 173
Looking Up Temperature and Trailer Information in LORE ....................... 175
Looking Up Remarks and Messages in RFCH .......................................... 176
Entering Temperature and Trailer Information in RFTT .............................. 177
Putting Away Product in RFPU ...................................................................... 178
Overriding the System-Assigned Location ................................................. 184
Entering Variances..................................................................................... 185
Putting Away Product Under an Alternate Item Code ................................ 187
Putting Away in a Pick Line Location ......................................................... 188
Entering Process Values in RFIPS ................................................................ 188
Deleting a Receipt Line in RFDL .................................................................... 190
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 137

INBOUND PROCESSING
Overview of Put-Away
Overview of Put-Away
There are two ways of putting away product in AccellosOne 3PL:

 In two-step put-away, you unload the receipt and use RFCH to place the product in a staging loca-
tion and then perform final put-away in RFPU. If auto-confirmation is activated in DIFP, no confirmation
of the receipt is required in CHRF (Time-Stamp and Confirm Receipt).
 In one-step put-away, you unload the receipt and use RFCH to put-away the product in a final non-
staging location with no processing in RFPU. After final put-away in RFCH, you must confirm the receipt
in CHRF (Time-Stamp and Confirm Receipt).
If your flows are correctly defined in DIFP, you can switch from one-step put-away to two-step put-away or
from two-step put-away to one-step put-away as often as required within the same account.
1 OFFICE
ENRE You enter the receipt in ENRE (Enter,
Modify and Delete Receipt).
2 OFFICE
CHRF You advance the receipt's flow to DRDO
(driver arrived at door) in CHRF (Time-
Stamp and Confirm Receipt).
3 WAREHOUSE
RFCH You unload the receipt in RFCH (RF
Check/Unload).
4 WAREHOUSE
One-step put- If you are performing one-step put-away,
No Yes
away? you put away the product in a final non-
staging location. If you are performing two-
step put-away, you put away the product in
a staging location.
RFPU
If you are performing two-step put-away,
you put away the product in RFPU (RF Put-
Away).
5 OFFICE
CHRF
You confirm the receipt in CHRF (Time-
Stamp and Confirm Receipt).
138 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
Understanding Inbound Flows in RF
Understanding Inbound Flows in RF
In non-RF receiving, you time-stamp and advance the flow of a receipt in CHRF (Time-Stamp and Confirm
Receipts). Advancing the flow of a receipt in CHRF advances the flow of all receipt lines and receipt location
lines on the receipt. You cannot advance the flow of one receipt line and leave another receipt line remain at
its original flow.
In RF receiving, on the other hand, AccellosOne 3PL automatically advances the flow of individual receipt
lines and receipt location lines. For example, when you unload product in RFCH, the receipt line’s flow is
automatically advanced from STUN (Start Unloading) to INST (Inbound Staged). Because the flow of
individual receipt lines is advanced as each receipt line is unloaded, not all lines on a given receipt will be at
the same flow. When this happens, the receipt header will show the earliest flow on the receipt.
For example, suppose there are five receipt lines on a given receipt: two lines are at the flow STUN, two lines
are at the flow INST and one line is at the flow STPU (Start Put-Away). If you look up the receipt in LORE, the
receipt’s flow will be set to STUN, which is the earliest flow.
Overview of the Unique Identifier (UI)
The unique identifier (UI) is a single value that represents an inventory entity defined down to the lowest
inventory level. For example, the UI value of ABC001 could represent item A1, lot 101, pallet ID 10 belonging
to customer A.
Unique Identifiers make it possible to enter a single value in the core RF program such as RFCH, RFPU,
RFRL, RFRP and RFPIC that identifies the product that you are working with. When you enter this value,
AccellosOne 3PL automatically populates the customer code and inventory level fields with the correct
values.
AccellosOne 3PL can automatically generate these values when you receive inventory in ENRE or you can
manually create the values yourself.
RFCH screen showing UI value of GN000286 that identifies three inventory levels
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 139

INBOUND PROCESSING
Unloading Product in RFCH
NOTE Depending on how you track your customers’ inventory, the unique identifier
may or may not be unique across customers. For example, suppose you have two
customers: customer A whose inventory is tracked by item code/lot number/pallet ID
and customer B whose inventory is tracked by item code and lot number. Customer A
could have “001” as the unique identifier representing a particular pallet ID and cus-
tomer B could have “001” as the unique identifier representing a particular lot number.
When this happens, if both inventory entities are on open receipts at the appropriate
flow, entering “001” in the UI field of RFCH will result in pick list from which the RF
operator must select the appropriate inventory.
In this program, you unload your receipt and place it either in a staging location (if you are going to perform
final put-away in RFPU) or in a non-staging location (if you are performing one-step put-away with no
processing in RFPU). Your receipt must be at the flow DRDO (Driver Arrived) before you can unload it. If the
product that you are receiving is not on the original receipt, you can create a new line for the product in
RFCH.
RFCH supports two types of receipt lines:
 P type in which AccellosOne 3PL generates your pallet ID or you enter your pallet ID’s manually during
receipt entry in ENRE (for the purposes of RF, P type includes the following line types in ENRE: I for In-
Transit, H for Handling Only and S for Storage Only)
 U type in which inventory level 2 or higher is unknown at the time of receipt entry (also known as blind
receiving)
With P-type lines (that is, all inventory levels have been entered in ENRE), you can enter your lowest
inventory level and RFCH will retrieve the receipt number and all other inventory levels. With U-type lines
(that is, one or more inventory levels have not been entered in ENRE), you must enter your receipt number
and all inventory levels.
CAUTION RFCH does not support multiple operators working on the same receipt
when these operators are working in different modes. If you allow multiple operators
to work on the same receipt, make sure that all operators are working in the same
mode — either unload mode or put-away mode.
140 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
REQUIREM ENTS — GE NE RAL
FLOWS DRDO (Driver Arrived at Door)

STUN (Start Unloading)
INST (Inbound Staged)
STPU (Start Put-Away)
PUCO (Put-Away Complete)
INVENTORY LEV- You can process up to four inventory levels in RFCH.

ELS
PROCESS VAL- If you wish to scan in a catch weight and serial number, you require two process
UES values: one for catch weights and one for serial numbers. These codes must be
set up in IPRO (Item Process) with the Create Automatic Records flag set to Y for
Yes and then attached to a profile in IPRP (Item Process Profile). The IPRP pro-
file must in turn be attached to the item(s) requiring the process values.
See the section “Item Process Values” in the Operations 2 Guide for further infor-
mation about process values.
SCAN PARAME- Only required if you are scanning process values, inventory levels or UI values
TER CODE from a bar code label
You need a scan parameter profile defined in SCPR (Scan Parameter Code).
This profile must contain a minimum of two records in the Detail Block: one record
for your scanned in weight and another record for your scanned in serial number.
The SCPR profile must in turn be attached to the item requiring the process val-
ues.
BAR CODE PRO- Only required if you are scanning a UI value or inventory levels from a bar code
FILE label
You must define a bar code profile in BAPR and attach to it the scan parameter
code that you set up in SCPR.
DOCUMENTS The Print Document Without Assigning Locations flag in DOCU (Documents)
must be set to Yes for all receipt-related documents such as the tally.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 141

INBOUND PROCESSING
OTHER If you want AccellosOne 3PL to generate your pallet ID’s or other inventory levels,
you must set the Method of Generating/Validating Values flag in DILP (Depositor
Inventory Level Profile) to W for Warehouse for that level. As well, the Warehouse
Code field in the receipt header must be populated. See the Setup Guide for
further information on DILP and DIAP.
If you wish to define a default staging and put-away warehouse, you can enter a
warehouse code in either the header block of ENRE (for a given receipt) or in
CUST (for all receipts for a given customer). If you enter a default warehouse
code in both ENRE and CUST, the ENRE code will override the CUST code.
If you wish to display a depositor print message set up in DPME, attach a docu-
ment code of TALY to your message code in DPME. DPME messages for RFCH
require specific customer/carrier/shipper combinations; you cannot use the “.ALL”
codes.
NOTE A DPME message for RFCH does not actually print unless you set up a
real tally document in DOCU and then attach this tally document to an inbound
flow in DIFP.
RESTRICTIONS RFCH does not support lines that have been partially received in ENRE. A line is
considered partially received if you add a location line record in ENRE to a receipt
line and the quantity of the location line is less than the full number of units for the
receipt line.
REQUIREMENTS — One-Step Manual Put-Away (1)
In one-step manual put-away, you unload your receipt and place it in a final non-staging location with no
processing in RFPU. The mode for one-step put-away in RFCH is P for Put-Away and the non-staging
location is manually selected by the operator.
FLOWS For one-step manual put-away, the Assign Location flag in DIFP must be set as
follows:
ENRE = Y
DRDO = N
STUN = N/A
INST = N/A
STPU = N
PUCO = N
CORE = N/A
NOTE If you wish to perform two-step put-away for some receipts and one-
step put-away for other receipts, use the flow settings for two-step put-away.
142 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
REQUIREMENTS — One-Step Manual Put-Away (1)
AUTO-CONFIRMA- If you wish to deactivate automatic confirmation of receipts, you must create a
TION new flow and attach it to your inbound flow profile. This flow must be placed
before CORE (Confirm Receipt) and the Mandatory flag for this flow in DIFP must
be set to Y for Yes.
REQUIREMENTS — One-Step Directed Put-Away (2)
In one-step directed put-away, you unload your receipt and place it in a final non-staging location with
no processing in RFPU. The mode for one-step put-away in RFCH is P for Put-Away and the non-stag-
ing location is selected by the system. Directed put-away requires special setup in ILOP (Item Location
Profile) and other programs. See the Allocation and Wave Manager for further information.
FLOWS For one-step directed put-away, the Assign Location flag in DIFP must be set as
follows:
ENRE = Y
DRDO = Y
STUN = N/A
INST = N/A
STPU = Y
PUCO = Y
CORE = N/A
NOTE If you wish to perform two-step put-away for some receipts and one-
step put-away for other receipts, use the flow settings for two-step put-away.
OTHER Put-away parameters must be defined in ILOP (Put-Away).
REQUIREMENTS — Two-Step Put-Away with Manual Staging and Manual Put-

Away (3)
In two-step put-away, you unload your receipt and place it in a staging location before performing final
put-away in RFPU. The mode for two-step put-away in RFCH is U for Unload and both the staging and
non-staging locations are manually selected by the operator.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 143

INBOUND PROCESSING
REQUIREMENTS — Two-Step Put-Away with Manual Staging and Manual Put-

Away (3)
FLOWS For two-step put-away with manual staging, the Assign Location flag in DIFP
must be set as follows:
ENRE = N
DRDO = N
STUN = N
INST = N
STPU = N
PUCO = N
CORE = N/A
REQUIREMENTS — Two-Step Put-Away with Directed Staging and Manual Put-

Away(4)
put-away in RFPU. The mode for two-step put-away in RFCH is U for Unload and the staging location is
selected by the system while the final non-staging location is selected by the operator. Directed staging
requires special setup in ILOP (Item Location Profile) and other programs. See the Allocation and Wave
Manager Guide for further information.
FLOWS For two-step put-away with directed staging, the Assign Location flag in DIFP
must be set as follows:
ENRE = N
DRDO = Y
STUN = Y
INST = N
STPU = N
PUCO = N
CORE = N/A
ALLOCATION Directed staging requires warehouse zones set up in WHZO (Warehouse Zone
Codes). The zone type code must be set to P (P & D) or S (Sorting) and the stag-
ing location must be defined in the Header Block of WHZO.
OTHER Directed Move Inbound parameters must be defined in ILOP (Put-Away).
144 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
REQUIREMENTS — Two-Step Put-Away with Directed Staging and Directed

Put-Away (5)
put-away in RFPU. The mode for two-step put-away in RFCH is U for Unload and both the staging and
final locations are selected by the system. Directed put-away requires special setup in ILOP (Item Loca-
tion Profile) and other programs. See the Allocation and Wave Manager Guide for further information.
If you switch from two-step put-away to one-step put-away in RFCH and if you are processing a P-type
line, AccellosOne 3PL will use your directed move parameters rather than your directed put-away
parameters.
FLOWS For two-step put-away with directed staging and put-away, the Assign Location
flag in DIFP must be set as follows:
ENRE = N
DRDO = Y
STUN = Y
INST = Y
STPU = Y
PUCO = Y
CORE = N/A
ALLOCATION Directed put-away requires warehouse zones set up in WHZO (Warehouse Zone
OTHER The following parameters must be defined: Directed Move Inbound in ILOP
(Directed Moved Inbound) and Put-Away in ILOP (Put-Away).
REQUIREMENTS — Two-Step Put-Away with Manual Staging and Directed Put-

Away (6)
put-away in RFPU. The mode for two-step put-away in RFCH is U for Unload and the staging location is
selected by the operator while the final location is selected by the system. Directed put-away requires
special setup in ILOP (Item Location Profile) and other programs. See the Allocation and Wave Man-
ager Guide for further information.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 145

INBOUND PROCESSING
REQUIREMENTS — Two-Step Put-Away with Manual Staging and Directed Put-

Away (6)
FLOWS For two-step put-away with manual staging and directed put-away, the Assign
Location flag in DIFP must be set as follows:
ENRE = N
DRDO = N
STUN = N
INST = Y
STPU = Y
PUCO = Y
CORE = N/A
ALLOCATION Directed put-away requires warehouse zones set up in WHZO (Warehouse Zone
OTHER Put-Away parameters must be defined in ILOP (Directed Move Inbound).
REQUIREMENTS — Three-Step Put-Away (7)
In three-step put-away, the product is received and staged on the dock, moved to a PnD location by a
forklift operator and then moved to a final put-away location by a narrow aisle equipment (VNA) opera-
tor.
You set up your final put-away locations in the Location Block of WHZO (Warehouse Zones).
FLOWS For three-step put-away with manual staging and directed put-away, the Assign
Location flag in DIFP must be set as follows:
ENRE = N
DRDO = N
STUN = N
INST = Y
STPU = Y
PUCO = Y
CORE = N/A
ALLOCATION Three-step put-away requires warehouse zones set up in WHZO (Warehouse

Zone Codes). The zone type code must be set to P (PnD) or S (Sorting) and the
PnD location must be defined in the Header Block of WHZO.
An initial staging location on the dock is also required.
146 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
REQUIREMENTS — Three-Step Put-Away (7)
LOTP The PnD location’s location type must be set up in LOTP as follows:
.
OTHER Put-Away parameters must be defined in ILOP (Directed Move Inbound).
MRFP In the Special Receiving Mode Types field in MRFP, you select from the following
three-step put-away options:
 RFCH to General Staging Location, RFPU to a PnD Location, then to Final
Location
 RFCH to Gen Stag Loc, RFPU to PnD Loc, then to Final Loc, RFCH Overrides
If you select the first option, three-step put-away is mandatory in RFCH. If you
select the second option, the RF operator can select either two-step or three-step
put-away in RFCH.
In the Picking Rules for PnD Locations field in MRFP, you define your pick meth-
ods for these types of locations: full pallet picks only or all pick methods.
FUNCTION KEYS
Criteria Mode

F4 EX (Return to Main) Switch to Main Mode.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 147

INBOUND PROCESSING
FUNCTION KEYS
Results Mode
F1 CL (Create Line) Create a new line.
F1 RM (Remark) Show remark(s) entered in ENRE.
F2 PL (Print Label) Print labels.
F3 CM (Change Mode) Switch between put-away mode and

unload mode.
F3 CR (Close Receipt) Close a receipt with unprocessed lines.

Supervisor access required.
F4 RT (Exit) Switch to Main Mode.
F9 Move cursor to previous field.
Main Mode
F1 PL (Print Label) Print labels.
F2 QS (Query) Query receipts.
1 Make sure that your receipt is at the flow DRDO or STUN.

2 Enter RFCH.
RFCH screen
148 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
3 Do one of the following:
If you are processing a P-type You have two options:

line: a) You can enter or scan in your UI (Unique Identifier)
value and AccellosOne 3PL will retrieve the receipt
number and up to four inventory levels for that UI
value. If you have the same UI value on multiple
receipts, a pick list will appear showing the receipt
number and level 1/2/3/4 values. Use your arrow
keys to position the cursor over the receipt that you
wish to process and press F3 to select it.
b) You can bypass the UI field and enter the receipt
number and level 1, 2, 3 and 4 values yourself.
If you are processing a U-type a) Press Enter to bypass the UI field.

line from ENRE with no system- b) Key in your receipt number and press Enter.
generated inventory levels: c) Key in your level 1 value for the first product that you
wish to receive and press Enter.
d) Key in your level 2 value and press Enter.
e) Key in your level 3 value and press Enter.
f) If required, key in your level 4 value and press Enter.

line from ENRE with the lowest b) Key in your receipt number and press Enter.
inventory level system gener- c) Key in your level 1 value for the first product that you
ated: wish to receive and press Enter.
d) Repeat the above step for each additional inventory
level until you reach your lowest level.
e) When you reach your lowest inventory level, you
have two options: you can manually enter it and
press Enter as you did with your higher inventory
levels or you can press Enter with the field blank
and AccellosOne 3PL will generate a number for
you.

line from ENRE and you are b) Key in your receipt number and press Enter.
scanning in your inventory lev- c) Scan in your level 1, 2 and 3 values from the appro-
els from one or more bar code priate label. If RFCH displays a pick list of bar code
labels: labels, select the appropriate label from the pick list.
If you do not know the UI num- a) See “Performing Queries” on page 160.
ber or receipt number:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 149

INBOUND PROCESSING
If manual entry of expiry dates is

activated for the item and you are If manual entry of expiry dates is
receiving a U-type line: NOT activated for the item:
a) The following screen will appear: a) Proceed to next step.
b) Key in your expiry date in the for-

mat displayed on your screen
and press Enter.
MODE field shows current

mode:
P = Put-Away (one-step)
U = Unload (two-step)
RFCH screen showing prompt for tie and hi
5 Depending on your system setup, RFCH will be preset to either put-away mode or unload mode. If
required, you can press F3 (CM) to toggle between the two modes.
Once you process a receipt line, the mode is set for all remaining lines on the receipt and cannot be
altered until you start a new receipt.
NOTE If you have manually entered a location in ENRE for one receipt line belong-
ing to a multi-line receipt, the mode for the remaining receipt lines will be preset to
put-away and cannot be changed. To switch to unload mode, you will have to remove
the location from the receipt line in ENRE and then return to RFCH.
150 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
If you wish to enter your tie, hi

and loose values and let
AccellosOne 3PL calculate the If you wish to enter the total
quantity: quantity directly:
Depending on your setup in MRFP,

a) Key in your tie and press Enter.
the quantity may or may not be dis-
b) Key in your hi and press Enter
played in the Qty field.
again.
c) If you have loose quantities, key
in your loose quantity and press a) Press Enter to bypass the T(ie)
Enter. If you do not have loose field.
quantities, press Enter with the b) Key in your quantity and press
L(oose) field blank to bypass this Enter. You can enter your quan-
option. tity in pallets, eaches or any
other SKU type that is activated
in the item’s quantity breakdown.
If your default SKU type is
eaches and you wish to enter a
quantity of 10 pallets, you would
key in 10P for 10 pallets.
c) If the quantity is already dis-
played, press Enter to accept it
or key in a new quantity and
press Enter.
7 If the quantity entered does not match the expected quantity, a warning message will appear (“Qty
Entered Does Not Match Expected Qty. Do You Want to Continue (Y/N)”) and you will be prompted to
either continue with the current receipt or work on another receipt.
If the item that you are receiving If the item that you are receiving
requires the entry of a process does NOT require the entry of a
code value: process code value:
a) Refer to the section “Entering a) Proceed to next step.

Process Values” on page 166 for
further instructions.
9 If F1 (Rm) is available, the receipt has remarks. You can press F1 to view the remarks and then press F4
to exit the Remarks Block.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 151

INBOUND PROCESSING
If there is an automatic hold If there is an automatic hold

placed on the item and manual placed on the item and manual
If there is no automatic hold overrides of holds are overrides of holds are NOT
placed on the item: activated: activated:
a) If required, key in your manual a) If required, you can manually a) The cursor will skip past the
hold code and press Enter. If override or remove the hold Hold field and you will not be
you do not want to place the code. Make any necessary able to override or remove the
product on hold, press Enter changes and press Enter or hold code.
to bypass this field. press Enter without making
any changes to accept the
automatic hold.
11 Proceed to assign a location to the product as follows. If you are working in unload mode, the product
must be placed in a staging location. A staging location is a location whose location type in LOTP is
called STAG. This STAG code must have the Staging flag set to Y for Yes.
If you are working in put-away mode, the product must be placed in a non-staging location. A non-staging
location is a location whose location type in LOTP has the Staging flag set to N for No.
152 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
If directed staging/put-away is If directed staging/put-away is

activated on your system: NOT activated on your system:
AccellosOne 3PL will display the

a) Key in your location and press
system-assigned warehouse and
Enter.
location. You can accept the sys-
b) If required, key in your ware-
tem-assigned warehouse and loca-
house and press Enter.
tion or you can enter a different
c) If you wish to change your loca-
warehouse and location
tion code, press F9 to return to
the L(oc) field. Then repeat steps
If you wish to override the system- a and b.
assigned location, see “Overriding
the System-Assigned Location” on
page 155.
RFCH screen showing system-

assigned warehouse and location
a) Press Enter to accept the sys-

tem-assigned location.
b) Press Enter again to accept the
warehouse that the system-
assigned location belongs to.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 153

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen showing prompt for next UI
12 If required, you can press F9 to return to the Hold field and place the product on hold.
13 Repeat the above steps for any additional UI’s or receipt lines.
14 When you finish entering all the lines on the receipt, do one of the following:
If you are an operator (or non- If you are a supervisor, if you

supervisor) and you have NOT have NOT entered all lines on
If you have fully entered all fully entered all lines on the the receipt and if you press F3
lines on the receipt: receipt: (CR):
a) Proceed to next step. The following message will appear: The following message will appear:
RFCH screen showing warning

for not all lines processed
a) If you key in Y for Yes to pro-

RFCH screen showing prompt to
ceed, the system will zero out
complete process
any lines not unloaded or put-
a) Press Enter to exit the receipt away, advance to the next flow
line. You can return to RFCH and check for variances. If you
at any time and resume pro- key in N for No, proceed to
cessing the receipt line. enter the missing lines.
154 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen showing message that receipt has been processed
15 Press Enter to close the “Process Completed” message. If prompted to mark the receipt as completed or
to create a new line, key in Y for Yes to complete the receipt and press Enter.
16 Process another receipt or press F4 to exit.
OVERRIDING THE SYSTEM-ASSIGNED LOCATION

There are three options for overriding the system-assigned location for a receipt line depending on your setup
in MRFP (RF Profile):
 if the Supvr. Must Authorize Location Override in RFCH/RFPU/RFRL flag in MRFP is set to No, an oper-
ator can change a location without authorization of a supervisor
 if the Supvr. Must Authorize Location Override in RFCH/RFPU/RFRL flag in MRFP is set to Yes, chang-
ing a location must be approved by a supervisor
 if the Reason Code Required to Override System-Assigned Location flag in MRFP is set to Yes, the RF
operator will be required to enter a reason code
1 Enter your receipt in RFCH in the normal manner.
RFCH screen showing system-assigned location
2 Key in your new location and press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 155

INBOUND PROCESSING
If supervisor authorization is If supervisor authorization is

activated: NOT activated:
The following screen will appear: The following screen will appear:
a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter
to proceed with the location over- to proceed with the location over-
ride. If you do not wish to pro- ride. If you do not wish to pro-
ceed with the override, key in N ceed with the override, key in N
for No and press Enter to return for No and press Enter to return
to the main RFCH screen. to the main RFCH screen.
b) Have a supervisor log in to

approve the location override.
4 Proceed to process the receipt normally in RFCH.
ENTERING TRAILER AND PALLET INFORMATION

If trailer and pallet information entry is activated in MRFP (RFCH Only tab) by setting the Show Temperature
and Pallet Blocks flag to the appropriate option, you will be prompted to enter trailer and pallet information for
the receipt. If the Perform Trailer Checks flag in MRFP is set to Yes, you will be prompted to perform a series
of trailer checks.
Any trailer and temperature information that you enter in RFCH for a given receipt can be viewed in the
Carrier Details Block of ENRE and LORE. Likewise, any pallet information that you enter in RFCH can be
viewed in Pallet Details Block of ENRE and LORE.
1 When you finish processing all UI’s or receipt lines, the following screen will appear:
156 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen showing prompt for temperature
If you wish to record the If you do NOT wish to record the

temperatures and trailer number temperature and trailer number
for the load: for the load:
a) Key in the required number of a) Press F4 to exit.

temperatures for your trailer and b) Proceed to step 15. You will not
press Enter. You can skip a par- be prompted to enter pallet infor-
ticular temperature by pressing mation.
Enter with the field blank.
b) If required, key in your trailer
number and press Enter. If you
do not wish to enter a trailer
number, press Enter to exit the
Temperature/Trailer prompt.
c) If required, key in your seal num-
ber and press Enter.
3 If the trailer checks entry is activated in MRFP, you will be prompted to perform a series of trailer checks.
RFCH screen showing trailer check
4 Proceed to respond with either a Yes or a No to each trailer check.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 157

INBOUND PROCESSING
5 If the Pallet Block appears, do one of the following:
If you wish to record pallet If you do NOT wish to record

information for the load: pallet information for the load:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Press F4 the required number of

times to exit the Pallet Block.
b) When the temperature and trailer
number prompts redisplay, press
F4 to exit. Then proceed to step
15.
RFCH screen showing the Pallet Block
6 Key in your account code and press Enter or use your pick list to select it. To select a code using the pick
list, press F10 to display the pick list and use your up and down arrow keys to select the appropriate
code. Then press Enter to make your selection. The account is the party (customer, shipper or carrier)
that you are receiving pallets from or shipping pallets to.
7 In the Type field, key in the appropriate value for your pallet transaction (R for Received, S for Shipped or
E for Exchanged) and press Enter.
Received Received means that you are receiving pallets from the
account that you specified in the previous field.
Shipped Shipped means that you are shipping pallets to the

Exchanged Exchanged means that you are performing an even

exchange of pallets; for example, you receive 10 pal-
lets from a given account and you give this account 10
of your own pallets so that there is no change to your
pallet balances.
8 Key in your pallet code and press Enter or use your pick list to select it.
9 Key in the number of pallets that you are shipping or receiving and press Enter.
158 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen showing prompt for reference information
10 If required, key in a remark for the pallet transaction in the Reference field and press Enter. If you do not
require a remark, press Enter to bypass this field.
11 If required, repeat the above steps to add additional lines in the Pallet Block.
12 When you finish adding your lines, press F4 to exit Create Mode. AccellosOne 3PL will display the last
pallet details record that you entered. If you have multiple pallet transactions for this receipt, you can use
your up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of records.
If you wish to delete a pallet transaction, select the transaction that you wish to delete with your arrow
keys. Then press Enter until your cursor is positioned in the NUM PALL field and press F2 (DE).
13 Press F4 again to exit the Pallet Block.
AccellosOne 3PL will redisplay the prompt for the temperature and trailer number.
14 Press F4 to exit this screen.
RFCH screen showing message that receipt has been processed
15 Press Enter to close the “Process Complete” message. If prompted to mark the receipt as completed or
to create a new line, key in Y for Yes to complete the receipt and press Enter.
16 Press F4 to exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 159

INBOUND PROCESSING
PERFORMING QUERIES
The query function in RFCH allows you to query by receipt number, receipt line number, customer, inventory
level, warehouse, hold code and shipper. In order to query a receipt in RFCH, the receipt must be at the flow
DRDO (Driver Arrived at Door) without being fully staged or put-away.
You can customize the values that appear in the query results screen by setting the appropriate flags in
MRFP (RF Profile Code) to Yes. For example, if you wish to see the customer code and level 1 value only in
the query results, you would set the Show Customer Code in RFCH Query and Show Inventory Level 1 in
RFCH Query fields to Yes.
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Press F2 (QS).
RFCH screen showing Enter Criteria screen
RFCH screen showing six records in pick list
4 Use your arrow keys to scroll through the list of records retrieved. If you wish to jump forward by ten
records, press F1 (JF). If you wish to jump backwards by ten records, press F2 (JB).
5 When you find the line that you wish to select, press F3 to select it.
6 Continue to process the receipt normally.
160 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
ENTERING PARTIAL U-TYPE RECEIPT LINES

You can enter partial U-type receipt lines in RFCH by entering the partial quantity (for example, 10 cases) and
then keying in N for No when prompted to complete the process. You use partial receipt lines when product
on a trailer is dispersed and you are not sure whether you have processed all product belonging to a
particular inventory entity. You also use partial receipt lines when you wish to place part of a receipt on hold;
for example, you receive a pallet of 100 cases and 20 cases are damaged.
When you enter partial receipt lines in RFCH, two lines are created in ENRE/LORE. The first line shows the
number of units actually received and the second line shows the remaining number of units. For example, if
your expected quantity is 100 and your received quantity is 10, the following receipt lines will be created:
 line 1: expected qty = 100, received qty = 10
 line 2: expected qty = 0, received qty = 90
If you receive additional units of the same product, line 2 will show the new quantity received and line 3 will
show the new remaining number of units.
EXAMPLE
1) You received 10 units out of an expected quantity of 100.
Expected Received Location
line 1 100 10 STAG
line 2 0 90
2) You receive 20 more units of the same product.
line 1 100 10 STAG
line 2 0 20 STAG
line 3 0 70
3) You receive 50 more units.
line 1 100 10 STAG
line 2 0 20 STAG
line 3 0 50 STAG
line 4 0 20
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 161

INBOUND PROCESSING
4) You receive the final 20 units.
line 1 100 10 STAG
line 2 0 20 STAG
line 3 0 50 STAG
line 4 0 20 STAG
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Retrieve the inventory entity that you wish to process.
3 If required, change your mode to either put-away or unload.
4 Key in your partial quantity and press Enter.
5 If required, place the product on hold.
6 Assign the product a location.
7 Press F4 to close the receipt.
8 When the Process Complete? message appears, key in Y for Yes and press Enter.
9 Exit RFCH.
PRINTING LABELS
Printing labels requires a document set up by Accellos in DOCU (Documents).
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Press F1 (PL).
RFCH screen showing Print Label Block

4 Enter or scan in your level 1 value.
5 If required, enter or scan in your level 2, level 3 and level 4 values.
162 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen prompt for quantity
6 Key in the number of labels that you wish to print for this inventory entity and press Enter.
7 Key in your printer code and press Enter.
8 Repeat the above steps for each additional label that you wish to print or press F4 the required number of
times to exit.
UNDERSTANDING VARIANCES IN RFCH

A variance occurs when the quantity actually received does not match the quantity on the receipt. There are
two ways of calculating variances depending on the type of line:
 If all inventory levels are entered during receipt entry (that is, a P-type line), variances are calculated at
the line level (that is, the lowest inventory level).
 If not all inventory levels are entered during receipt entry (that is, a U-type line), variances are calculated
at the next highest level that is known. For example, if levels 1 and 2 are known and level 3 is unknown,
the variance will be calculated for inventory level 2. If, however, level 1 is known and levels 2 and 3 are
unknown, the variance will be calculated for inventory level 1.
For example, suppose you received the following product on the same receipt and level three (pallet ID) is
system-generated:
LINE 1 LINE 2
Item = A1 Item = A1
Lot = 101 Lot = 101
Pallet ID = 001 Pallet ID = 002
Quantity = 100 Quantity = 50
If you enter a quantity of 85 for line 1 and a quantity of 65 for line 2, no variance will occur in RFCH because
the total (85 + 65 = 150) equals the total in ENRE for item A1, lot 101.
If you enter a quantity of 120 for line 1 and a quantity of 45 for line 2, a variance will occur in RFCH because
the total (120 + 45 = 165) does not equal 150. If you accept the variance of 15 units, the extra 15 units will be
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 163

INBOUND PROCESSING
applied to line 1; you cannot split an overage or adjustment between two pallet ID’s belonging to the same lot
number.
NOTE All variances in RFCH are shown in the lowest SKU. For example, if your
item is a pallet/case/each item, any variances will be shown in eaches — not pallets
or cases.
PROCESSING VARIANCES
If the RFCH/RFPU Quantity Must Match ENRE Quantity flag in MRFP is set to “Must Match ENRE”, you
cannot enter variances in RFCH. When the quantity received does not match the quantity on the receipt, the
following message will appear and you must either enter the correct quantity or exit the receipt line.
RFCH screen showing “Qty entered does not match expected qty” message
If the RFCH/RFPU Quantity Must Match ENRE Quantity flag in MRFP is set to “Matching not required”, you
can enter variances in RFCH. Variance processing in RFCH is dependent on whether or not the operator has
supervisory privileges.
Operator is NOT a Supervisor Operator is a Supervisor
variance is a shortage “Receipt not completed yet” message “Complete Process” message appears and
appears when you exit the receipt and supervisor is prompted to zero out the lines.
AccellosOne 3PL creates a second line in If the supervisor selects Yes, Variance
ENRE for the missing product. Operator screen appears and supervisor is prompted
can return to the receipt at any time to enter to accept the shortage. No second line is
the missing product or office staff can created in ENRE for the missing product.
delete the second line.
variance is an overage If you enter all your inventory levels manu- Same as operator or non-supervisor.
ally, Variance screen appears when you
enter your quantity. If you do not enter all
your inventory levels manually (that is, a U-
type lines), Variance screen appears when
you exit the receipt. In the Variance screen,
operator is prompted to accept the overage.
In ENRE, received quantity is greater than
expected quantity.
1 Make sure that the RFCH/RFPU Quantity Must Match ENRE Quantity flag in MRFP is set to “Matching
not required”.
164 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
2 Enter RFCH.
3 Enter or scan in your UI value or enter your receipt number and all known inventory levels of the product
that you are receiving.
4 Key in your tie, hi and loose values. If you do not wish to record these values, leave the tie field blank and
press Enter to bypass these fields.
5 Key in your quantity and press Enter. If the quantity is already displayed, press Enter to accept it or key in
a new quantity and press Enter.
If the variance is a shortage: If the variance is an overage:
a) Proceed to next step. a) The following screen will appear:
RFCH screen showing Variance

screen
b) Key in Y for Yes to accept the

variance or key in N for No to re-
enter a new received quantity.
7 Proceed to enter your hold code (if any) and location information for the receipt and then perform the
remaining steps in RFCH normally.
8 When you finish processing all your receipt lines, press F4 to switch to main mode.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 165

INBOUND PROCESSING
If you do NOT have supervisor

If you have supervisor privileges: privileges:
a) Press Enter to acknowledge the

incomplete receipt messsage.
a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter

to zero out all lines.
b) When prompted to confirm the
zero out, key Y for Yes and press
Enter.
c) If the variance is a shortage, the
following screen will appear.
d) Press F3 (ZO) to accept the

shortage.
e) Press Enter to continue.
ENTERING PROCESS VALUES

If the capture of process values is activated for the product that you are receiving, you will be prompted to
enter process values under the following conditions:
166 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
 there are no process values for the receipt line that you are processing
 there are missing process values for the receipt line that you are processing
 the quantity received in RFCH does not match the quantity recorded in ENRE (any existing process val-
ues will be erased and new values must be entered)
If you are unable to scan in each case ID on the pallet for any reason, AccellosOne 3PL will present you with
the following options:
1 (Continue) Continue to scan the remaining cases on the pallet.
2 (Start Over) Rescan all cases starting from the beginning.
3 (Exit, Short) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will

remove unscanned quantities from the receive quan-
tity. You cannot process the receipt line again in RFCH.
4 (Exit, Save) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save
the process values of any cases already scanned. You
cannot process the receipt line again in RFCH.
5 (Exit, No Save) Cease scanning and exit without saving any process
values including those already scanned. You cannot
process the receipt line again in RFCH.
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Enter or scan in your UI value or enter your receipt number and all inventory levels of the product that
you are receiving.
RFCH screen showing prompt for process value
5 Key in your first value and press Enter or scan it in using your RF gun.
6 If you are capturing multiple process values, repeat the above step for each additional process value.
7 If you wish to interrupt your scanning for any reason, press F4.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 167

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen showing incomplete scan message
If you wish to continue from Key in 1 and press Enter.

where you left off:
If you wish to rescan all cases: Key in 2 and press Enter.
If you wish to exit and short the Key in 3 and press Enter.
received quantity: When prompted to short the receipt line, key in Y for
Yes and press Enter.
If you wish to exit and save the Key in 4 and press Enter.
scanned process values: Press Enter to acknowledge the “Process Complete”
message.
If you wish to exit without sav- Key in 5 and press Enter.

ing the scanned process val- Press Enter to acknowledge the “Process Complete”
ues: message.
VALIDATING PROCESS VALUES

If you set the Validate One Process Value flag to Y for Yes, you will be prompted to validate the serial number
and other information such as level 1 and 2 values in bar code labels. You validate process values by
scanning in one label from each pallet; if the label is not valid, you will not be allowed to complete the receipt
in RFCH.
Validation will only occur for P-type receipt lines when the full quantity is received and all process values have
been entered or scanned in.
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Enter or scan in your UI value or enter your receipt number and all inventory levels of the product that
you are receiving.
168 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFCH screen showing prompt to scan any case
5 Scan in any case on the pallet.

6 Continue to process the receipt line normally in RFCH.
CREATING A NEW LINE

If the product that you are receiving is not on the original receipt, you can create a new line for the product in
RFCH. When you create a new line in RFCH, AccellosOne 3PL creates a new line for the receipt in ENRE in
which the expected quantity and received quantity equal the quantity that you entered in RFCH. If an
inventory level is system-generated, AccellosOne 3PL will generate the appropriate value for that inventory
level.
Creating a new line is only allowed if the Allow New Lines flag in MRFP is set to Yes for the customer whose
product you are receiving.
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Press Enter to bypass the UI field.
4 Key in your level 1 value for the item that you wish to receive and press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 169

INBOUND PROCESSING
If you enter all inventory levels If your lowest inventory level is

during receipt entry: system generated:
a) Key in all inventory levels for the a) Key in all inventory levels for the
item. item except the last level. For
example, if you are receiving a
three-level item, you would enter
the second inventory level but
not the third. If you are receiving
a four-level item, you would enter
the second and third inventory
levels but not the fourth.
6 With your cursor positioned in the field for your lowest inventory level, press F1 (CL). AccellosOne 3PL
will display the following message.
RFCH screen showing prompt to create a new line
If you do NOT wish to create a

If you wish to create a new line: new line:
a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter. a) Key in N for No and press Enter.
b) Key in your quantity and press b) Re-enter the inventory level that
Enter. triggered the “Create a New
Line?” prompt.
8 Proceed to enter the receipt normally.
RECEIVING PRODUCT UNDER AN ALTERNATE ITEM CODE

An alternate item code is a second or alternate name for an item. For example, you receive product under the
code ABC and then you store it and ship it in AccellosOne 3PL under the code 001.
Alternate item codes must be set up in ALIT (Alternate Item and Language). Refer to the Setup Guide for
further instructions on setting up ALIT.
170 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
ALIT screen showing ALT_ITEM as an alternate item code for item D1
1 Make sure that your receipt is at the flow DRDO (Driver Arrived at Door).
2 Enter RFCH.
RFCH screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 171

INBOUND PROCESSING
If you are processing a P-type If you are processing a U-type

If you are receiving an item line containing an item with line containing an item with
with a single inventory level: multiple inventory levels: multiple inventory levels:
a) Enter or scan in your alternate a) Enter or scan in your UI value. a) Press Enter to bypass the UI
item code in the UI field. The The system will retrieve the field.
system will convert the alter- receipt number and three b) Key in your receipt number
nate item code to the regular inventory levels for that UI and press Enter.
AccellosOne 3PL item code. value. The alternate item code c) Enter or scan in your alternate
will be converted to the regular item code. The system will
AccellosOne 3PL item code. convert the alternate item
code to the regular Accel-
losOne 3PL item code.
d) Enter or scan in your remain-
ing inventory levels.
RFCH screen showing prompt for tie and hi
4 Proceed to process your receipt in the normal manner.
RECEIVING PRODUCT ON AUTOMATIC HOLD

If you are receiving product on automatic hold, you can override or remove the automatic hold if the Allow
Override of Hold Code During Core RF Receiving field in IHOP (Item Hold Profile) is set to Yes. If you set this
flag to No, you will not be able to override or remove automatic holds. The profile that you set up in IHOP
must be attached to the appropriate item in ITEM.
172 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
IHOP screen showing Allow Override of Hold Code During Core RF Receiving field set to Y for Yes
RECEIVING PRODUCT WITH A VARIABLE PRODUCT BREAKDOWN

If you are receiving product with a variable quantity breakdown in RFCH, you must enter your quantity in the
lowest SKU.
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Press Enter to bypass the UI (Unique Identifier) field.
4 Enter or scan your level 1 value for the first product that you wish to receive.
5 Enter or scan in your level 2 value. If required, enter or scan in your level 3 and level 4 values.
6 Depending on your system setup, RFCH will be preset to either put-away mode or unload mode. If
required, you can press F3 (CM) to toggle between the two modes.
Once you process a receipt line, the mode is set for all remaining lines on the receipt and cannot be
altered until you start a new receipt.
7 Key in your tie, hi and loose values. If you do not wish to record these values, press Enter three times to
bypass these fields.
8 Key in your quantity in the lowest SKU and press Enter.
9 Continue to process the receipt normally in RFCH.
RECEIVING MIXED PRODUCT

You can receive mixed product on a single pallet without the need to scan in each unique inventory entity. For
example, you have two receipt lines in ENRE with the same level 1 and 3 values (item code and pallet ID), but
different level 2 values (date code). When you scan in the level 3 value in RFCH, you will be prompted to
choose between full pallet receiving (process the pallet once as if the product was not mixed) or regular
receiving (process each receipt line separately).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 173

INBOUND PROCESSING
Receiving mixed product on a single pallet requires that the Receipt Reference Number field in ENRE be
populated with the level 3 or 4 value that you scan in RFCH.
1 Enter RFCH.
2 Enter or scan in your UI value or enter your receipt number and all known inventory levels of the product
that you are receiving.
RFCH screen showing three inventory entities on the same pallet
3 Press F3 (Sl) to select the first line.
RFCH screen showing mixed pallet message
If you wish to perform full pallet If you wish to perform regular

receiving: receiving:
b) Proceed to enter the quantity b) Proceed to enter the quantity
and location for the full pallet. and location for the first inventory
c) If prompted to do so, enter your entity on the pallet.
trailer and pallet information in c) Repeat the previous step for
the normal manner. each additional inventory entity
on the pallet.
d) If prompted to do so, enter your
trailer and pallet information in
the normal manner.
174 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
LOOKING UP TEMPERATURE AND TRAILER INFORMATION IN LORE

If you entered a temperature and trailer number in RFCH, you can look up this information in the Carrier Block
of LORE.
1 Enter LORE.
2 Retrieve the receipt whose temperature and trailer information you wish to look up.
LORE screen showing receipt number 4
3 Make sure that the value in the Carrier Details field is E for Entered.
4 Press Enter to position your cursor in the Carrier Details field.
5 Click on Carrier Details.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 175

INBOUND PROCESSING
Carrier Details block of LORE showing trailer number and temperature
6 Click on Return to exit the Carrier Details Block. Then click on Exit to exit.
LOOKING UP REMARKS AND MESSAGES IN RFCH

There are four types of remarks/messages in RFCH:
 receipt header remarks prefixed by the number 0
 receipt line remarks prefixed by the line number (for example, 1, 2, 3)
 item messages set up in ITEM
 depositor print messages set up in DPME
When you enter the receipt header in RFCH, all remarks/message are displayed in the following order:
 receipt header remarks
 line remarks
1 Enter RFCH and retrieve the receipt whose remarks/messages you wish to look up. The remark/mes-
sage will display automatically when you retrieve the receipt.
176 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
Entering Temperature and Trailer Information in RFTT
RFCH screen showing header and line remarks
2 If the remarks are more than six lines long, use your up and down arrow keys to scroll through the remark
lines.
3 If there are multiple remarks/messages attached to the receipt, press Enter or F4 to jump to the next
message.
This program allows you to enter temperature, trailer/seal number and pallet information for a given receipt or
order without working in RFCH or RFPIC. The information that you can enter in RFTT — temperature only,
trailer/seal number only, temperature and trailer/seal number, etc. — depends on which option you choose in
the Show Temperature and Pallet Blocks field in MRFP.
1 Enter RFTT.
RFTT screen

3 Enter your temperature, trailer/seal number and pallet information in the usual manner.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 177

INBOUND PROCESSING
Putting Away Product in RFPU
You put away your product in RFPU. RFPU can only be used after unloading the product in RFCH. If you wish
to put-away product without unloading it, you must perform one-step put-away in RFCH.
When putting away product, you can enter the exact quantity (that is, the expected quantity equals the
received quantity), an overage or a shortage and, if required, you can place product on a manual hold. You
can also split a line; that is, if your receipt line has 50 units, you can put-away 30 units today in one location
and put-away the remaining 20 units at a later time in the same location or in another location.
There are four different hold options in RFPU:
If you enter a shortage … You can place a manual hold on the difference between the
expected quantity and the received quantity. For example, if the
quantity staged in RFCH is 100 units and you enter 80 for the same
receipt line in RFPU, AccellosOne 3PL will place 20 units on the
hold that you specify.
If the entire receipt line is damaged or You can place an entire receipt line on a manual hold.
requires special processing …
If you enter a shortage and the non-short- You can place two manual holds on the same receipt line: one hold
age part of the receipt line is damaged or for the variance quantity and a second hold for the non-variance
requires special processing … quantity.
If automatic holds are activated for the If manual overriding of holds is activated in IHOP, you can manually
product … override or remove the hold code. If manual overriding of holds is
NOT activated in IHOP, you cannot override or remove the hold
code.
If directed put-away is activated on your system, the system-assigned warehouse and location will be
displayed. You can accept the system-assigned warehouse and location or you can enter a new warehouse
and location. If directed put-away is not activated on your system, you must enter your put-away location and
warehouse manually. You can eliminate the need to enter a warehouse in RFPU by defining a default
warehouse in the header block ENRE (for a given receipt) or in CUST (for all receipts from a given customer).
If automatic confirmation is activated, RFPU advances the receipt’s flow to CORE. Therefore, you cannot
work on or make adjustments to the receipt after processing it in RFPU.
R EQU IR E M E N T S
FLOWS See “Unloading Product in RFCH” on page 140 for further information.
LINE TYPES RFPU requires P-type lines unless U-type lines have been received with a quan-
tity of zero.
178 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
DOCUMENTS The Print Document Without Assigning Locations flag in DOCU (Documents)
must be set to Yes for all receipt-related documents such as the tally.
OTHER The product must have been placed in a staging location in RFCH.
FUNCTION KEYS
Main Mode
Results Mode
F1 RM (Remark) Show remark(s) entered in ENRE.
1 Make sure that your receipt in ENRE is at one of the following flows: DRDO (Driver at Door), STUN (Start
Unloading), INST (Inbound Staged) or STPU (Start Put-Away).
2 Enter RFPU.
RFPU screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 179

INBOUND PROCESSING
If you know the UI value of the If you do NOT know the UI value
product that you are putting of the product that you are
away: putting away:
a) Enter or scan in your UI value. a) Press Enter to bypass the UI

You can also select your UI value field.
using the pick list function. If b) Key in your receipt number and
there are multiple receipts press Enter.
attached to the same UI, receipts c) Key in your level 1 value for the
will display in location order not first product that you wish to
receipt number order. receive and press Enter.
d) Key in your level 2 value and
press Enter.
e) Key in your level 3 value and
press Enter.
f) If required, key in your level 4
value and press Enter.
RFPU screen showing receipt 5
4 If F1 (Rm) is available, the receipt has remarks. You can press F1 to view the remarks and then press F4
to exit the Remarks Block.
5 Key in the quantity that you are receiving and press Enter. You can enter your quantity in pallets, eaches
or any other SKU type that is activated in the item’s quantity breakdown. If your default SKU type is
eaches and you wish to enter a quantity of 10 pallets, you would key in 10P for 10 pallets.
If the quantity matches the If the quantity does NOT match

quantity of the receipt line in the quantity of the receipt line in
RFCH: RFCH:
a) Proceed to step 9. The message “This receipt line has a vari-

ance. Accept? (Y/N/H/V)” will appear.
a) Proceed to next step.
180 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFPU screen showing variance options
 Key in Y for Yes and press Enter.

If the variance is a shortage
and you wish to ignore it for
AccellosOne 3PL will create a new receipt line for the
now because you expect to
difference.
receive more product:
 Key in N for No and press Enter.

If you wish to reject the vari-
 Re-enter your quantity.
ance and re-enter the quantity:
 Key in the H for Hold and press Enter.

If the variance is a shortage
 Key in your hold code and press Enter.
and you wish to place the vari-
ance quantity on hold:
AccellosOne 3PL will place the variance quantity on
the hold type that you specify.
 Key in V for Variance and press Enter.

If you wish to accept the vari-
ance:
AccellosOne 3PL will short the line without creating a
new receipt line.
current staging loca-

tion for product
RFPU screen showing prompt for hold code
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 181

INBOUND PROCESSING
If there is an automatic hold If there is an automatic hold

placed on the item and manual placed on the item and manual
If there is no automatic hold overriding of holds is overriding of holds is NOT
placed on the item: activated: activated:
a) If you wish to place the prod- a) If required, you can manually a) The cursor will skip past the
uct on manual hold, press F9 override or remove the hold Hold field and you will not be
to position your cursor in the code. Make any necessary able to override or remove the
Hold field. Then key in your changes and press Enter or hold code.
manual hold code and press press Enter without making
Enter. any changes to accept the
 The hold that you enter in this field automatic hold.
applies to the entire receipt line — if
you did not record a variance in the
Quantity field — or the difference
between the variance and the
expected quantity — if you did record
a variance in the Quantity field.
182 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
If directed put-away is activated If directed put-away is NOT

on your system: activated on your system:
AccellosOne 3PL will display the a) Key in your location and press
system-assigned warehouse and Enter.
location. You can accept the sys- b) If required, key in your ware-
tem-assigned warehouse and loca- house and press Enter. You will
tion or you can enter a different not need to enter a warehouse if
warehouse and location. you defined a default warehouse
in either ENRE or CUST.
If you wish to override the system-
assigned location, see “Overriding
the System-Assigned Location” on
page 184.
F = from location
S = system location
T = to location
RFPU screen showing system-

assigned warehouse and location
a) Press Enter to accept the sys-

tem-assigned location or press
F3 (NX) to display a second sug-
gested put-away location. If the
second suggested put-away
location is not acceptable, press
F3 (NX) again to see a third sug-
gested put-away location.
10 Repeat the above steps for the each additional receipt line that you wish to put away.
11 When all your lines have been put-away, the following message will appear:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 183

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFPU screen showing the “Receipt Put-Away” message
12 Press Enter to accept the message then process another receipt or press F4 to exit.
OVERRIDING THE SYSTEM-ASSIGNED LOCATION

There are three options for overriding the system-assigned location for a receipt line depending on your setup
in MRFP (RF Profile):
 if the Supvr. Must Authorize Location Overrides in RFCH/RFPU/RFRL flag in MRFP is set to No, an
operator can change a location without authorization of a supervisor
 if the Supvr. Must Authorize Location Overrides in RFCH/RFPU/RFRL flag in MRFP is set to Yes,
changing a location must be approved by a supervisor
 if the Reason Code Required to Override System-Assigned Location flag in MRFP is set to Yes, the RF
operator will be required to enter a reason code
1 Enter your receipt in RFPU in the normal manner.
RFPU screen showing system-assigned location
2 Key in your new location and press Enter.
184 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
If supervisor authorization is If supervisor authorization is

activated: NOT activated:
a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter
to proceed with the location over- to proceed with the location over-
ride. If you do not wish to pro- ride. If you do not wish to pro-
ceed with the override, key in N ceed with the override, key in N
for No and press Enter to return for No and press Enter to return
to the main RFPU screen. to the main RFPU screen.
b) Have a supervisor log in to

4 Proceed to process the receipt normally in RFPU.
ENTERING VARIANCES
If the RFCH/RFPU Quantity Must Match ENRE Quantity flag in MRFP is set to “Must match ENRE”, you
cannot enter variances in RFPU. When the quantity received does not match the quantity on the receipt, the
following message will appear and you must either enter the correct quantity or exit the receipt line.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 185

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFPU screen showing “Qty entered does not match expected qty” message
If the RFCH/RFPU Quantity Must Match ENRE Quantity flag in MRFP is set to “Matching not required”, you
have four options:
 you can ignore the variance for now because you expect to receive more product
 you can reject the variance and re-enter the quantity
 you can place the variance quantity on hold
 you can accept the variance
If you accept the variance, AccellosOne 3PL will create one line in the Location Block of ENRE for the flow
CORE (Confirm Receipt) showing the actual quantity received. If you place the variance quantity on hold,
AccellosOne 3PL will create two lines in the Location Block of ENRE for the flow CORE (Confirm Receipt):
one line showing the actual quantity received with no hold code and a second line showing the variance
quantity with the hold code that you specified in RFPU.
LORE screen showing 80 cases with no hold in location A101 and 20 cases on damaged hold in the
same location
186 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
PUTTING AWAY PRODUCT UNDER AN ALTERNATE ITEM CODE

See “Receiving Product Under an Alternate Item Code” on page 170 for further information on setting up
alternate item codes.
1 Make sure that your receipt in ENRE is at one of the following flows: STUN (Start Unloading), INST
(Inbound Staged) or STPU (Start Put-Away).
2 Enter RFPU.
RFPU screen
If you are receiving an item If you are receiving an item

with multiple inventory levels with multiple inventory levels
and you know the UI value of and you do NOT know the UI
If you are receiving an item the product that you are value of the product that you
with a single inventory level: putting away: are putting away:
a) Enter or scan in your alternate a) Enter or scan in your UI value. a) Press Enter to bypass the UI
item code in the UI field. The The system will retrieve the field.
system will convert the alter- receipt number and three b) Key in your receipt number
nate item code to the regular inventory levels for that UI and press Enter.
AccellosOne 3PL item code. value. The alternate item code c) Enter or scan in your alternate
will be converted to the regular item code. The system will
AccellosOne 3PL item code. convert the alternate item
code to the regular Accel-
losOne 3PL item code.
d) Enter or scan in your remain-
ing inventory levels.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 187

INBOUND PROCESSING
Entering Process Values in RFIPS
RFPU screen showing prompt for quantity
4 Proceed to process your receipt in the normal manner.
PUTTING AWAY IN A PICK LINE LOCATION

If you wish to put-away product in a pick line location, you must set the Validation Rules for Put-Away to Pick
Line flag in MRFP to either 2 (Allow operator to proceed) or 3 (Omit validation of location).
RFIPS is a stand-alone version of the process value module in RFCH. It allows you to scan in process values
without assigning the product to a final put-away location.
LOCATION STA- If there is an MRFP profile attached to the customer in CUST, the receipt line
TUS must be assigned a location. If there is no MRFP profile attached to the customer
in CUST, a location for the receipt line is not required.
CATCH WEIGHT See “Setting Up Catch Weight Tolerances” on page 259 for further information.
TOLERANCES
1 Enter RFIPS.
188 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFIPS screen
2 Enter your receipt number.

3 Enter or scan in your UI value. If you do not have a UI value, enter all inventory levels.
RFIPS screen
4 Key in your first value and press Enter or scan it in using your RF gun.
5 If you are capturing multiple process values, repeat the above step for each additional process value.
6 If you wish to interrupt your scanning for any reason, press F4.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 189

INBOUND PROCESSING
Deleting a Receipt Line in RFDL
RFIPS screen showing incomplete scan message
If you wish to continue from where you Key in 1 and press Enter.
left off:
received quantity: When prompted to short the receipt line, key in Y for Yes and press
Enter.
If you wish to exit and save the Key in 4 and press Enter.
scanned process values:
If you wish to exit without saving the Key in 5 and press Enter.
scanned process values:
8 Scan in another receipt line or press F4 to exit.
You can delete a receipt line in RFDL if the receipt line has not been confirmed.
1 Enter RFDL.
190 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INBOUND PROCESSING
RFDL
RFDL screen showing prompt for unique UI
3 Key in your UI for the receipt line and press Enter.
RFDL screen showing prompt to continue
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 191

INBOUND PROCESSING
4 Press Enter to continue.
RFCH screen showing prompt to delete receipt line
5 Key in Y for Yes and press Enter.

6 When you finish deleting your receipt line, press F4 to exit.
192 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Overview of Shipping ..................................................................................... 195
Understanding Outbound Flows in RF.......................................................... 196
Understanding Pick Methods......................................................................... 196
Overview of RF Picking Programs ................................................................ 198
Picking Orders in RFPIC................................................................................. 199
Picking Full Pallets from Bulk..................................................................... 204
Picking Cases ............................................................................................ 206
Picking Product With Process Values ........................................................ 211
Picking Partial Quantities of Product With Process Values ....................... 213
Placing Product on Hold ............................................................................ 214
Excluding Orders from Overpicking in EOSU ............................................ 218
Picking Pick Line Product from a Non-Pick Line Location ......................... 219
Performing Replenishments in RFPIC ....................................................... 220
Looking Up Remarks and Messages in RFPIC ......................................... 220
Performing Count Backs in RFPIC ............................................................ 221
Looking Up Inventory Discrepancy Records in ICIN .................................. 223
Looking Up Inventory Discrepancy Records in RFCL................................ 224
Removing Inventory Discrepancy Records from ICIN ............................... 225
Removing Inventory Discrepancy Records in RFCL.................................. 226
Entering Temperature and Trailer Information in RFTT .............................. 226
Looking Up Your OPID’s ................................................................................ 227
Looking Up Your OPID’s in LOCN ............................................................. 227
Looking Up Your OPID’s in RFNCO .......................................................... 228
Looking Up an Order’s OPID’s in LOOR.................................................... 229
Confirming Orders by OPID in RFCO ............................................................ 230
Confirming Individual Order Lines by UI in RFCU ....................................... 232
Reprinting Outbound Labels in RFOLP ........................................................ 233
Picking Cases from a Pick Line in CASE ...................................................... 236
Picking Substitution ....................................................................................... 241
Setting Up Picking Substitution.................................................................. 241
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 193

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Excluding Orders from Picking Substitution in EOSU ................................ 245

Performing Picking Substitution in RFPIC ................................................. 247
Entering Process Values in UOPR ................................................................ 250
Removing Cases That Have Been Scanned ............................................. 254
Removing Cases That Have Not Been Scanned ....................................... 255
Removing Cases From a Fully Scanned Order ......................................... 256
Looking Up Summary Information ............................................................. 258
Transferring Inbound Process Values to Outbound Orders ....................... 258
Setting Up Catch Weight Tolerances ......................................................... 259
Entering Process Values in RFOPS .............................................................. 260
Capturing the Weight Dynamically from a Bar Code ................................. 265
Manually Entering the Weight .................................................................... 270
Removing Labels That Have Been Scanned ............................................. 271
Removing Cases Either Scanned or Unscanned....................................... 273
Removing Cases From a Fully Scanned Order ......................................... 274
Performing an Incomplete Scan................................................................. 276
Transferring Inbound Process Values to Outbound Orders ....................... 277
Picking Waves in RFPK .................................................................................. 278
Relocating Product in RFST........................................................................... 282
Merging OPID’s in RFMG................................................................................ 284
Merging Two Existing OPID’s .................................................................... 285
Creating a New OPID ................................................................................ 286
Assigning Orders to Loads in SELO ............................................................. 290
194 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Overview of Shipping
Overview of Shipping
There are up to nine steps to follow in outbound RF processing:
1 You enter your order in ENOR (Enter, Modify and

ENOR Delete Order).
2 If required, you set up your loads in SELO (Set Up

SELO Load).
3 You allocate your orders either in the Wave

Allocation Manager or in PROR/ASOR.
4 If required, you assign RF operators to order lines

RFOT in RFOT (RF Operator Task Assign).
5 You pick your orders in RFPIC/RFPK/RFPV. If your

RFPIC/
RFPK/RFPV
system is set up for pallet building, you must enter
the pallet ID of your new pallet.
6 You assign buildings and doors to loads in SELO

SELO (Set Up Load).
7 If required, you assign RF operators to orders/loads

RFOT in RFOT (RF Operator Task Assign).
8 You load your orders in OLOP (Outbound Loading

OLOP Process).
9 Depending on the flows in your workflow profile,

CHOF you may have to confirm your orders in CHOF
(Time-Stamp and Confirm Orders).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 195

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Understanding Outbound Flows in RF
Understanding Outbound Flows in RF
In non-RF shipping, you time-stamp and advance the flow of an order in CHOF (Time-Stamp and Confirm
Orders). Advancing the flow of an order in CHOF advances the flow of all order lines and order location lines
on the order. You cannot advance the flow of one order line and leave another order line remain at its original
flow.
In RF shipping, on the other hand, AccellosOne 3PL automatically advances the flow of individual order lines
and order location lines. For example, when you pick an order line in RFPIC, the order line’s flow is automati-
cally advanced from STPI (Start Picking) to FIPI (Finish Picking). Because the flow of individual order lines is
advanced as each order line is picked, not all lines on a given order will be at the same flow. When this
happens, the order header will show the earliest flow on the order.
For example, suppose there are five order lines on a given order: two lines are at the flow STPI, two lines are
at the flow FIPI and one line is at the flow STLO (Start Loading). If you look up the order in LOOR, the order’s
flow will be set to STPI, which is the earliest flow.
CAUTION Using CHOF to confirm orders in an RF environment is not recom-

mended unless all order lines are at the same flow. If line 1 is at the STPI flow and
line 2 is at the FIPI flow, advancing the order header to the STLO flow in CHOF will
also advance line 1 to STLO. At which point, line 1 may no longer be pickable.
Understanding Pick Methods
Pick methods allow you to split order lines into two or more pick method assignments. For example, if your
order line quantity was two pallets and 10 cases, you might want to assign one RF operator with a forklift to
pick the two pallets and another RF operator with a different piece of equipment to pick the 10 cases. Without
pick methods, you would be forced to assign the entire order line quantity to a single RF operator using a
single piece of equipment. This could be an inefficient use of resources.
Pick methods also allow you to define a sequence for your picking; for example, pick cases/eaches first
because it is complex and time-consuming and pick full pallets last because it is simple and straightforward.
Different pick methods can have different label printing requirements; you can attach different customer/
consignee/carrier combinations to a particular pick method/document in CCDU (Customer/Consignee
Document Setup).
Pick methods are assigned to order lines in the Wave Manager based on the order line quantity and your item
setup. For example, if your order line quantity is one pallet, the pick method will be set to PALL.
196 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Understanding Pick Methods
AccellosOne 3PL supports the following pick methods:
N AM E CODE D E S CR I P T I O N
CASE A normal case pick in RFPIC. The Pick Method field in LOOR for this pick
method is left blank to indicate that it is the system default.
Batch Label Pick BATP A batch pick across multiple orders when two or more orders in the wave are
being picked up by the same carrier and the carrier type = UPS, DHL or
FEDEX.
Each Pick EACH A Pick & Pack by each (the smallest SKU in an item’s quantity breakdown).
Label Pick LABP An individual order pick when a single order is being picked up by a given car-
rier.
Non-RF Packing Station PKST Manual packing performed in EPSD (Enter Packing Details).
Packed via Packing Sta- PACK First level cartonization performed in RFSC (RF Sort to Carton) or RFPK (RF
tion Wave Pick).
Pallet Pick PALL A full pallet pick. The order quantity of each order line must equal a full pallet
quantity.
RF Merge RFMG A merge of two or more OPID’s in RFMG.
System-Driven Cartoni- CART A Pick & Pack by each used in system-driven cartonization.
zation Each Pick
You can look up an order line’s pick method in LOOR.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 197

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Overview of RF Picking Programs
Order line assigned CART pick method
Overview of RF Picking Programs
There are four possible RF picking programs in AccellosOne 3PL: RFPIC, RFPK, RFPV and RFINVT.
RFPIC (RF PICK)

This program is AccellosOne 3PL’s most basic picking program. it is a system-assisted environment in which
the RF operator can select individual order lines to work on and enjoys considerable latitude in determining
the sequence of picks.
 Orders can be allocated through either Wave Manager or ASOR/PROR.
 Picking is based on orders and order lines only; there is no support for task profiles and any order
assignments must be created manually in RFOT.
 Pallet building is performed manually by the RF operator.
 Any pick methods assigned to the order by the Wave Manager are ignored.
 Consolidated pick using wave number is supported but you cannot restrict by warehouse zone.
RFPK (RF WAVE PICK)

This program is AccellosOne 3PL’s most advanced picking program. Many of the task that are performed
manually by the RF operator in RFPIC are automated in RFPK.
 Only orders that have been waved in the Wave Manager can be picked.
198 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Picking Orders in RFPIC
 Pick method assignment is performed by Wave Manager during allocation.

 System-driven cartonization is supported.
RFPV (RF PICKING VOICE)

This program is the RF equivalent of voice-activated picking. It allows you to pick certain orders or products
using a standard RF gun rather than your voice-activated equipment.
 RF operator must be set up in RFOP and REGI must be configured.
 Pallet build assignment is performed dynamically in real time rather than through the Wave Manger.
RFINVT (RF INTERLEAVING)

This program supports task interleaving.
 RF operator must be set up in RFOP and REGI must be configured.
 Pallet build assignment is performed by Wave Manager during allocation.
RFPIC is AccellosOne 3PL’s most basic picking program. You can pick product by zone or by order number.
Orders must be fully allocated before you can pick them in RFPIC. You cannot pick an order if some lines are
allocated (R-type) and other lines are unallocated (P-type).
If you are picking full pallets from bulk, you scan in the original pallet ID of the pallet and use this pallet ID for
the duration of the outbound process. If you are picking cases from either bulk or the pick line, you scan in the
original pallet ID for each case pick. When you finish building your pallet, you have two options for the
outbound pallet containing mixed product:
 if AccellosOne 3PL generates your pallet ID for outbound pallets, you generate your label and then send
it to the appropriate printer
 if you use your own preprinted labels for outbound pallets, you enter or scan in the preprinted pallet ID
When you finish generating or scanning in your pallet ID label, you can look up your pallet ID in the
Processing Block of LOOR for each item on the pallet.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 199

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If the product that you are picking is not in its assigned location, you have two options. If you know where the
product is, you can go to that location and pick it. If you do not know where the product is, you can place the
product on hold to indicate that it could not be picked.
FLOWS ENOR (Enter Order)

SUAL (Supervisor Allocated) — optional
STPI (Start Picking)
FIPI (Finish Picking)
STLO (Start Loading)
FNLO (Finish Loading)
COOR (Confirm Order)
INVENTORY LEV- You can process up to four inventory levels in RFPIC.

ELS
CASE PICKING There are three requirements for case picking:

 you need a pallet ID label defined in DOCU (Documents)
 this label must be attached to the appropriate customers/consignees in CCDU

(Customer / Consignee Document Setup)
 you need an outbound item process code called CP (Case Pick) in IPRO (Item
Processes)
NOTE Your CP code set up in IPRO must NOT be attached to the IPRP profile
attached to ITEM.
If you want AccellosOne 3PL to generate a unique pallet ID for each pallet label,
there are three additional requirements:
 you need to set up a code in NUSE (Number Series)
 you need to attach to your NUSE code to a DIAP (Depositor Inventory Assign
Profile) called QRS
 you need to set the Outbound Pallet ID Label field on the RFPIC (2) tab in
MRFP to either option 2 or option 3
NOTE Your QRS code set up in DIAP must NOT be attached to DILP (Depos-
itor Inventory Level Profile).
200 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
DIAP screen showing sample setup for case pick label
IPRO screen showing setup for CP code
ITEM MESSAGES If you define a message in MESS (Messages) and attach the message to an item
in ITEM, the message will display in a pop-up window when you process an order
line for that item.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 201

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
DEPOSITOR If you wish to display a depositor print message set up in DPME, attach a docu-
PRINT MESSAGES ment code of PICK to your message code in DPME. DPME messages for RFPIC
require specific customer/carrier/consignee combinations; you cannot use the
“.ALL” codes.
NOTE A DPME message for RFPIC does not actually print unless you set up
a real pick document in DOCU and then attach this pick document to an outbound
flow in DIFP.
PROCESS VAL- Only required if you are scanning process values

UES
See “Entering Process Values in RFOPS” on page 260 for further information for
further information.
See “Entering Process Values in RFOPS” on page 260 for further information for
further information.
FILE label
You must define a bar code profile in BAPR and attach to it the scan parameter
code that you set up in SCPR.
PALLET BLOCK If you wish to ship, receive and exchange pallets, you must set the Display Pallet
Screen field in MRFP (RFPIC tab) to the appropriate value: Display Before Pick-
ing or Display on Completion of Picking.
CONSOLIDATED If you consolidate your orders in COPI (Consolidated Pick), you must set the
ORDERS Default Mode in MRFP (RFPIC tab) to Only Pallet Picking.
OTHER Picking locations must be attached to a warehouse zone in WHZO.

You need a hold type code of SUSP (Suspend) in HOLD (Hold Types). The Ship-
pable flag must be set to N for No for this code.
202 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
FUNCTION KEYS
All Modes
F1 FN (Function) Allows you to access RFRL, RFPR, RFIT

and RFLR without leaving RFPIC.
F2 Qu (Query) Displays the first unpicked order line of the

current order being processed.
F2 CP (Case Pick Mode) Allows you to switch to case pick mode.

This command is only available before
selecting an order line.
F3 HD (Hold) Places product on hold.
Pick List of Order Lines
F1 L1 (Level 1) Changes the function key assignments for

F1 and F2. If F1 = L1 (item code), press-
ing F1 will change F1 to L4 (level 4 or low-
est) and F2 to LO (location). These new
function key assignments will allow you to
change the sequence of order lines to
either level 4/lowest inventory level or
location.
F2 L2 (Level 2) Changes the function key assignments for

F1 and F2. If F2 = LO (location), pressing
F2 will change F1 to L1 (level 1) and F2 to
L4 (level 4 or lowest). These new function
key assignments will allow you to change
the sequence of order lines to either level
1 or location.
F3 SL (Select) Selects the order line that the cursor is

positioned over.
F4 CN (Cancel) Exits the pick list without selecting an

order line.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 203

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
PICKING FULL PALLETS FROM BULK
1 Make sure that your order is at the flow SUAL (Supervisor Allocated) or STPI (Start Picking).
2 Enter RFPIC.
RFPIC screen
If you wish to pick by order

If you wish to pick by zone: number:
a) Key in your zone code and press a) Press Enter to bypass the Zone
Enter. field.
b) If required, key in your order b) If required, key in your ware-
number and press Enter. house and press Enter.
c) Key in your order number and
press Enter.
4 If there is a remark attached to the order, press Enter twice to acknowledge it.
If the default mode for RFPIC has If the default mode for RFPIC has
been set to Case: been set to Pallet:
The message “You have selected CP The message “You have selected NM
Mode” will appear. mode” will appear.
a) Key in N for No and press Enter. a) Press Enter to continue.
204 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPIC screen showing pick list of order lines, items and locations to pick
6 The pick list of order lines is initially shown in location code sequence. If you wish to display the list in
Level 1 sequence, press F1 (L1). If you wish to display the list in Level 4 or lowest inventory level
sequence, press F2 (L4). If the list is in Level 4 sequence, you can press F2 again to return to the loca-
tion code sequence.
7 Use your arrow keys to position your cursor over the order line that you wish to pick, then press F3
(Select).
RFPIC screen showing prompt for from location
8 If required, enter or scan in your from location.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 205

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
9 Enter or scan in your UI (Unique Identifier) as follows:
If reserved logic is activated for If reserve logic is NOT activated

this customer: for this customer:
a) If the lowest inventory level is a) All inventory levels for the prod-
represented by a plus sign (+), uct to be picked will be shown.
you can enter any value for that The lot number, pallet ID, etc.
level. If the lot number, pallet ID, that you enter must match the
etc. is represented by an actual values displayed on your screen.
value, you must enter that value; If you attempt to enter different
any other value will be rejected values, they will be rejected by
by the system. the system.
10 Key in your pick quantity and press Enter. If your pick quantity is less than your order quantity, see “Plac-
ing Product on Hold” on page 214 for further instructions.
11 If prompted to do so, enter or scan in your staging location as well as the staging location’s warehouse.
If the order is on a load, the door’s staging location from the load will be shown.
12 When the pick list of unpicked order lines reappears, repeat the above steps for each additional line on
the order.
13 When you finish entering your order lines, the message “ORDER COMPLETED” may appear. If it does,
press Enter to acknowledge it.
14 Process another order or press F4 to exit.
PICKING CASES
When you pick cases, you must print a pallet ID label for each pallet that you build. You can place as many
cases as you want on a pallet, but all cases must belong to the same order; you cannot place product from
different orders on the same pallet.
If you are picking from a pick line, case pick mode is automatically activated in RFPIC unless the Default
Mode field in MRFP set to Only Pallet Picking.
2 Enter RFPIC.
RFPIC screen
206 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING

Enter. field.
b) If required, key in your order b) Key in your warehouse and
number and press Enter. press Enter.
press Enter.
RFPIC screen prompt to continue in case pick mode
The message “You have selected CP The message “You have selected normal
Mode” will appear. mode” will appear.
a) Press Enter to continue. a) Key in N for No and press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 207

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPIC screen showing list of order lines, items and locations to pick
6 The pick list of order lines is initially shown in location code sequence. If you wish to display the list in
Level 1 sequence, press F1 (L1). If you wish to display the list in Level 4 or lowest inventory level
sequence, press F2 (L4). If the list is in Level 4 sequence, you can press F2 again to return to the loca-
tion code sequence.
7 Use your arrow keys to position your cursor over the order line that you wish to pick.
8 Press F3 (Select).
9 Enter or scan in your from location.
208 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
10 Enter or scan in your UI (Unique Identifier) as follows:
If reserved logic is activated for If reserve logic is NOT activated

this customer: for this customer:
a) If the lowest inventory level is a) All inventory levels for the prod-
represented by a plus sign (+), uct to be picked will be shown.
you can enter any value for that The lot number, pallet ID, etc.
level. If the lot number, pallet ID, that you enter must match the
etc. is represented by an actual values displayed on your screen.
value, you must enter that value; If you attempt to enter different
any other value will be rejected values, they will be rejected by
by the system. the system.
11 Key in your pick quantity and press Enter. If your pick quantity is less than your order quantity, see “Plac-
ing Product on Hold” on page 214 for further instructions.
If your order has multiple

If your order has multiple order lines and you wish to
If your order consists of a order lines and you wish to close the pallet and print the
single order line: pick another line: pallet ID label:
AccellosOne 3PL will display the AccellosOne 3PL will display the
list of unpicked order lines. list of unpicked order lines.
a) Select the line that you wish to a) Press F4 to exit the list.
pick and repeat steps 6 to 12 b) Proceed to next step.
for that line.
RFPIC screen showing Print Label (F1) option available
13 Press F1 (Print Label).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 209

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPIC screen showing prompt for label ID
If you use your own labels that

If your labels are generated in are not generated in
AccellosOne 3PL: AccellosOne 3PL: If the Label field is populated:
a) Press Enter to generate your a) Enter or scan in your pallet ID. a) If the PRT (Printer) field is not
pallet ID. b) If required, key in your printer populated, key in your printer
b) If required, key in your printer code and press Enter. code and press Enter.
code and press Enter.
c) If prompted to validate your
pallet ID, enter or scan it in.
RFPIC screen showing prompt for to location
15 Enter or scan in your to location. Your to location must be a staging location. If prompted to do so, enter
your to warehouse.
210 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
PICKING PRODUCT WITH PROCESS VALUES

If you are picking cases from a pallet and if there is a balance remaining on the pallet, AccellosOne 3PL will
prompt you to scan each case ID. If you are unable to scan in each case ID on the pallet for any reason,
AccellosOne 3PL will present you with the following options:
3 (Exit, Short) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save
the process values of any cases already scanned and
remove unscanned quantities from the to ship quantity.
You cannot process the order line again in RFPIC.
4 (Exit, New Line) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save
the process values of any cases already scanned,
remove the unscanned quantities from the to ship
quantity and will create a new line for the balance.
5 (Exit, Cancel Picking) Cease scanning and exit without saving any process
values including those already scanned. The order line
will revert to its original status before being picked in
RFPIC.
6 (Replace DAMG) Remove a damaged case from the order and replace it
with an undamaged case.
7 (Exit Scan, Save) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save
the process values of any cases already scanned.
RFPIC screen showing prompt for catch weight
1 Scan all cases that you are shipping for the pallet. The system will prompt you when you are complete.
2 If you are unable to scan all cases for any reason, press F4 after scanning the last scannable case.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 211

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPIC screen showing “Scan incomplete” message

where you left off:
to ship quantity: When prompted to short the order line, key in Y for Yes
and press Enter.
If you wish to exit, short the to Key in 4 and press Enter.

ship quantity and create a new Press Enter to acknowledge the “Process Complete”
line for the balance: message.

ing the scanned process values When prompted to confirm the cancellation, key in Y
and you wish to restore the for Yes and press Enter.
order line to its original state
before processing in RFPIC:
If you wish to replace a dam- Key in 6 and press Enter.

aged case: Scan in the damaged case.
Scan in the replacement case.
If you have multiple damaged cases to replace, you
must press F4 again and repeat the above steps.

ues: message.
4 Continue to pick the order line normally in RFPIC.
212 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
PICKING PARTIAL QUANTITIES OF PRODUCT WITH PROCESS VALUES

When picking a partial quantity from a full pallet that has not been picked before and is in a single location,
you can scan in the cases to be removed rather than the cases to be picked. A partial quantity is defined as
60% or more of the total quantity in the location. For example, if there are 50 cases in a location and you need
to pick 30, you can scan in the 20 cases to be removed rather than the 30 cases to be picked.
This option is designed to save time by reducing the number of cases scanned. It is only available if the
Number of Days for Label Validation in RF Picking field in MRFP is blank or set to zero.
1 Enter RFPIC.
2 Select the product that you wish to pick from the pick list of order lines.
4 Enter or scan in your UI value.
5 Key in your pick quantity and press Enter.
6 If prompted to do so, enter or scan in your staging location as well as the staging location’s warehouse.
RFPIC screen showing prompt to scan cases to be removed
If you wish to scan the cases to If you wish to scan the order
be removed: quantity:
b) Scan in the cases to be b) Scan in the cases to be picked.
removed.
RFPIC screen showing cases to be removed
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 213

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
8 When all your cases are scanned, process another order line or press F4 to exit.
PLACING PRODUCT ON HOLD

You place product on hold if the product that you wish to pick is damaged or missing. You can place a whole
pallet on hold or you can place one or more individual cases on hold. When you place a hold on individual
cases, the number of units placed on hold depends on whether the account is a regular account or a reserve
logic account.
For regular accounts, the hold applies to the remaining number of units on the order line. For reserve logic
accounts, the hold applies to the remaining number of units in the entire warehouse up to the inventory level
that you are reserving at. For example, if you reserve at level 2 and place a partial hold on pallet ID 123, the
hold will apply to all pallet ID’s in your warehouse for the same level 1 and 2 values.
When you place product on hold, AccellosOne 3PL creates a new line for the missing or damaged product
and then attempts to allocate the line. For example, suppose you have two orders lines, one of which is
missing 10 cases. AccellosOne 3PL will create a third order line for the order with a quantity of 10 cases and
then attempt to allocate this line.
Product placed on hold in RFPIC will be assigned the hold code of SUSP (Suspend) in LOEN (Look Up
Inventory).
MRFP Suspended holds are not available if the Allow Suspended Holds field in MRFP
(RFPIC tab) is set to “Split Order Line, No Suspended Holds”.
Suspended holds may require the approval of a supervisor.
1 Enter RFPIC.
2 Retrieve the order that you wish to process.
3 Use your arrow keys to position your cursor over the order line that you wish to pick and press F3
(Select).
214 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If you wish to place one or If you wish to place one or

If you wish to place the whole more cases on hold (non- more cases on hold (reserve
pallet on hold: reserve logic account): logic account):
a) Press F3 (Hold). a) Enter or scan in your from a) Enter or scan in your from
location. location.
b) Enter or scan in your UI. b) Enter or scan in your UI.
c) Key in the number of units that c) Key in the number of units that
are NOT on hold and press are NOT on hold and press
Enter. Enter.
d) Press F3 (Hold) to place the
remaining units in your ware-
house on hold.
RFPIC screen showing

prompt to place pallet on
hold
b) If you wish to accept the vari-

ance, key in Y for Yes and
RFPIC screen showing e) If you wish to accept the vari-
press Enter. If you do not
an allocated quantity of 5 ance, key in Y for Yes and
accept the variance and wish
cases and a pick quantity press Enter. If you do not
to re-enter the pick quantity, of 3 cases accept the variance and wish
key in N for No and press
to re-enter the pick quantity,
Enter. d) If you wish to accept the vari- key in N for No and press
ance, key in Y for Yes and Enter.
press Enter. If you do not
accept the variance and wish
to re-enter the pick quantity,
key in N for No and press
Enter.
 If you keyed in Y for Yes, Accel-
losOne 3PL will create a new line for
the remaining number of units — that
is, the number of units on hold.
5 If a supervisor is required to approve the hold, the Supervisor Screen will appear.
RFPIC Supervisor screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 215

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
After signing on, the supervisor will be prompted to accept or reject the hold.
RFPIC Supervisor screen showing mismatched quantity
6 If the supervisor approves the hold, enter or scan in your staging location.
7 When the pick list of unpicked order lines appears, do one of the following:
If you placed the entire pallet on If you placed one or more cases
hold in step 4: on hold in step 4:
a) Process the remaining order a) Select the new line created by

lines in the normal manner. AccellosOne 3PL for the remain-
ing number of units.
b) Process this line in the normal
manner.
c) Process the remaining order
lines in the normal manner.
ENTERING PALLET INFORMATION

If the Display Pallet Screen field in MRFP (RFPIC tab) is set to either Display Before Picking or Display on
Completion of Picking, you will be prompted to enter pallet information for the order.
1 Enter RFPIC.
2 Enter your zone and/or warehouse and order number in the usual manner.
RFPIC screen showing Pallet Block
216 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
3 When the Pallet Block appears, do one of the following:
If you wish to record pallet If you do NOT wish to record

information for the order: pallet information for the order:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Press F4 twice to exit the Pallet

Block.
b) Continue to process the order in
the normal manner.
4 Key in your account code and press Enter or use your pick list to select it. To select a code using the pick
list, press F10 to display the pick list and use your up and down arrow keys to select the appropriate
code. Then press Enter to make your selection. The account is the party (customer, shipper or carrier)
that you are receiving pallets from or shipping pallets to.
5 In the Type field, key in the appropriate value for your pallet transaction (R for Received, S for Shipped or
E for Exchanged) and press Enter.
Received Received means that you are receiving pallets from the
Shipped Shipped means that you are shipping pallets to the

Exchanged Exchanged means that you are performing an even

exchange of pallets; for example, you receive 10 pal-
lets from a given account and you give this account 10
of your own pallets so that there is no change to your
pallet balances.
6 Key in your pallet code and press Enter or use your pick list to select it.
7 Key in the number of pallets that you are shipping or receiving and press Enter.
RFPIC screen showing prompt for reference information
8 If required, key in a remark for the pallet transaction in the Reference field and press Enter. If you do not
require a remark, press Enter to bypass this field.
9 If required, repeat the above steps to add additional lines in the Pallet Block.
10 When you finish adding your lines, press F4 to exit Create Mode. AccellosOne 3PL will display the last
pallet details record that you entered. If you have multiple pallet transactions for this order, you can use
your up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of records.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 217

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If you wish to delete a pallet transaction, select the transaction that you wish to delete with your arrow
keys. Then press Enter until your cursor is positioned in the NUM PALL field and press F2 (DE).
11 Press F4 again to exit the Pallet Block.
12 Continue to process your order in the normal manner.
EXCLUDING ORDERS FROM OVERPICKING IN EOSU

If the overpicking of order lines is activated in PIPR for a given customer, item or consignee, you can override
the flag — that is, exclude an individual order from overpicking — in EOSU (Exclude Orders from Substi-
tution/Overpicking). When an order is excluded from overpicking, the to ship quantity cannot exceed the order
quantity.
1 Enter EOSU.
EOSU screen
2 In the Mode field, select Over-Pick from the dropdown list.
3 Key in your search criteria for the orders that you wish to exclude and click on Execute Query to
execute the query.
218 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
EOSU screen showing all open orders for carrier ABC
4 Proceed to select the orders that you wish to exclude from overpicking as follows:
If you wish to: You:
select a single order click in the checkbox beside the

order
select all orders

click on Select All
deselect a single order click in the checkbox beside the

selected order
deselect all orders

click on Deselect All
5 When you finish selecting your orders, click on Enable RF Overpick . The Substitution Flag beside
the selected order(s) will change from N or blank to Y. If you make a mistake and wish to reverse your
action, select the orders that you enabled and click on Disable RF Over-Pick .
6 Click on Exit to exit EOSU.
PICKING PICK LINE PRODUCT FROM A NON-PICK LINE LOCATION

You can allow operators to pick pick line product from a non-pick line location such as bulk or rack when
multiple replenishments for the same product cause overcrowding in your pick line. This choice is available
when the full order quantity is not available in the pick line location and a replenishment has been generated.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 219

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
For example, suppose your order quantity is 10 cases, there are only five cases in the pick line and the
replenishment quantity is 60 cases. The operator can choose to pick the 10 cases from a bulk or non-pick line
location instead of waiting for a replenishment and picking from the pick line. The 10 cases picked from bulk
is subtracted from the replenishment quantity; 60 -10 = 50.
RFPIC screen showing prompt to pick from replenishment location rather than pick line location
To activate pick line picking from a non-pick line location, you must set the flag in MRFP called Allow Picking
Outside of Pick Line to Yes.
PERFORMING REPLENISHMENTS IN RFPIC

You can allow operators to perform replenishments in RFPIC if their equipment permits it; you can either allow
it on a permanent basis or you can give each operator the choice each time that he or she logs on.
You define your RF pick line/replenishment rules in a field in MRFP called Replenishment Rules for Pick Line.
There are three options in this field:
1) REPI is done inside of RFPIC
2) REPI is done separately (that is, in RFRP or RFPL)
3) Determined by the user
LOOKING UP REMARKS AND MESSAGES IN RFPIC

There are four types of remarks/messages in RFPIC:
 order header remarks prefixed by the number 0
 order line remarks prefixed by the line number (for example, 1, 2, 3)
When you enter the order header in RFPIC, all remarks/message are displayed in the following order:
 order header remarks
 line remarks
1 Enter RFPIC and retrieve the order whose remarks/messages you wish to look up. The remark/message
will display automatically when you retrieve the order.
220 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPIC screen showing header and line remarks
2 If the remarks are more than six lines long, use your up and down arrow keys to scroll through the remark
lines.
3 If there are multiple remarks/messages attached to the order, press Enter or F4 to jump to the next mes-
sage.
4 Continue to process the order normally.
PERFORMING COUNT BACKS IN RFPIC

You can perform inventory counts while picking in RFPIC if the Activate Inventory Count flag in MRFP is set to
a value other than Never.
If the count does not match the on hand quantity, an inventory discrepancy record will be created in the
program ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation). Depending on the option that you choose in the Inventory
Count Rules field in MRFP, a supervisor may be required to log on and flag the discrepancy as either resolved
or unresolved before you can pick the order line.
1 Enter RFPIC.
2 Retrieve the order that you wish to pick.
RFPIC screen showing pick list of order lines
3 Select the order line that you wish to pick.

4 Enter your from location.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 221

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
5 Enter your UI value.

RFPIC screen showing prompt for remaining quantity
7 Key in the quantity of product remaining in the location and press Enter. If the location contains mixed
product, count only the product that you are picking.
222 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If the quantity that you enter

If the quantity that you enter does NOT match the on hand
matches the on-hand quantity: quantity:
The following message will appear:

a) Press Enter to acknowledge the

message and re-enter your
count.
b) Key in the remaining quantity
again and press Enter.
c) If prompted to do so, press Enter
again to acknowledge the “Incor-
rect 2nd Count” message.
d) If the Supervisor Screen

appears, a supervisor must log
on and enter either Y to flag the
discrepancy as resolved or N to
flag the discrepancy as unre-
solved.
e) Proceed to next step.
9 Continue to pick the order in the normal fashion.
LOOKING UP INVENTORY DISCREPANCY RECORDS IN ICIN

You look up inventory discrepancy records in ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation). Inventory discrepancy
records remain in ICIN until you delete them or assign them to a work request in CRME (Enter CRM
Request).
1 Enter ICIN.
2 Click on Enter Criteria.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 223

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If you wish to view all records in If you wish to restrict your query
ICIN: to certain records:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Enter the appropriate search cri-

teria (order number, line num-
ber, operator code, etc.).
4 Click on Execute Query.
ICIN screen showing a discrepancy for item 11111
5 Use your arrow keys to scroll through the list of records.

6 When you finish viewing your inventory discrepancy records in ICIN, click on Return to Main and Exit.
LOOKING UP INVENTORY DISCREPANCY RECORDS IN RFCL

You must have supervisor access in OPER (Operator Code) before you can look up inventory discrepancy
records in RFCL (RF Count Log).
1 Enter RFCL.
224 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFCL screen
If you wish to view all records in If you wish to restrict your query
RFCL: to certain records:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Enter the appropriate search cri-

teria (UI number, order number,
customer code, etc.).
RFCL screen showing discrepancy record for item D1
4 Use your arrow keys to scroll through the list of records.

5 When you finish viewing your inventory discrepancy records in RFCL, press F4 to exit.
REMOVING INVENTORY DISCREPANCY RECORDS FROM ICIN

There are two methods of removing records from ICIN: you can delete the record using the Delete command
or you can create a work request for the discrepancy in CRME and AccellosOne 3PL will delete the record
automatically. Regardless of the option that you choose, AccellosOne 3PL will create an IF (Information Only)
record in the History Block of LOEN.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 225

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
1 Enter ICIN.
2 Retrieve the record that you wish to remove.
If you wish to create a work

If you wish to delete the record: request in CRME:
a) Click on Delete. a) Click on CRM Entry.

b) If required, enter your remarks b) Click on Create Record.
for the transaction. c) Proceed to enter your work
request. Refer to the Operations
2 Guide for further information on
entering work requests in CRME.
d) When you finish entering your
work request, click on Exit.
4 Click on Return to Main and Exit.
REMOVING INVENTORY DISCREPANCY RECORDS IN RFCL

You must have supervisor access in OPER (Operator Code) before you can remove inventory discrepancy
records in RFCL (RF Count Log).
1 Enter RFCL.
2 Retrieve the record that you wish to remove.
3 Press F3 (Rm).
4 When the message “Record is Deleted Enter to Continue” appears, press Enter to continue.
5 Press F4 to exit.
This program allows you to enter temperature, trailer/seal number and pallet information for a given receipt or
order without working in RFCH or RFPIC. The information that you can enter in RFTT — temperature only,
trailer/seal number only, temperature and trailer/seal number, etc. — depends on which option you choose in
the Show Temperature and Pallet Blocks field in MRFP.
1 Enter RFTT.
226 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Looking Up Your OPID’s
RFTT screen
2 Key in your order number and press Enter.

3 Enter your temperature, trailer/seal number and pallet information in the usual manner.
There are three ways of looking up your OPID’s (outbound pallet ID’s):
 from the desktop program LOCN (Look Up Carton)
 in the RF program RFNCO (OPID Look-Up)
 from the desktop program LOOR (Look Up Orders)
LOOKING UP YOUR OPID’S IN LOCN

You can look up OPID’s (outbound pallet ID’s) in LOCN (Look Up Carton). OPID’s are created when you
perform case picking in RFPIC. When you look up OPID’s, AccellosOne 3PL shows the customer code, level
1 value, order number and line number for each inventory entity on the pallet.
1 Enter LOCN.
2 Click on Enter Query.
3 Enter or scan in your OPID and click on Execute Query.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 227

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
LOCN screen showing three inventory entities on the pallet
4 When you finish looking up your OPID, click on Exit to exit.
LOOKING UP YOUR OPID’S IN RFNCO

This RF program allows you to look up the product on an OPID (outbound pallet ID). It is similar to RFCO (RF
Confirm OPID) but without the F3 (Process) command.
The Line Block shows each order line assigned to the OPID; that is, the order number, line number, customer,
all inventory levels, the staging location and the quantity. Records in the Line Block are sorted by date and
time stamp based on the STPI (Start Picking) flow with the oldest records shown first followed by the newer
records.
1 Enter RFNCO.
228 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFNCO
2 Key or scan in your OPID.
RFNCO screen showing two order lines attached to OPID 00002240
3 If there are multiple records in the Line Block, you use your Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the
list.
4 When you finish looking up your OPID’s, press F4 the required number of times to exit.
LOOKING UP AN ORDER’S OPID’S IN LOOR

You can look up an order’s OPID’s in the Location Block of LOOR.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 229

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Confirming Orders by OPID in RFCO
LOOR screen showing OPID for order line 1
This program allows you to confirm orders by OPID (outbound pallet ID) without the need to confirm the entire
order in CHOF. If an OPID contains multiple order lines, you can confirm individual orders lines or you can
confirm all order lines assigned to the OPID. If you choose to confirm individual order lines, the Shipped Date
field in the Line Block of LOOR will be populated for each order line confirmed in RFCO.
FLOWS The order must be picked.
DOCUMENTS You cannot use RFCO if you print one or more documents at your FIPI (Finish
Picking) flow because the flow FIPI is bypassed in RFCO. To use RFCO, you
must move your document(s) to the COOR (Confirm Order) flow.
OTHER See Miscellaneous 2 tab in MRFP.
1 Enter RFCO.
230 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFCO screen
2 Press Enter to scan in your OPID.
RFCO screen showing F3 (Process command)
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 231

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Confirming Individual Order Lines by UI in RFCU
To confirm all order lines

To confirm individual order lines: assigned to the OPID:
a) Press F1 (LN) to enter the Detail a) Press F3 (PR) to process it.

Block of RFCO.
b) Use your arrow keys to scroll
through the list of order lines.
c) When you reach the order line
that you wish to confirm, press
Enter to select it.
d) When prompted to confirm the

order line, press Enter to accept
the default value of Y(es).
4 Repeat the above steps for another OPID or press F4 (EX) to exit.
Confirming Individual Order Lines by UI in RFCU
This program allows you to confirm individual order lines by UI. When you look up the order in LOOR, the
Shipped Date field in the Line Block will be populated for each order line confirmed in RFCU.
1 Enter RFCU.
232 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Reprinting Outbound Labels in RFOLP
RFCU

3 Scan in your UI value.
RFCU screen showing prompt to continue
4 Press Enter to confirm the order line.

5 Press F4 to exit.
In this program, you can reprint outbound labels for orders that have already been picked in RFPIC. There
are two reprint modes in RFOLP depending on the outcome of label printing in RFPIC.
If the original label printed correctly in RFPIC, you enter the UI value of the order line or the OPID of the
original label in RFOLP. If label printing failed in RFPIC due to a lost connection or loss of power, AccellosOne
3PL will generate an internal tag number and attach this tag number to all order lines that have been picked.
The way that you process these order lines that have been picked depends upon how you create your
OPID’s:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 233

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
 if you manually create your OPID’s, you must enter ENOR and change the tag number in the Process
Block to the desired OPID number and use this number as your OPID number (AccellosOne 3PL will
replace the tag number for all order lines that have been picked by the new OPID number)
 if your OPID’s are system generated, you must enter LOOR and look up the tag number assigned to the
order line in the Process Block and use this tag number as your OPID number (when you finish reprint-
ing in RFOLP, AccellosOne 3PL will assign the new system-generated OPID number to all order lines
that have been picked)
LOOR screen showing tag number generated in Process Block when label printing fails
CASE PICKING See RFPIC.
If you need to create a new label

If you wish to reprint a previously because label printing failed in
printed label: RFPIC:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Enter LOOR.

b) Retrieve the order whose label
printing failed.
c) Open the Process Block and
look up the system-assigned tag
number. Use this value as your
OPID.
2 Enter RFOLP.
234 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOLP screen

If you wish to scan in the UI If you wish to scan in the

value: outbound pallet ID:
a) Enter or scan in your UI value. a) Press Enter to bypass the UI

b) If a single UI value has multiple field.
OPID’s, select the appropriate b) Enter or scan in your OPID.
OPID from the pick list.
RFOLP screen showing prompt for number of labels to print
5 Key in the number of labels that you wish to print/reprint and press Enter.
If the printer code is NOT

If the printer code is displayed: displayed:
a) Press Enter to accept it or key in a) Key in your printer code and

a new printer code and press press Enter.
Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 235

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Picking Cases from a Pick Line in CASE
In this program, you can pick partial quantities (that is, less than a full pallet) from a pick line in Skip mode. In
Skip mode, automatic replenishment is deactivated and the picker can select any pick line inventory from any
pick line location whose level 1 value matches the level 1 value of the order line.
CASE is designed for fast-moving pick lines in which old product (that is, allocating in FIFO/LIFO sequence)
is not an issue and manual procedures are in place to ensure that the pick line never runs out of product. If
you activate Skip mode, you will not be able to pick partial quantities from a pick line in RFPIC.
When you allocate an order in Skip mode, the following events occur in AccellosOne 3PL:
 the P-type order line for the pick line quantity will not be changed to R for Regular
 the Location Status field of the order header will be updated to “Entered”, but no locations will be
assigned to the order lines
 no replenishments will be generated
NOTE If the order quantity is such that both a bulk pick and a pick line pick are
required (for example, order quantity = 110 cases or 1 pallet/10 cases), AccellosOne
3PL will create a second order line for the pick line pick. However, the non-pick line
pick will allocate normally; that is, the P-type line will change to R for Regular.
FLOWS See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
CASE PICK LABEL See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
INVENTORY LEV- CASE supports three-level accounts only.

ELS
OTHER You need a pick line for the product that you wish to pick in CASE. See the Allo-
cation and Wave Manager for instructions on setting up a pick line.
In the DSRP (Depositor Shipping and Receiving) record attached to the customer
that you are setting up for CASE picking, the Change Zero Pending Line to R-
Type Line field must be set to N for No.
In the PIPR (Picking Profile) record attached to the customer that you are setting
up for CASE picking, the following setups are required:
 Use FIFO/LIFO for Pick Line Picking or Skip = S for Skip
 Exclude Pick Line Stock When Bulk Picking = Y for Yes
236 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
PIPR screen showing required setup for CASE
PROCESS VAL- See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
UES
See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
FILE label
See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
HOLDS See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
1 Enter CASE.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 237

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
CASE screen
2 Enter or scan in your order number.
Record 1
Record 2
CASE screen showing pick list of possible pick locations for order line 1
AccellosOne 3PL will display all locations in the pick line containing the product whose level 1 value
matches the level 1 of the order line. For each location, CASE will display the order line number, ware-
house, level 1 value and pick quantity.
3 Use your arrow keys to position your cursor over the order line/location that you wish to pick, then press
F3 (Select).
238 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
CASE screen showing prompt for UI value
4 If you make a mistake and wish to work on another order or order line, press F2 (QU for Quit) to position
your cursor in the Ord# field. Then enter or scan in another order number or press Enter to work on the
same order but a different order line.
Available quan-
tity in location
CASE screen showing prompt for pick quantity
6 Key in your quantity and press Enter. The quantity that you enter must be less than or equal to the avail-
able quantity in the location.
7 Repeat the above steps for each additional order line to be picked from the pick line.
8 When you finish picking all your order lines, the “Case pick completed” message will appear. Press F4
(Rt) to display the case pick label screen.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 239

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
CASE screen showing case pick label screen

If your labels are generated in are not generated in Accellos-
AccellosOne 3PL: One 3PL: If the Label field is populated:
pallet ID. populated, key in your printer
b) Key in your printer code and code and press Enter.
press Enter.
CASE screen showing completed case pick label screen
10 Press F4 (Rt) to close the case pick label screen.

11 Press F4 (EX) again to exit CASE.
240 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Picking Substitution
Picking substitution allows RF operators to pick product other than the allocated product on the order line.
Depending on the options that you choose, the substituted product:
 may or may not be allocated to another order
 may or may not be from the same location
 may or may not have the same FIFO attributes
 may or may not have the same level 2/3/4 values
Regardless of the option that you choose, if the original order line has a hold code, the substituted product
must have the same hold.
Picking substitution is designed to achieve faster picking and increased productivity for the warehouse by
allowing operators to pick the most accessible product in a given location or area without sacrificing FIFO or
other picking requirements.
It is only available for RF picking in the program RFPIC. When the picker enters an inventory level value other
than the value of the allocated line, AccellosOne 3PL will evaluate a) whether picking substitution is allowed
and b) if it is allowed, whether the product picked as a substitute is acceptable.
NOTE Picking substitution offers more flexibility at picking time than does reserve
logic. You can pick product from a location other than the pick location, you can pick
product whose level 2/3/4 value is not an exact match of the product on the order, you
can pick product with a variable quantity breakdown and you can pick product on
another open order.
If picking substitution is not activated, the picker can only pick product not on the order line if reserve logic is
activated.
SETTING UP PICKING SUBSTITUTION

There are three steps to follow in setting up picking substitution.
 You set up your picking substitution rules in PSPR (RF Substitution Profile Code).
 You attach your RF substitution profile code to PIPR (Picking Profile Code).
 You attach your PIPR profile code to the appropriate records in ITEM, CONS, CCOP, HOLD or DSRP.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 241

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
SETTING UP YOUR PICKING SUBSTITUTION RULES IN PSPR

You set up your picking substitution rules in PSPR. Picking substitution rules are always location type
dependent; that means that you can set up one set of picking substitution rules for your rack locations and a
completely different set of picking substitution rules for your pick line locations.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Substitution Profile Code Mandatory
Your RF substitution profile code.
The description for your RF substitution profile code.
Enable Replenishment Y = Yes

Substitution N = No
If you select Y for Yes, your picking substitution rules will apply to replenish-
ments as well. If you select N for No, your picking substitution rules will apply
to picking only.
L O C AT I O N T Y P E B L O C K
Location Type Code Mandatory

(defined in LOTP)
The location type code for your RF substitution profile code.

(defined in SOSE)
If you attach a SOSE code to your location type, the substitution pick list in
RFPIC will be sorted in the order that you specify.
242 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
L O C AT I O N T Y P E B L O C K
Range in Days Mode A = Allocated Lot, allocation time (default)

O = Oldest Lot
If you select A for Allocated Lot, your range in days value will be based on the
originally allocated product’s receipt/expiry date. If you select O for Oldest Lot,
your range in days value will be based on the oldest lot at the time of alloca-
tion.
Range in Days from Orig- Only available if Range in Days Mode = blank or A for Allocated Lot, if relative
inally Allocated Entity FIFO picking is activated in PIPR and if the PSPR rule “Substitute product
must have equivalent FIFO attributes” is chosen
The number of days that the substituted product’s receipt/expiry date can
exceed the originally allocated product’s receipt/expiry date.
EXAMPLE
Suppose you set the Range in Days from Oldest Lot to 10 in PIPR and the
Range in Days from Originally Allocated Entity in PSPR to 5. During alloca-
tion, AccellosOne 3PL selects Jan. 7 as the lot to pick even though the oldest
lot is Jan. 1. If the picker elects to pick substitute product in RFPIC, any lot up
to Jan 12 will be accepted.
If you leave this field blank, the value of zero will be assumed and the substi-
tuted product’s receipt/expiry date must match the original product’s receipt/
expiry date.
NOTE If your customer has specific FIFO rules such as never ship any-
thing with a date greater than 20 days from the oldest lot, you must make sure
that the sum of the Range in Days from Oldest Lot value in PIPR and the
Range in Days from Originally Allocated Entity value in PSPR does not
exceed 20.
For example, you could set both values to 10 (10 + 10 = 20) or your PIPR
value could be 15 and your PSPR value could be 5. However, you could not
set your PIPR value to 15 and your PSPR value to 10 because product with a
date greater than 20 days from the oldest lot might be shipped.
Range in Days from Old- Only available if Range in Days Mode = O for Oldest Lot, if relative FIFO pick-
est Lot During Allocation ing is activated in PIPR and if the PSPR rule “Substitute product must have
equivalent FIFO attributes” is chosen
The number of days that the substituted product’s receipt/expiry date can
exceed the oldest lot at the time of allocation.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 243

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
There are five logical groups in PSPR. Each group has two or more mutually exclusive options. From each
group, you select the appropriate option.
Do not use stock allocated to other orders as substitute

Use stock allocated to other orders for same location only (not available if the picking substi-
tution profile code attached to the customer differs from the picking substitution code
attached to the consignee)
Substitute product must come from same location only

Substitute product must come from same type of locations (LOTP)
Substitute product can come from any location (not available for pick line locations)
Substitute product must have equivalent FIFO attributes

Ignore FIFO requirement for substitute product
Substitute product must be same inventory up to level 1

Use traditional range in days mode

Use extended range in days mode based on all allocated order lines
The traditional range in days mode option looks at a single order only. The extended range in
days option, on the other hand, looks at all allocated order lines. For example, if your range
in days value is 5, the substituted product’s receipt/expiry date can exceed the receipt /
expiry date of any allocated product that has not been picked.
NOTE The picking substitution rules that you define in PSPR override any picking
parameters that you define in ILOP. For example, if you select “pick to clean” in ILOP
and if the operator decides to pick from another location, that location may not satisfy
the pick to clean requirement. In other words, the operator may pick from a less desir-
able location according to ILOP.
1 Enter PSPR.
3 Key in your substitution profile code and press Enter.
4 Key in a description for your new code and press Enter.
5 In the Enable Replenishment Substitution field, key in N for No or Y for Yes and press Enter.
6 In the Location Type Block, click on Return to Main.
8 In the Location Type field, key in your location type code and press Enter or use the pick list function to
select it.
244 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
9 If required, key in your sort sequence code and press Enter or use the pick list function to select it. If you
do not require a sort sequence code, press Enter to bypass this field.
10 In the Range in Days Mode field, key in A for Allocated Lot or O for Oldest Lot and press Enter.
11 If required, key in the number of days in the Range in Days from Originally Allocated Entity field and
press Enter.
12 In the Available Options Block, use your arrow keys to position your cursor beside the parameter that you
wish to choose and then click on Add Option.
13 Repeat the previous step for each set of parameters.
14 When you finish selecting your parameters, click on Location Type Block.
PSPR screen showing picking rules for RACK options
15 Click on Master Block and Exit to exit.
ATTACHING YOUR PSPR PROFILE CODE TO THE APPROPRIATE CODE

First, attach your PSPR profile code to PIPR (Picking Profile Code). Next, attach your PIPR profile to the
appropriate code (ITEM, CONS or DSRP). If you are attaching picking profiles to items and consignees as
well to customers, the following logic will apply:
 the profile that you attach to DSRP is the default
 if you attach a picking profile to ITEM, it will override the profile in DSRP
 if you attach a picking profile to CONS, it will override the profiles in DSRP and ITEM (you cannot use
the “Use stock allocated to other orders for same location” option in PSPR when attaching a picking pro-
file to CONS)
EXCLUDING ORDERS FROM PICKING SUBSTITUTION IN EOSU

You can exclude open orders from picking substitution in EOSU (Exclude Orders from RF Substitution). When
you exclude an order from picking substitution, the following restrictions apply:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 245

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
 only product on that order can be picked (other product cannot be substituted for the product on the
order)
 product on that order cannot serve as a substitute for product on another order
EOSU shows all open orders that can be excluded from picking substitution. The Substitution flag shows the
current status of each order. A value of Y or blank indicates that picking substitution is enabled for the order.
A value of N indicates that the order is excluded from picking substitution.
1 Enter EOSU.
EOSU screen
2 Key in your search criteria for the orders that you wish to exclude and click on Execute Query to
execute the query.
EOSU screen showing all open orders for carrier ABC
246 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
3 Proceed to select the orders that you wish to exclude from RF substitution as follows:
If you wish to: You:
select a single order click in the checkbox beside the

order
select all orders

click on Select All
deselect a single order click in the checkbox beside the

selected order
deselect all orders

click on Deselect All
4 When you finish selecting your orders, click on Enable RF Substitution . The Substitution Flag
beside the selected order(s) will change from N or blank to Y. If you make a mistake and wish to reverse
your action, select the orders that you enabled and click on Disable RF Substitution .
5 Click on Exit to exit EOSU.
PERFORMING PICKING SUBSTITUTION IN RFPIC

If substitute product can come from a location other than the originally allocated location, you pick substitute
product in RFPIC by entering the location of the substitute product followed by its UI value. If, however,
substitute product must come from the originally allocated location, the Location field will be filled in with the
original location and you enter the UI value of the substitute product only.
If you enter a location other than the pick location and that location does not hold any substitute product,
RFPIC will display a pick list showing all locations containing substitute product that is acceptable. After
selecting the product/location that you wish to pick, you continue to process the order normally.
2 Enter RFPIC.

Enter. field.
b) Key in your warehouse and
press Enter.
press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 247

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
The message “You have selected The message “You have selected
CP Mode” will appear. NM mode” will appear.
a) Key in N for No and press Enter. a) Press Enter to continue.
6 When the pick list of order lines is displayed, use your arrow keys to position your cursor over the order
line that you wish to pick, then press F3 (Select).
RFPIC screen showing prompt for pick location
7 If prompted to enter your from location, enter or scan in the location of the substitute product.
248 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If there is NO substitute If there is substitute product in

If there is NO substitute product in the location that the location that you entered
product in any location: you entered: or the pre-filled in location:
a) The message “No subst. for all a) The following message will a) Enter or scan in its UI value.
loc” will appear. You can only appear:
pick the product on the original
order line.
b) Key in Y for Yes and press

Enter.
c) AccellosOne 3PL will display a
pick list of acceptable substi-
tutes.
d) Use your up and down arrow

keys to scroll through the list
of substitute product.
e) When you find the product that
you wish to pick, press F3 to
select it.
9 Continue to pick the product normally in RFPIC.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 249

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Entering Process Values in UOPR
You enter process values in UOPR. There are two process values that you enter in this program: catch weight
and serial number. You can scan a bar code that contains these two values or you can enter them manually.
UOPR maintains a running total by both weight and number of pieces. The running total shows the weight
and number of pieces that have been scanned in as well as the weight and number of pieces that have not
been scanned in.
If a case has been scanned in error, you can remove it by means of the Reduce command. If a case has not
been scanned, you can remove it from the remaining number of cases to be scanned by means of the
Remove command.

INVENTORY LEV- You can process up to four inventory levels in UOPR. However, UOPR does not
ELS support product with a single inventory level.
PROCESS VAL- See “Entering Process Values in RFOPS” on page 260 for further information for
UES further information.
SCAN PARAME- See “Entering Process Values in RFOPS” on page 260 for further information for
TER CODE further information.
BASE FOR CUBE/ See “Entering Process Values in RFOPS” on page 260 for further information for
WEIGHT further information.
OTHER If you pick product in RFPIC, you can only enter process values in UOPR after
picking in RFPIC. If you pick product in any other program, you can enter process
values either before or after picking.
FUNCTION KEYS
All Modes
F1 ME (Manual Entry) Displays a separate window in which you

can manually enter your catch weights,
serial numbers and other process values.
250 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
FUNCTION KEYS
F1 SU (Summary) Displays the weight and number of pieces

already scanned in as well as the weight
and number of pieces that have not been
scanned in.
F2 RC (Reduce) Remove a scanned case from an order

line and reduce the order line quantity by
one.
F3 RE (Remove Case) Remove a case that has not been

scanned from an order line.
1 Enter UOPR.
UOPR screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 251

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
UOPR screen showing prompt for UI Value

If there are multiple order lines/ If there is a single order line for
orders with the same UI: the UI:
A pick list will display showing all a) Proceed to next step.

order lines with the same UI value.
a) Use your arrow keys to scroll

through the list of available order
lines.
b) When you find the order line that
you wish to process, press F3
(SE) to select it.
252 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
UOPR screen showing prompt for licence plate
If you wish to scan in your If you wish to enter your process

process values: values manually:
a) Scan in your label. a) Press F1 (ME).
b) Key in your weight and press

Enter.
c) Key in your serial number and
press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 253

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
total weight and number of

pieces scanned for the cur-
rently selected item
UOPR screen showing case one out of five scanned in
6 Repeat the above step for each additional label that you wish to scan.
7 When you finish scanning in all product on the order line, the “Process Complete” message will appear.
Press F4 to exit create record mode.
8 Repeat the above steps for your next UI on the order.
9 When you finish entering all your order lines, press F4 to position your cursor in the Order field.
10 Process another order or press F4 again to exit UOPR.
REMOVING CASES THAT HAVE BEEN SCANNED

You can remove cases that have been scanned in UOPR by means of the Rc (Reduce) command. When you
use the Reduce command, the number of cases removed is subtracted from the order line’s to ship quantity in
ENOR as well as the remaining number of cases and weight in UOPR.
1 Enter UOPR.
3 Enter or scan in your UI number.
UOPR screen showing five cases scanned with a total weight of 123.765
4 Press F2 (RC).
254 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
UOPR screen showing the scan label prompt
5 Enter or scan in the case that you wish to remove.

6 Repeat the above two steps for each additional case that you wish to remove.
7 When you finish removing your process value, press F4 (RT).
8 Continue to process the next UI on the order in the normal manner.
REMOVING CASES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SCANNED

You can remove cases that have not been scanned in UOPR by means of the RE (Remove) command. When
you use the Remove command, the number of cartons removed is subtracted from the order line’s to ship
quantity in ENOR as well as the remaining number of cases and weight in UOPR.
1 Enter UOPR.
3 Enter or scan in your UI number.
UOPR screen showing order line with five unscanned cases
4 Press F3 (RE).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 255

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
UOPR screen showing case remove prompt
5 Key in the number of cases that you wish to remove and press Enter.
6 Continue to process the next UI on the order in the normal manner.
REMOVING CASES FROM A FULLY SCANNED ORDER

You can remove cases from a fully scanned order by selecting the Yes option when the “*Order Complete*
Remove Cases <Y/N> to Continue” message appears.
This message will appear in UOPR whenever you retrieve a fully scanned order that has not yet been
confirmed. It is designed to deal with situations in which it is necessary to remove cases from a pallet during
the loading stage because of space limitations on the truck.
Each case that you scan in UOPR removes one case from the to ship quantity in ENOR. If you have duplicate
label ID’s attached to the same UI value, AccellosOne 3PL will remove the case or cases from the lowest
process line number.
1 Enter UOPR.
UOPR screen showing prompt
256 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
UOPR screen showing prompt for UI Value
UOPR screen showing prompt for label number
5 Enter or scan in your label number.

If you wish to remove

additional cases from the If you wish to remove cases
If you wish to exit UOPR: same UI: from a different UI:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Enter or scan in your label a) Press F4 (RT) to position your
number. cursor in the UI field.
b) Enter or scan in your new UI
value.
c) Enter or scan in your label
number.
7 When you finish scanning the cases to be removed, press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX) to exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 257

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
LOOKING UP SUMMARY INFORMATION

The summary function in UOPR shows the weight and number of pieces that you have already scanned in as
well as the weight and number of pieces that have not been scanned in. Summaries are calculated at two
levels in UOPR: the order level and the item level.
Summaries at the order level show the weight and number of pieces that have been scanned for the entire
order. Summaries at the item level are grouped by level 1; if you have multiple lines on the same order
containing the same level 1 value, the summary will show a total for each level 1. These summaries show
both the weight and number of pieces that have been scanned as well as the weight and number of pieces
that have not been scanned.
1 Enter UOPR.
3 Press F1 (SU).
UOPR screen
showing first record
out of two
UOPR screen showing two items on order — first item (five cases) fully scanned while second item
(three cases) unscanned
4 Use your arrow keys to scroll through each unique level 1 on the order.
5 When you finish looking up summary information, press F4 to exit the summary block.
TRANSFERRING INBOUND PROCESS VALUES TO OUTBOUND ORDERS

If the automatic transfer of inbound process values to outbound orders is activated on your system, the
process values attached to the product will be automatically transferred to the order when you enter or scan in
your order number in UOPR.
The following restrictions apply to the transfer of process values:
 You cannot transfer process values if one or more values is missing. For example, if you have five cases
on one full pallet and one of the cases is missing a process value, you cannot transfer the process val-
ues in UOPR. You must enter the missing catch weight(s) in ENOR and then return to UOPR to perform
the transfer.
 You cannot transfer process values if you have two or more inventory entities that are identical. For
example, you have two pallets with the same level 1/2/3 values and you wish to ship out a single pallet.
 Unless you are clearing out all inventory, the quantity being shipped must always equal one full pallet (or
one drum if drum is assigned to the highest SKU class). For example, if you ship in cases, the number of
cases that you ship must equal one full pallet.
258 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Refer to the section “Item Process Values” in the Operations 2 Guide for further information about setting up
this feature.
1 Enter UOPR.
2 Retrieve the order whose process values you wish to transfer.
The “Wgt transferred” message will appear.
UOPR screen showing “Wgt transferred” message
3 Press F4 to exit. Your process values are transferred.
SETTING UP CATCH WEIGHT TOLERANCES

You can define catch weight tolerances for each item in ITEM. If a catch weight for that item exceeds the
allowed tolerance, the weight will be rejected and the receipt or order cannot be confirmed until a catch
weight within the permissible range is entered. For example, if the net weight of a pallet is defined as 100 lbs.
for a given item in ITEM and the weight tolerance percentage is 5% for that item, you cannot enter a catch
weight of greater than 105 lbs. or less than 95 lbs. in any RF program.
RFIPS screen showing Wgt tolerance failed” message
Catch weight tolerances apply to the following RF programs: RFOPS (Outbound Process Scan), RFIPS
(Inbound Process Scan) and UOPR (Update Order Process).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 259

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Entering Process Values in RFOPS
In addition to the normal setups for catch weights in IPRO and IPRP, you must enter a value in the Weight
Tolerance Percent field in Quantity Breakdown Block of ITEM for the appropriate SKU.
ITEM screen showing a weight tolerance of 5% on a net weight of 50 lbs.
You enter process values in RFOPS. There are two process values that you enter in this program: catch
weight and serial number. You can scan a bar code that contains these two values or you can enter them
manually.
RFOPS maintains a running total by both weight and number of pieces. The running total shows the weight
and number of pieces that have been scanned in as well as the weight and number of pieces that have not
been scanned in.
If a label has been scanned in error, you can remove it by means of the Remove command. If a case has
been scanned in error, you can remove it from the remaining number of cases to be scanned by means of the
Reduce command.

260 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
INVENTORY LEV- You can process up to four inventory levels in RFOPS.

ELS
PROCESS VAL- For the UCC-128 label, you require two process values in RFOPS: one for catch
UES weights and one for serial numbers. These codes must be set up in IPRO (Item
Process) with the Create Automatic Records flag set to Y for Yes and then
attached to a profile in IPRP (Item Process Profile). The IPRP profile must in turn
be attached to the item(s) requiring the process values.
Because you are capturing a weight, the item(s) should assigned the appropriate
non-standard weight option in ITEM.
SCAN PARAME- You need a scan parameter profile defined in SCPR (Scan Parameter Code)*.
TER CODE For the UCC-128 label, this profile must contain a minimum of two records in the
Detail Block: one record for your scanned in weight and another record for your
scanned in serial number. The SCPR profile must in turn be attached to the item
requiring the process values.
If you wish to scan in your lowest inventory level as a unique identifier, you must
define your scan parameters in SCPR and attach your scan parameter code to
your bar code profile in BAPR (Bar Code Profile).
* not required for manual entry in RFOPS
BASE FOR CUBE/ The Base for Cube/Weight flag for your case SKU in the Quantity Breakdown
WEIGHT Block of ITEM must be set to Y for Yes for any product that you wish to process in
RFOPS.
CATCH WEIGHT See “Setting Up Catch Weight Tolerances” on page 259 for further information.
TOLRANCES
SORT SEQUENCE You can define a sort sequence for your process values in the RFOPS Sort
CODE (SOSE) Sequence Code (SOSE) field in MRFP.
OTHER If you pick product in RFPIC, you can only enter process values in RFOPS after
picking in RFPIC. If you pick product in any other program, you can enter process
values either before or after picking.
RFOPS supports alternate item codes set up in ALIT (Alternate Item and Lan-
guage).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 261

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
FUNCTION KEYS
All Modes
F1 ME (Manual Entry) Displays a separate window in which you

can manually enter your catch weights,
serial numbers and other process values.
F2 RC (Reduce Quantity) Remove a scanned case from an order

line and reduce the order line quantity by
one.
F3 RL (Remove Label) Remove a label that has been scanned

from an order line.
F4 EX (Exit) Exit program or scan incomplete mes-

sage.
Pick List of Order Lines
F3 SL (Select) Selects the order line that the cursor is

positioned over.
F4 CN (Cancel) Exits the pick list without selecting an

order line.
1 Enter RFOPS.
RFOPS screen
262 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If you wish to process a If you wish to process a spe- If you wish to process a
specific order: cific order and a specific UI: specific UI:
a) Press F9 to position your cur- a) Press F9 to position your cur- a) Enter or scan in your UI value.
sor in the ORD field. sor in the ORD field.
b) Key in your order number and b) Key in your order number and
press Enter. press Enter.
c) Enter or scan in your UI value.
AccellosOne 3PL will retrieve all order lines that match the criteria that you entered.
Line 1
Line 2
RFOPS screen showing two order lines available for processing
3 Use your arrow keys to position your cursor over the order line that you wish to process and press F3
(SL) to select it.
RFOPS screen showing prompt for catch weight
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 263

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If you wish to scan in your If you wish to enter your process

process values: values manually:
a) Scan in your label. a) Press F1 (Me).
b) Key in your weight and press

Enter.
c) Key in your serial number and
press Enter.
Weight of first piece
RFOPS screen showing case one out of five scanned in
5 Continue to scan all pieces on the order line. If the same item is found on two or more order lines, Accel-
losOne 3PL will calculate a running total of the weight for all order lines containing that item.
264 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Total weight for all lines on

order containing this item
RFOPS screen showing total weight by item
6 When you finish entering all your order lines, process another order line or press F4 to exit.
CAPTURING THE WEIGHT DYNAMICALLY FROM A BAR CODE

The locate weight in bar code dynamically option allows you to scan in the weight from a bar coded label
without knowing which numbers in the bar code represent the product’s weight. Because the format of the bar
code is unknown, you cannot use SCPR (Scan Parameter Profile) to break up the code into its component
parts.
The following requirements must be met before you can locate the weight in a bar code dynamically:
 All bar codes for a given order line must have the same length.
 The weight portion of the bar code for a given order line must all have the same length; if a weight is less
than the full length, it must be padded with zeros.
 All weights for a given order line must fall within a range of 10 times heavier or lighter than the first case.
For example, if case 1 weighs 100 lbs., case 2 cannot weigh more than 1,000 lbs. or less than 10 lbs.
 The locate weight option must be activated in IPRO by setting the Locate Weight in Bar Code Dynami-
cally flag to Y for Yes for a given process code. This process code must be attached to an item process
profile code in IPRP (Item Process Profile), which in turn must be attached to the appropriate item(s) in
ITEM.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 265

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
IPRO screen showing Locate Weight in Bar Code Dynamically flag set to Y for Yes
The operator scans in the full bar code and then manually enters the weight for the first three cartons. If the
manually entered weight matches the bar code weight in all three cartons on the same order line, Accel-
losOne 3PL “learns” the position of the weight in the bar code.
If the manually entered weight does not match the bar code weight, the operator will be prompted to either
start over again or rescan the current carton.
EXAMPLE
9991234999 (Label 1)
9991356999 (Label 2)
9991426999 (Label 3)
Because the position of the weight in label one (positions 4 through 7) matches the position of the weight in
labels two and three, AccellosOne 3PL will read the weight from these positions for all pieces on the order
line.
If the same bar code is scanned twice, the operator will have two choices: accept the duplicate or enter a new
bar code.
1 Enter RFOPS.
If you wish to process a If you wish to process a spe- If you wish to process a
specific order: cific order and a specific UI: specific UI:
a) Key in your order number and a) Key in your order number and a) Press Enter to bypass the
press Enter. press Enter. Order Number field.
b) Press Enter to bypass the UI b) Enter or scan in your UI value. b) Enter or scan in your UI value.
field.
AccellosOne 3PL will retrieve all order lines that match the criteria that you entered.
266 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Line 1
Line 2
RFOPS screen showing two order lines available for processing
(SL) to select it.
RFOPS screen showing prompt for weight measure code
4 Key in your weight unit of measure (1 for kilograms or 2 for pounds) and press Enter. If you made a mis-
take and wish to select another order line, key in 3 for Cancel and press Enter.
RFOPS screen showing prompt to scan the bar code
5 Scan in your bar code.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 267

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOPS screen showing prompt to enter weight
6 Key in the weight and press Enter. The weight must include a decimal point. For example, to enter a
weight of 20 pounds, you must key in either 20.0 or 20.00. You cannot key in 20.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for your second piece.
If the position and weight of label If the position and weight of label
1 matches label 2: 1 does NOT match label 2:
a) Repeat steps 5 and 6 for your AccellosOne 3PL will offer you two
third piece. options: you can either start over
again from the first scan or repeat
the second scan.
a) Press Enter to rescan or key in N

for No to start over.
268 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
If the position and weight of label If the position and weight of label
3 matches labels 1/2: 3 does NOT match labels 1/2:
The following message may AccellosOne 3PL will offer you two
appear: options: you can either start over
again from the first scan or repeat
the third scan.
“Keep 3 Scans” message
a) Press Enter to start scanning or

key in N for No and press Enter.
a) Press Enter to rescan or key in N
for No to start over.
Line #
RFOPS screen showing five pieces to scan for order line 1
10 Scan in your first piece.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 269

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Weight of first piece
RFOPS screen showing prompt for next piece
11 Continue to scan all pieces on the order line. If the same item is found on two or more order lines, Accel-
losOne 3PL will calculate a running total of the weight for all order lines containing that item.
Total weight for all lines on

order containing this item
RFOPS screen showing total weight by item
12 When you finish scanning all your pieces, process another order line or press F4 to exit.
MANUALLY ENTERING THE WEIGHT

If AccellosOne 3PL is unable to locate the weight portion of the bar code, you must enter the weight of each
piece manually.
1 The following message will display when there is no match between the manually entered weight and the
bar code weight in two out of three labels:
270 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOPS screen showing “Weight positions not found” message
2 Key in 1 (Enter weight only) and press Enter.
RFOPS screen showing “Scan barcode” message
3 Manually key in the weight of the first piece and press Enter.
4 Repeat the previous step for each piece on the order line.
5 When you finish entering your weights manually, press F4 to exit.
REMOVING LABELS THAT HAVE BEEN SCANNED

You can remove labels that have been scanned in RFOPS by means of the RL (Remove) command. A
removed label cannot be re-used.
1 Enter RFOPS.
2 Enter or scan in your order number and/or UI number.
(SL) to select it.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 271

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOPS screen showing order line with seven unscanned cases
4 Press F3 (RL).
RFOPS screen showing label remove prompt
RFOPS screen showing prompt to scan in the label to be removed
6 Enter or scan in the label to be removed.

7 When the “Barcode Removed” message appears, press Enter to confirm it.
8 Continue to process the next label on the order line in the normal manner.
272 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
REMOVING CASES EITHER SCANNED OR UNSCANNED

You can remove cases either scanned or unscanned in RFOPS by means of the RC (Reduce) command.
When you use the Reduce command, the number of cases removed is subtracted from the order line’s to ship
quantity in ENOR as well as the remaining number of cases and weight in RFOPS.
1 Enter RFOPS.
2 Enter or scan in your order number and/or UI number.
(SL) to select it.
4 Press F2 (RC).
RFOPS screen showing prompt to remove cases
5 When prompted to remove the case and reduce the line quantity, key in Y for Yes and press Enter.
RFOPS screen showing seven potential cases to be removed
To remove a scanned case: To remove an unscanned case:
a) Enter or scan in the case that a) Press Enter to position your cur-
you wish to remove. sor in the REDUCE QTY field.
b) Key in the quantity to remove
and press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 273

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOPS screen showing “Unscanned quantity reduced” message
7 When the “Unit removed” or “Unscanned quantity reduced” message appears, press Enter to confirm it.
RFOPS screen showing “Scan bar code message”
8 Continue to scan in or remove cases in the normal manner or press F4 (EX) to exit.
REMOVING CASES FROM A FULLY SCANNED ORDER

You can remove cases from a fully scanned order by selecting the Yes option when the “Scan Complete
Remove Case <Y/N> to Continue” message appears.
This message will appear in RFOPS whenever you retrieve a fully scanned order that has not yet been
confirmed. It is designed to deal with situations in which it is necessary to remove cases from a pallet during
the loading stage because of space limitations on the truck.
Each case that you scan in RFOPS removes one case from the to ship quantity in ENOR. If you have
duplicate label ID’s attached to the same UI value, AccellosOne 3PL will remove the case or cases from the
lowest process line number.
1 Enter RFOPS.
274 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOPS screen showing prompt to remove case and reduce line quantity
RFOPS screen showing pick list of order lines
5 Use your arrow keys to position the cursor over the order line containing the case(s) that you wish to
remove and press F3 (SL) to select it.
RFOPS screen showing prompt to scan in bar code to be removed
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 275

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOPS screen showing “Unit removed” message
7 When the “Unit removed” message appears, press Enter to confirm it.
If you wish to remove

additional cases from the If you wish to remove cases
If you wish to exit RFOPS: same UI: from a different UI:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Enter or scan in your label a) Press F4 (Ex) to position your
number. cursor in the Ord. field and
press Enter.
b) Enter or scan in your new UI
value.
c) Enter or scan in your label
number.
9 When you finish scanning the cases to be removed, press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX) to exit.
PERFORMING AN INCOMPLETE SCAN

If you are unable to scan in all cases on the pallet for any reason, AccellosOne 3PL will present you with the
following options:
3 (Exit, Short) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save
the process values of any cases already scanned and
remove unscanned quantities from the to ship quantity.
You cannot process the order line again in RFPIC.
4 (Exit, New Line) Only available when locate weight in bar code logic is
deactivated
Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save

the process values of any cases already scanned,
remove the unscanned quantities from the to ship
quantity and will create a new line for the balance.
5 (Exit, Cancel Picking) Only available in RFPIC.
276 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
6 (Replace DAMG) Only available in RFPIC.
7 (Exit Scan, Save) Cease scanning and exit. AccellosOne 3PL will save
the process values of any cases already scanned.
1 Scan all cases that you are shipping for the pallet. The system will prompt you when you are complete.
2 If you are unable to scan all cases for any reason, press F4 after scanning the last scannable case.
RFOPS screen showing “Scan incomplete” message

where you left off:
to ship quantity: When prompted to short the order line, key in Y for Yes
and press Enter.
If you wish to exit, short the to Key in 4 and press Enter.

ship quantity and create a new Press Enter to acknowledge the “Process Complete”
line for the balance: message.

ues: message.
4 Continue to enter your process values normally in RFOPS.
TRANSFERRING INBOUND PROCESS VALUES TO OUTBOUND ORDERS

If the automatic transfer of inbound process values to outbound orders is activated on your system, the
process values attached to the product will be automatically transferred to the order when you enter or scan in
your order number in RFOPS.
The following restrictions apply to the transfer of process values:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 277

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Picking Waves in RFPK
 You cannot transfer process values if one or more values is missing. For example, if you have five cases
on one full pallet and one of the cases is missing a process value, you cannot transfer the process val-
ues in RFOPS. You must enter the missing catch weight(s) in ENOR and then return to RFOPS to per-
form the transfer.
 You cannot transfer process values if you have two or more inventory entities that are identical. For
example, you have two pallets with the same level 1/2/3 values and you wish to ship out a single pallet.
 Unless you are clearing out all inventory, the quantity being shipped must always equal one full pallet (or
one drum if drum is assigned to the highest SKU class). For example, if you ship in cases, the number of
cases that you ship must equal one full pallet.
Refer to the section “Item Process Values” in the Operations 2 Guide for further information about setting up
this feature.
1 Enter RFOPS.
2 Retrieve the order whose process values you wish to transfer.
The “Barcode values for this order have transferred” message will appear.
RFOPS screen showing “Barcode values for this order have transferred” message
3 Press Enter to acknowledge the message.

4 Press F4 to exit. Your process values are transferred.
You pick your waves in RFPK (RF Wave Pick). Depending on your pick method, you may or may not be
prompted to for a carton size when you close your pallet and prepare to print your labels. You can look up
your carton information in LOCN (Look Up Carton).
FLOWS See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
CASE PICKING See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
PROCESS VALUES See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
SUSP HOLDS See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information.
278 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
MRFP The Outbound Pallet ID Entry at Beginning field in MRFP (RFPIC 2 tab) must
be set to Yes.
WAVE MANAGER You need to run a wave in the Wave Manager.
LABELS You need a wave label set up in DOCU and this label must be attached to the
appropriate customers and consignees in CCDU (Customer / Consignee Doc-
ument Setup).
OTHER See the Wave Manager documentation.
1 Enter RFPK.
RFPK screen
2 Key in your wave number and press Enter.
RFPK screen
3 Key in your equipment code and press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 279

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPK screen showing prompt for pick method
4 Key in the number corresponding to your pick method and press Enter.
RFPK screen showing prompt for outbound pallet ID
5 Enter or scan in your outbound pallet ID.
RFPK screen showing prompt for outbound pallet ID
6 Use your up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of order lines assigned to your outbound pallet
ID. When you find the order line that you wish to pick, press F3 (SL) to select it.
280 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFPK screen showing prompt for from location

8 Enter or scan in your UI.
If your order has multiple

If your order has multiple order lines and you wish to
If your order consists of a order lines and you wish to close the pallet and print the
single order line: pick another line: pallet ID label:
a) Proceed to next step. AccellosOne 3PL will display the AccellosOne 3PL will display the
list of unpicked order lines. list of unpicked order lines.
a) Select the line that you wish to a) Press F4 to exit the list.
pick and repeat steps 6 to 12 b) Proceed to next step.
for that line.
11 Press F1 (Print Label).
RFPK screen showing prompt for printer
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 281

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Relocating Product in RFST

If your labels are generated in are not generated in
AccellosOne 3PL: AccellosOne 3PL: If Label field is populated:
pallet ID. b) If required, key in your printer populated, key in your printer
b) if required, key in your printer code and press Enter. code and press Enter.
code and press Enter.
c) If prompted to validate your
pallet ID, enter or scan it in.
13 Enter or scan in your staging location.

In this program, you can relocate product on an outbound order. The product must be picked and assigned an
outbound pallet ID in an RF picking program before it can be moved.
FLOWS See “Picking Orders in RFPIC” on page 199 for further information for your
outbound flows and other RFPIC requirements.
The order line must be picked in an RF picking program using CASE pick
mode before it can be relocated in RFST.
OTHER There are five possible configuration parameters for RFST that you set up in
MRFP (Miscellaneous tab).
 in the Validate Quantity in Order Move field, you specify whether or not the
operator must enter the quantity being moved
 in the Validate From Location in Order Move field, you specify whether or
not the operator must enter the from location of the product being moved
 in the Location Type of To Location in Order Move field, you specify whether
the to location must be a staging location, a pick location or any location
 in the Allow Multiple Pallet Moves in RFST field, you specify whether or not
the operator can relocate multiple pallets in the same location in a single
step
 in the Suggested Location Rules in RFST field, you define the suggested or
default to location
1 Enter RFST.
282 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFST screen
2 Enter or scan in your order number. Then enter or scan in your OPID number. If your OPID numbers are
unique, you can bypass the order number and enter only the OPID number.
RFST screen showing prompt for quantity
3 If prompted to enter the quantity, key in the total quantity on the pallet and press Enter.
4 If prompted to enter the from location, enter or scan in the from location.
RFST screen showing prompt for to location
5 Enter or scan in your to location.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 283

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Merging OPID’s in RFMG
RFST screen showing confirmation message
6 Key in Y for Yes and press Enter to move the pallet.

7 Press F4 (EX) to exit.
You can merge two or more outbound pallets into a single pallet in RFMG. For example, suppose you pick 10
cases from a location and build an outbound pallet. Later, you pick 25 cases from the same location and build
a second outbound pallet. You now have two partial pallets and wish to merge the two into a single pallet to
save space.
If your order line does NOT have process values such as serial number or weight, you can merge the entire
quantity of a pallet or a partial quantity. However, if your order line has process values such as serial number
or weight, you cannot merge partial quantities. If you do so, all process values attached to the order line will
be deleted.
The following conditions must be met before you can do a pallet merge:
 The product must be picked from the same location.
 If you attach orders to loads in SELO and warehouse attribute 333 is set to 1, the product being merged
must be on the same load and assigned to the same stop and group.
 Hazardous products cannot be merged with non-hazardous products.
 The same item must be kept together whenever possible if the item quantities are partials. For example,
suppose you have three OPID’s on the same order and each OPID represents a partial pallet. If OPID’s
1 and 2 are the same item and OPID 3 is a different item, OPID’s 1 and 2 can be merged, but 1 and 3 (or
2 and 3) cannot be merged because that would put two different items on the same pallet.
There are two merge options that are configurable in MRFP:
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( MI S C E L L A N E O US 2 / 5 TA B)
Allow Merging Orders/ Yes

Items to One OPID Within No
Load (RFMG)
If you select Yes, the RF operator can assign different orders/items to the
same OPID within a given load in RFMG. If you select No, the RF operator
cannot assign different orders/items to the same OPID within a given load in
RFMG.
284 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( MI S C E L L A N E O US 2 / 5 TA B)
Retain OPID To in RFMG Yes

No
If you select Yes, the OPID to value remains displayed on the screen after the
merge so that the RF operator can continue to merge into the same OPID.
MERGING TWO EXISTING OPID’S
1 Enter RFMG.
RF Merge OPID screen
2 Enter or scan in your from OPID.
RFMG screen showing from OPID
3 If there are multiple order lines attached to the same OPID, you can press F1 (LN) to position your cursor
in the from OPID block. Then use your arrow keys to scroll through the orders lines of your from OPID.
When you finish scrolling, press F4 (RT) to return to the to OPID field.
4 Press Enter to accept the full OPID quantity or key in a partial quantity and press Enter.
5 Enter or scan in your to OPID.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 285

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFMG screen showing to OPID and prompt to update
6 Press F3 (UP) to perform the merge.

CREATING A NEW OPID

You can move the full quantity or a partial quantity of an existing OPID to a new OPID that you create in
RFMG. AccellosOne 3PL will create a new order line for the new OPID.
1 Enter RFMG.
RF Merge OPID screen
2 Enter or scan in your from OPID.
RFMG screen showing from OPID
286 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Performing Outbound Audits in RFOA
3 If there are multiple order lines attached to the same OPID, you can press F1 (LN) to position your cursor
in the from OPID block. Then use your arrow keys to scroll through the orders lines of your from OPID.
When you finish scrolling, press F4 (RT) to return to the to OPID field.
4 Press Enter to accept the full OPID quantity or key in a partial quantity and press Enter.
5 Enter or scan in your new OPID.
RFMG screen showing new OPID and prompt to update
6 Press F3 (UP) to perform the merge.

This program allows you to perform an audit of staged product before it is loaded onto the truck. You define
your inventory level for RFOA audits in MRFP. For example, if you select Level 1 in the RFOA Audit Level
field, the RF operator will perform a count for each item on the order. If, on the other hand, you select Level 2,
the RF operator will perform a count for each lot on the order.
If the count matches the order line quantity, the order line will be advanced to the next flow and a time-stamp
will be created indicating that the audit was successful. If the count does not match the order line quantity, an
error message will be displayed and the order line will not be advanced to the next flow.

SUAL (Supervisor Allocated) — optional
STPI (Start Picking)
FIPI (Finish Picking)
special flow for RFOA audit
STLO (Start Loading) — optional
INVENTORY LEV- You can process up to four inventory levels in RFOA.

ELS
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 287

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
OTHER You must define your inventory level for RFOA audits in the RFOA Audit Level
field in MRFP. For example, if you select Level 1 in the RFOA Audit Level field,
the RF operator will perform a count for each item on the order. If, on the other
hand, you select Level 2, the RF operator will perform a count for each lot on the
order.
If you select “Suspend Advancing Flow in Outbound Audit” in MRFP, the order will
NOT be advanced to the next flow even if the operator count matches the order
line quantity.
1 Enter RFOA.
RFOA screen
2 Enter or scan in your staging location.

3 If there are multiple orders at your staging location, press F3 (SL) to select the order that you wish to
audit.
RFOA screen showing prompt for OPID
4 Enter or scan in your OPID.

5 Enter or scan in the required number of inventory levels.
288 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
RFOA screen showing prompt for quantity
6 Key in your quantity and press Enter.

If your audit quantity is NOT

If your audit quantity is correct: correct:
a) Press Enter to acknowledge the a) Press Enter to acknowledge the

message. error message.
b) Re-enter your quantity. If your
quantity is rejected again, press
F4 (RT) to exit.
c) Press Enter to acknowledge the
“Order Incomplete” message.
RFOA screen showing message for completed audit
8 Repeat the above steps for any additional order lines that you wish to audit or press F4 the required num-
ber of times to exit RFOA.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 289

OUTBOUND PROCESSING
Assigning Orders to Loads in SELO
Assigning Orders to Loads in SELO
Refer to the Operations 2 Guide for instructions on using SELO and OLOP.
290 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

MISCELLANEOUS PROCESSING
Relocating Inventory in RFRL ........................................................................ 292
Adjusting Non-Serial Number Inventory in RFAJ ........................................ 301
Adjusting Out Existing Inventory ................................................................ 301
Adjusting In New Inventory ........................................................................ 303
Adjusting In Existing Inventory................................................................... 307
Adjusting In Inventory With a Variable Quantity Breakdown...................... 309
Adjusting Serial Number Inventory in RFAJB .............................................. 310
Adjusting in Inventory................................................................................. 311
Adjusting Out Cases .................................................................................. 313
Adjusting Out Full Pallets ........................................................................... 314
Adjusting Out Cases Using the Remove Command .................................. 315
Recovering From a Lost Connection ......................................................... 317
Merging Inventory in RFMI ............................................................................. 318
Merging Existing Inventory Entities ............................................................ 319
Creating New Inventory Entities................................................................. 322
Adding Extra Charges to a Receipt/Order in RFEC ..................................... 325
Scenario 1 — RF Operator Enters Charge Quantity Only ......................... 325
Scenario 2 — RF Operator Enters Charge Code and Quantity ................. 327
Deleting an Extra Charge........................................................................... 328
Assigning Check Digits to Locations in RFCD............................................. 329
Entering Incidents in RFINC........................................................................... 331
Performing CRM Tasks in RFCE.................................................................... 334
Checking Your Bar Codes in RFBR............................................................... 336
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 291

Relocating Inventory in RFRL
You relocate inventory from one location to another in RFRL. The locations that you specify in a relocate can
be within the same warehouse or belong to different warehouses. You cannot relocate inventory if it is on
order or on receipt.
The following restrictions apply to RFRL:
 You cannot relocate product that is on an open order or receipt.
 Relocating inventory does not take into account the location’s capacity. You can move inventory into a
location that is considered “full”.
 If the product is on non-breakable hold, you must relocate all product in the location; you cannot relocate
partial quantities.
If you wish to relocate product to a pick line location, you must set the Validation Rules for Relocate to Pick
Line flag in MRFP to either 2 (Allow operator to proceed) or 3 (Omit validation of location).
ALLOCATION If you want AccellosOne 3PL to select the best possible to location for a reloca-
tion based on your directed move stock parameters in ILOP, you must set the
Allow Directed Move in RF Relocate flag in MRFP to Yes.
See the Allocation and Wave Manager Guide for further information on setting up
directed moves.
OTHER If you want the operator to be forced to validate the from location in a relocation,
you must set the Picklist Rules in RF Relocate flag in MRFP to the appropriate
value.
If you want relocation quantity to be displayed, you must set the Display From
Relocation Quantity in RF Relocate flag in MRFP to Yes.
FUNCTION KEYS
Criteria Mode

criteria that you specify in Criteria Mode.
F3 CQ (Count Query) Counts the number of records that meet

the criteria that you specify in Criteria
Mode.
F4 RM (Return to Main) Switch to Main Mode.
292 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FUNCTION KEYS
Results Mode
F1 EC (Enter Criteria) Switch to Criteria Mode.
F3 LB (Location Block) Positions your cursor in the From Location

field after pressing F4 (IN) to position your
cursor in the Customer field.
F3 PR (Process Relocate) Performs the relocation.
F4 IN (Inventory) Positions your cursor in the Customer field

so that you can scroll through the list of
records retrieved in your query.
RELOCATING INVENTORY (OPERATOR SELECTS TO LOCATION)
1 Enter RFRL.
RF — Relocate
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 293

If you wish to query by inventory

If you wish to query by UI value: level:
a) Key in your UI value and press a) Enter or scan in your customer

Enter. code.
b) Enter or scan in your item code.
c) If required, enter or scan in your
level 2, 3 and 4 values.
d) Press F2 to query.
3 The system will display the number of inventory records that meet the level 1, 2, 3 and 4 criteria that you
specified.
Number of records
for this inventory
entity
RFRL screen showing one record for item A2, lot 101
294 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If you do NOT know your from

If you know your from location: location:
a) Key in your from location and a) Press F10 to enter the pick list,
press Enter. then F2 to perform your query.
 AccellosOne 3PL will display all locations
containing the product that you specified.
RFRL screen showing avail-

able locations
b) Use your arrow keys to position

your cursor beside the location
containing the product that you
wish to move.
c) Press F3 to select the location.
The system will return you to the
main RFRL screen.
RFRL screen showing prompt for quantity
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 295

If the QTY field is populated: If the QTY field is blank:
a) If you wish to relocate all product a) Key in the quantity that you wish
in the location, proceed to the to relocate and press Enter.
next step. If you wish to relocate
a portion of the product in the
location, press F9 to position
your cursor in the QTY field.
Then key in your relocation
quantity and press Enter.
5 Enter or scan in your to location.

6 If required, enter or scan in your to warehouse.
7 Press F3 to process the relocate.
8 Perform another relocate or press F4 the required number of times to exit.
RELOCATING INVENTORY (DIRECTED MOVE SYSTEM ACTIVATED)

There are two options for overriding the system-assigned location for a relocation depending on your setup in
MRFP (RF Profile):
 if the Supvr. Must Authorize Location Override in RFCH/RFPU/RFRL flag in MRFP is set to No, an oper-
ator can change a location without authorization of a supervisor
 if the Supvr. Must Authorize Location Override in RFCH/RFPU/RFRL flag in MRFP is set to Yes, chang-
ing a location must be approved by a supervisor
1 Enter RFRL.
RF — Relocate
296 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If you wish to query by inventory

If you wish to query by UI value: level:
a) Key in your UI value and press a) Enter or scan in your customer

Enter. code.
b) Enter or scan in your item code.
c) If required, enter or scan in your
level 2, 3 and 4 values.
d) Press F2 to query.
3 The system will display the number of inventory records that meet the level 1, 2, 3 and 4 criteria that you
specified.
Number of records
for this inventory
entity
RFRL screen showing six records for item A2, lot 101
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 297

If you do NOT know your from

If you know your from location: location:
a) Key in your from location and a) Press F10 to enter the pick list,
press Enter. then F2 to perform your query.
 AccellosOne 3PL will display all locations
containing the product that you specified.
RFRL screen showing avail-

able locations
b) Use your arrow keys to position

your cursor beside the location
containing the product that you
wish to move.
c) Press F3 to select the location.
The system will return you to the
main RFRL screen.
RFRL screen showing prompt for quantity
298 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If the QTY field is populated: If the QTY field is blank:
a) If you wish to relocate all product a) Key in the quantity that you wish
in the location, proceed to the to relocate and press Enter.
next step. If you wish to relocate
a portion of the product in the
location, press F9 to position
your cursor in the QTY field.
Then key in your relocation
quantity and press Enter.
RFRL screen showing location assigned by system
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 299

If you accept the system- If you wish to change the

assigned location: system-assigned location:
a) Scan in your location to confirm a) Key in a new location for the

it. relocated product and press
Enter. The following message
will appear:
b) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter

to proceed with the location over-
ride. If you do not wish to pro-
ceed with the override, key in N
for No and press Enter to return
to the main RFRL screen.
c) If you enter Y for Yes to proceed
with the relocation and if a super-
visor’s authorization is required
to override the location, the fol-
lowing screen will appear:
d) Have a supervisor log in to

6 Press F3 to process the relocate.

7 Perform another relocate or press F4 the required number of times to exit.
300 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Adjusting Non-Serial Number Inventory in RFAJ
You can adjust in and adjust out non-serial number inventory in RFAJ without the need to enter ENAJ (Enter
Adjustment). In RFAJ you can perform most of the functions supported in ENAJ including:
 querying by any inventory level
 entering positive and negative adjustments for existing inventory
 creating new inventory
When adjusting existing inventory, you can enter either partial or full amounts of an inventory entity. When
creating new inventory, you can specify a hold code, enter a variable quantity breakdown (if this feature is
activated in ITEM) and enter an expiry date (if expiry date entry is activated in ITSH).
RFAJ does not support adjustment transfers, changes to an item’s quantity breakdown or changes to a level
2/3/4 description. These functions must be performed in ENAJ.
FUNCTION KEYS
Main Mode
F2 QU (Query) Allows you to query inventory.
Results Mode
F2 CM (Change Mode) Allows you to switch modes; from adjust in

to adjust out and vice versa.
F3 PR (Process) Processes the adjustment.
ADJUSTING OUT EXISTING INVENTORY
1 Enter RFAJ.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 301

RFAJ screen
2 Enter your UI or inventory levels and press Enter. If the same inventory is found in multiple locations, you
must enter or scan in your location.
If you do not know the UI or inventory levels of the inventory that you wish to adjust out, press Enter twice
to position your cursor in the L1 field. Then enter the inventory level(s) that you know and press F2 (QU).
When AccellosOne 3PL retrieves the list of query results, use your up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the list.
RFAJ screen showing adjust out mode
3 If the inventory has been assigned multiple locations, use your up and down arrow keys to find the loca-
tion that you want to adjust out. The press Enter to accept it.
4 Enter or scan in your location.
5 Key in your adjust out quantity as a negative (for example, -1 or
-1PLT) and press Enter. If the item has multiple SKU’s in its quantity breakdown and you do not specify
a SKU, AccellosOne 3PL will use the item’s lowest SKU.
302 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFAJ screen showing adjust out quantity
6 Press F3 (PR) to process the adjustment.

ADJUSTING IN NEW INVENTORY

New inventory is inventory that has never been received in the warehouse before. That is, at least one of the
item’s inventory levels is new.
1 Enter RFAJ.
RFAJ screen

4 Enter or scan in your item. If the same item is attached to two or more customers, press F3 (SL) to select
the appropriate customer/item from the pick list.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 303

RFAJ screen showing prompt for level 2 value
5 Enter the remaining inventory levels of the inventory that you wish to adjust in.
RFAJ screen showing prompt to process
6 If you wish to place the adjust in inventory on hold, press F1 (HD). Then key in your hold code and press
Enter.
7 Press F3 (PR) to process.
RFAJ screen showing prompt for location
304 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If the location that you enter If the location that you enter
does NOT match the location in does match the location in step
step 3: 3:
a) The following message will a) Proceed to next step.

appear:
Prompt to accept change in

location
b) If the location is correct, key in Y

for Yes and press Enter to accept
it. Otherwise, press Enter to
reject it.
RFAJ screen showing prompt for adjustment quantity
9 Key in your adjust in quantity (for example, 1 or 1PLT) and press Enter. If the item has multiple SKU’s in
its quantity breakdown and you do not specify a SKU, AccellosOne 3PL will use the item’s lowest SKU.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 305

RFAJ screen showing adjustment in quantity

If manual entry of expiry dates is If manual entry of expiry dates is

activated for the item: NOT activated for the item:
a) The following window will a) Proceed to next step.

appear:
b) Key in your expiry date in the for-

mat displayed on your screen
and press Enter.
c) If the expiry date is correct, key

in Y for Yes and press Enter.
Otherwise, press Enter to return
to the date screen and re-enter it.
12 Press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX).
306 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

ADJUSTING IN EXISTING INVENTORY

If the inventory that you wish to adjust in is already in the warehouse, you must change your mode from
“adjust out” to “adjust in”.
1 Enter RFAJ.
RFAJ screen

3 Enter or scan in your item. If the same item is attached to two or more customers, press F3 (SL) to select
the appropriate customer/item from the pick list.
RFAJ screen showing prompt for level 2 value
4 Enter the remaining inventory levels of the inventory that you wish to adjust in.
RFAJ screen showing adjust out mode
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 307

5 Press F2 (CM).
RFAJ screen showing prompt to adjust in inventory

7 If you wish to place the adjust in inventory on hold, press F1 (HD). Then key in your hold code and press
Enter.
8 Press F3 (PR) to process.
RFAJ screen showing prompt for location
RFAJ screen showing prompt for adjustment quantity
10 If the location that you entered in the previous step does not match the location in step 3, the following
message will display:
308 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFAJ screen showing prompt to accept change in location
If the location is correct, key in Y for Yes and press Enter to accept it. Otherwise, press Enter to reject it.
11 Key in your adjust in quantity (for example, 1 or 1PLT) and press Enter. If the item has multiple SKU’s in
its quantity breakdown and you do not specify a SKU, AccellosOne 3PL will use the item’s lowest SKU.
RFAJ screen showing adjustment in quantity

13 Press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX).
ADJUSTING IN INVENTORY WITH A VARIABLE QUANTITY BREAKDOWN

If you are adjusting in inventory with a variable quantity breakdown, you will be prompted to enter the quantity
breakdown. You can either press Enter to accept the system default or key in a new quantity breakdown and
press Enter.
RFAJ screen showing prompt for adjusting quantity breakdown
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 309

Adjusting Serial Number Inventory in RFAJB
You can adjust in and adjust out serial number inventory in RFAJB. RFAJB performs the adjustment to
inventory and the bar code validation at same time. It can only be used with unique serial numbers.
You can adjust in inventory when the serial number has never been received or is on a confirmed order. If
required, adjusted in inventory can be placed on hold. You can adjust out inventory when the serial number
has been received and is not picked. If a case is on a full pallet and all cases are available, you can adjust out
a full pallet by scanning in a single case.
RFAJB can also recover from a lost connection. When a connection is dropped, you can either finish the
current transaction or continue to adjust in or adjust out more cases.
INVENTORY LEV- RFAJB requires a three-level account.

ELS
PROCESS VAL- You require two process values: one for catch weights and one for serial num-
UES bers. These codes must be set up in IPRO (Item Process) as follows:
Transfer Value to Inventory = Yes

Create Automatic Records = Yes
Allow Duplicates = Yes for your catch weight value and No for your serial num-
ber value
Then attach your process values to a profile in IPRP (Item Process Profile). The
IPRP profile must in turn be attached to the item(s) requiring the process values.
SCAN PARAME- You need a scan parameter profile defined in SCPR (Scan Parameter Code).
TER CODE This profile must contain a minimum of three records in the Detail Block: one
record for your scanned in weight, a second record for your scanned in serial
number and a third record for your scanned in inventory level 1 value. The SCPR
profile must in turn be attached to the item requiring the process values.
BAR CODE PRO- You must define a bar code profile in BAPR and attach to it the scan parameter
FILE code that you set up in SCPR.
OTHER You need a default adjustment code in ATMP (Action Template Setup) for each
company/customer combination. If a single default adjustment code for all cus-
tomers in all companies, you can use the .ALL codes for both customer and com-
pany.
310 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FUNCTION KEYS
All Modes
F1 PLT (Pallet) Allows you to adjust out a full pallet.
F2 RM (Remove) Allows you to remove a previously

scanned case.
F3 PR (Process) Displays the quantity validation screen.
ADJUSTING IN INVENTORY
You can adjust in inventory when the serial number has never been received or the product is on a confirmed
order.
1 Enter RFAJB.
RFAJB screen

3 Enter or scan in your bar code of the first case to adjust in.
4 If there are multiple bar code profile codes for the inventory, position your cursor over the correct profile
and press F3 (SL) to select it.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 311

RFAJB screen showing adjust in message
5 Repeat the above step for each additional case that you wish to adjust in.
6 If you make a mistake and wish to “unscan” a scanned case, press F2 (RM). Then rescan the case to be
removed from the adjustment.
7 When you finish scanning the cases to be adjusted in, press F3 (PR).
RFAJB screen showing quantity validation
8 Key in the number of cases to be adjusted in and press Enter.

9 Enter or scan in your level 2/3/4 values. If you wish to apply a hold code to the new inventory, press F2
(HL) before entering you lowest inventory level. Then key in your hold code and press Enter. Lastly, enter
your remaining inventory levels.
10 If the adjusted in inventory has already been received, the following message will appear.
RFAJB screen showing warning that serial number has already been received
312 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If you accept the re-received If you reject the re-received

inventory: inventory:
a) Key in 1 and press Enter. a) Key in 2 and press Enter.

b) Re-enter the required inventory
level.
ADJUSTING OUT CASES

You can adjust out cases if the serial number has been received and is not picked.
1 Enter RFAJB.
RFAJB screen

3 Enter or scan in your bar code of the first case to adjust out.
RFAJB screen showing adjust out message
5 Repeat the above step for each additional case that you wish to adjust out.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 313

6 If you make a mistake and wish to “unscan” a scanned case, press F2 (RM). Then rescan the case to be
removed from the adjustment.
7 When you finish scanning the cases to be adjusted out, press F3 (PR).
8 Key in the number of cases to be adjusted out and press Enter.

9 Press F4 to exit.
ADJUSTING OUT FULL PALLETS

You can adjust out full pallets if the serial number has been received, all cases are available and no cases
have been picked.
1 Enter RFAJB.
RFAJB screen

3 Enter or scan in the bar code of any case on the pallet.
314 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

5 Press F1 (PLT).
RFAJB screen showing confirmation prompt

7 Press F3 (PR).
8 Key in the total number of cases on the pallet and press Enter.
9 Press F4 to exit.
ADJUSTING OUT CASES USING THE REMOVE COMMAND

If you wish to adjust out the majority of cases on a pallet (for example, a pallet holds 50 cases and you wish to
adjust out 45), you can use the Remove command. The Remove command allows you to scan in only the
cases NOT to be adjusted out rather than each case to be adjusted out.
1 Enter RFAJB.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 315


3 Enter or scan in the bar code of any case on the pallet.
4 Press F1 (PLT).
RFAJB screen showing confirmation prompt

6 Press F2 (RM).
RFAJB screen showing remove prompt

8 Repeat the above two steps for each additional case that you wish to remove.
9 When you finish removing your cases, press F3 (PR).
316 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

10 Key in the total number of cases being adjusted out — that is, the number of cases on the pallet that you
did NOT scan — and press Enter.
For example, if your pallet quantity breakdown is 20 cases per pallet and you use the Remove command
to remove five cases, your adjust out quantity will be 15 (20 -5).
RECOVERING FROM A LOST CONNECTION

If you lose your RF connection and re-enter RFAJB, you will be prompted to either finish the existing
adjustment or continue to add more cases to your adjustment in/adjustment out.
1 Enter RFAJB.
RFAJB screen showing lost connection message
If you wish to finish the existing If you wish to add more cases to
adjustment: your adjustment:
a) Key in 1 and press Enter. a) Key in 2 and press Enter.

b) Press F3 (PR) to confirm the b) Continue to add new cases.
count. c) Complete the adjustment in the
c) Complete the adjustment in the normal manner.
normal manner.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 317

Merging Inventory in RFMI
You can merge and transfer inventory entities in RFMI. You use RFMI when you wish to consolidate two
partial pallets into a single PID or you wish to correct an incorrect inventory level. For example, you received
product under lot number 101, which is wrong, and you want to transfer the product to lot number 102, which
is the correct lot number. Lot 102 can be either an existing lot number or a new lot number created by the
operator in RFMI.
The following requirements must be met before you can merge/transfer inventory in RFMI:
 the product belongs to the same customer
 the customer is billed at the lowest inventory level in DILP
 the product is NOT on an open order or receipt
If you have assigned process values to your product and if you are merging or transferring a full pallet, no
scanning of process values is required as the values are transferred automatically. If, however, you are
working with less than a full pallet, process values must be individually scanned.
SCAN PARAME- If you use process values to capture catch weights and serial numbers, you need
TER CODE a scan parameter profile defined in SCPR (Scan Parameter Code). This profile
must contain a minimum of three records in the Detail Block: one record for your
scanned in weight, a second record for your scanned in serial number and a third
record for your scanned in inventory level 1 value. The SCPR profile must in turn
be attached to the item requiring the process values.
INVENTORY LEV- You can merge inventory entities at inventory levels other than the lowest (PID)
ELS by setting the Allow Merging Up To Level (RFMG) field in MRFP to the appropri-
ate value: Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3.
INVENTORY If your inventory entities have inventory attributes set up in IAPR (Inventory Attri-
ATTRIBUTES butes Profile Code), you cannot perform a merge unless there is an exact match
of attributes (you can deactivate this condition by selecting the Allow RF Merge
flag in IAPR).
VARIABLE QUAN- The Base for Cube/Weight flag in ITEM must be set to Y for Yes for the lowest
TITY BREAK- SKU.
DOWN
INVENTORY
OTHER You need a default adjustment code in ATMP (Action Template Setup) for each
company/customer combination. If a single default adjustment code applies to all
customers in all companies, you can use the .ALL codes for both customer and
company.
318 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

ATMP screen showing default adjustment code for all companies and custom-
ers
MERGING EXISTING INVENTORY ENTITIES

When you merge two existing inventory entities, AccellosOne 3PL will apply the following logic to renewal
storage and expiry calculations:
 billing will use the oldest date as the next renewal date
 the oldest expiry date will be assumed for the merged inventory
1 Enter RFMI.
RFMI screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 319

If you know the UI of the adjust in If you do NOT know the UI value
inventory: of the adjust in inventory:
a) Enter or scan in the UI of your a) Press Enter to bypass the UI

adjust in inventory. field.
b) For example, if you are transfer- b) Key in the location code and/or
ring pallet ID 102 to pallet ID 101, inventory levels of your adjust in
pallet ID 101 will be your adjust inventory and press F2 (QU).
in inventory. c) For example, if you are transfer-
c) If the UI that you entered exists ring pallet ID 102 to pallet ID 101,
in multiple locations, key in your pallet ID 101 will be your adjust
location code and press Enter. in inventory.
d) If AccellosOne 3PL retrieves
multiple inventory records, use
your arrow keys to select the
inventory entity that you wish to
transfer in.
RFMI screen showing adjust in inventory
3 Press F3 (PR) to display the adjust out screen.
RFMI screen showing adjust out screen
320 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If you know the UI of the adjust If you do NOT know the UI value
out inventory: of the adjust out inventory:

adjust out inventory. field.
ring pallet ID 102 to pallet ID 101, inventory levels of your adjust
pallet ID 102 will be your adjust out inventory and press F2 (QU).
out inventory. c) For example, if you are transfer-
location code and press Enter. out inventory.
transfer out.
5 If the inventory entity that you entered in the previous step is found in multiple locations, use your arrow
keys to select the correct record.
6 Key in your adjustment quantity as a negative value and press Enter.
RFMI screen showing adjust out quantity of -3C
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 321

RFMI screen showing prompt for total number of cases
8 If you want to place the merged inventory on hold, press F9 to position your cursor in the H field. Then
key in your hold code and press Enter.
9 Key in the total number of cases and press Enter. For example, if you are merging 5 cases of pallet ID
101 with 10 cases of pallet ID, your total number of cases will be 15 (5 + 10).
CREATING NEW INVENTORY ENTITIES

You can transfer an existing inventory entity to a new entity created in RFMI.
1 Enter RFMI.
RFMI screen
2 Enter or scan in the UI of your new inventory entity.
322 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFMI screen showing adjust in inventory
3 Press F3 (PR) to display the adjust out screen.
If you know the UI of the adjust If you do NOT know the UI value
out inventory: of the adjust out inventory:

adjust out inventory. field.
ring pallet ID 102 to pallet ID 101, inventory levels of your adjust
pallet ID 102 will be your adjust out inventory and press F2 (QU).
out inventory. c) For example, if you are transfer-
location code and press Enter. out inventory.
transfer out.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 323

5 Key in your adjustment quantity as a negative value and press Enter.
RFMI screen showing adjust out quantity of -1 PLT 3 CASE
RFMI screen showing prompt for total number of cases
7 If you want to place the new inventory on hold, press F9 to position your cursor in the H field. Then key in
your hold code and press Enter.
8 Enter or scan in the location of the new inventory.
324 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Adding Extra Charges to a Receipt/Order in RFEC
If RF entry of extra charges is activated in ECHP, you can add extra charges to receipts or orders in the stand-
alone program RFEC. You can also add extra charges to receipts or order in RFCH (receipts only) or RFPIC
(orders only).
The entry of extra charges in RFEC/RFCH/RFPIC is strictly optional. You can press F4 at any time to exit the
program without entering an extra charge.
There are two possible scenarios for extra charge entry in RFEC: you can select your extra charge(s) from a
predefined list or you can manually enter them.
FLOWS The receipt or order must be at the flow set up for extra charge entry in ECHP. If
the Flow Process Code (FLPR) for RF field in ECHP is blank, you can add extra
charges to a receipt or order at any flow.
OTHER See “Extra Charge Setup for RF” on page 81
There are two flags in ECHP that govern extra charge entry in RF: Allow RF Entry and Allow Override of
Charge Quantity in RF. If both flags are set to N for No, extra charge entry in RF is deactivated.
SCENARIO 1 — RF OPERATOR ENTERS CHARGE QUANTITY ONLY

Allow RF Entry (ECHP) = No
Allow Override of Charge Quantity in RF (ECHP) = Yes
In this scenario, the RF operator can select one or more extra charges from a predefined list and can enter
any charge quantity for the selected charge(s).
1 Enter RFEC.
RFEC screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 325

2 Key in I for Inbound or O for Outbound and press Enter.

3 Key in your document number and press Enter.
RFEC screen showing two possible extra charges
4 If you change your mind and do not wish to add an extra charge to the receipt or order, press F4 (RT) and
F4 (EX) to exit RFEC.
5 If there are multiple extra charges in RFEC, use your arrow keys to scroll up and down the list until you
find the extra charge that you wish to add.
6 Key in your charge quantity and press Enter. A charge quantity of zero means no extra charge for the
receipt or order.
RFEC screen showing prompt to confirm the change to the charge quantity
If you wish to confirm the change If you wish to cancel your

to the charge quantity: change:
a) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter. a) Press Enter to accept the default
value of No.
8 Repeat the previous steps for each additional extra charge that you wish to add to the receipt or order.
9 When you finish adding your extra charges, press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX) to exit.
326 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

SCENARIO 2 — RF OPERATOR ENTERS CHARGE CODE AND QUANTITY

Allow RF Entry (ECHP) = Yes
Allow Override of Charge Quantity in RF (ECHP) = Yes
In this scenario, the RF operator must manually enter his or her extra charges (if any) and can enter any
charge quantity for the entered charges.
1 Enter RFEC.
RFEC screen

RFEC screen showing prompt to enter RF extra charges
If you wish to add an extra If you do NOT wish to add an

charge: extra charge:
a) Press Enter to continue. a) Key in N for No to exit.

b) Proceed to next step. b) END OF PROCEDURE
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 327

RFEC screen showing prompt to enter charge
5 Key in your charge code and press Enter.
RFEC screen showing prompt to enter charge quantity
6 Key in your charge quantity and press Enter. If you press Enter to accept the default quantity of zero, no
extra charge will be created for the receipt or order.
7 Repeat the previous steps for each additional extra charge that you wish to add to the receipt or order.
8 When “RF Charges Completed” message appears, press Enter to acknowledge it.
DELETING AN EXTRA CHARGE

You delete an extra charge in RFEC by setting its charge quantity to zero. The following conditions must be
met before you can perform a deletion:
 the receipt or order’s flow has not been advanced
 the Allow Override of Charge Quantity in RF flag in ECHP has been set to Yes
1 Enter RFEC.
328 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Assigning Check Digits to Locations in RFCD

4 If there are multiple extra charges in RFEC, use your arrow keys to scroll up and down the list until you
find the extra charge that you wish to delete.
5 In the QTY field, key in zero and press Enter.
6 When prompted to confirm the change to the charge quantity, key in Y for Yes and press Enter.
7 Press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX) to exit.
You can define check digits for your locations and require RF operators to scan in this check digit from a label
attached to the location whenever they work in RFRL, RFPU, RFPIC and RFRP. The purpose of check digit
scanning is to ensure that the RF operator physically went to the location to scan it rather than manually
entering any location at the dock.
You can use the program RFCD (RF Check Digit) to assign a check digit to an individual location or to a range
of locations. If your locations already have check digits, you can use RFCD to update them.
You use the “%” character as a wildcard when you wish to update a range of locations.
TIP You can look up and update location check digits in LOCA (Locations). How-
ever, unlike RFCD LOCA does not allow you to update a range of locations in a single
step.
WAREHOUSE AND Check digit scanning must be activated in WARE by selecting the Manual Check
LOCATION FOR- Digit 1 option in the Voice Check Digit Usage field.
MAT
1 Enter RFCD.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 329

RFCD screen
If you wish to assign a check If you wish to assign the same

digit to a single location: check digit to multiple locations:
a) Key in your location code and a) Use the %” character as a wild-

press Enter. card. For example, enter A1% to
for all locations starting with the
characters A1 or A1%1B for all
locations starting with the char-
acters A1 and ending with the
characters 1B.
RFCD screen showing 12 records retrieved
AccellosOne 3PL will retrieve all locations whose code matches the search criteria that you entered. If
there is currently a check digit assigned to the location(s) retrieved, it will display in the Check Digit field.
330 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Entering Incidents in RFINC
If your query retrieved a singe If your query retrieved multiple If you used the wildcard “%” in
location: locations: your query:
a) Proceed to next step. a) If required, you can use your a) If required, you can use your
up and down arrow keys to up and down arrow keys to
scroll through the list of loca- scroll through the list of loca-
tions to be updated. tions to be updated.
b) Press Enter to position your b) Press Enter to display the fol-
cursor in the Check Digit field. lowing message:
c) Press Enter to acknowledge

the message and position
your cursor in the Check Digit
field.
4 Key in your new check digit over the existing check digit (if any) and press Enter. When you press Enter,
all records that you retrieved in RFCD are updated with the new check digit.
5 Press F4 twice to exit RFCD.
You can track ad-hoc labor activities that occur while working in RF in RFINC (RF Incidents). For example, a
pallet is poorly stacked and falls over, a battery change is required for a forklift or a worker goes on break. If
required, you can invoice the activity to a customer and add a free-text comment.
The elapsed time of the incident is tracked by comparing the start time to the end time; that is, the time that
the incident was opened versus the time that you exit RFINC.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 331

RFINC can be run directly from the menu or can be initiated from RFPIC, RFPU. RFCH and RFRL by
pressing the F5 function key.
CUSTOMER RELA- If the incident’s job type in JBTP is attached to a CRM code, RFINC will create a
TIONSHIP MAN- CRME record for the incident.
AGEMENT
See the labor tracking section of the Operations 2 Guide for further informa-
tion on job types.
BILLING If an incident’s job type in JBTP is attached to a charge code and you select the
invoice to customer option, RFINC will create an accessorial charge for the inci-
dent.
See the labor tracking section of the Operations 2 Guide for further informa-
tion on job types.
MESSAGES Message codes must be set up in MESS.
1 Enter RFINC.
RFINC screen
2 Press F3 (PL) to display the job type pick list.
332 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFINC screen showing job type pick list
3 Use your up and down arrow keys to position the cursor over the job type that you wish to select. Then
press F3 (SL) to select it.
4 Key in the quantity of product involved in the incident and press Enter.
5 Key in the quantity's SKU code and press Enter.
RFINC screen showing quantity of one pallet
If you wish to charge for the If you do NOT wish to charge for
incident: the incident:
a) Press F9 to position your cursor a) Proceed to next step.

in the Invoice to Cust field.
b) Key in Y for Yes and press Enter.
c) Key in your customer code and
press Enter or use the pick list
function to select your customer.
7 Key in your message code for the incident and press Enter or use the pick list function to select your
message code.
8 If your job type is attached to a CRM code, you can key in free-text comment in the Comment field. This
comment will appear in the Description field of CRME.
9 When you finish entering your incident, press F1 (PR) to process.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 333

Performing CRM Tasks in RFCE
RFINC screen showing system-generated incident number
If a CRM (Customer Relationship Management) task has been assigned to you in CRME (CRM Entry), you
will be prompted to perform the task whenever you log on to RF or exit an RF program. You can also access
your CRM tasks directly in the program RFCE (RF CRM Entry).
CRM tasks remain assigned to you until you close them. When you close a CRM task, you can add a free-text
comment to it or you can close the task without adding a comment.
CRM entry in RF does not support labor tracking.
1 Enter RFCE.
RFCE screen showing three CRM tasks assigned to RF operator
334 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

If you wish to scroll through the

list of CRM tasks: If you wish to perform a query:
a) Using your arrow keys, select the a) Press F1 (EQ).

CRM task that you wish to work b) Key in your query word or phrase
on and press F3 (SL). and press Enter.
c) If your query retrieves more than
one record, use your arrow keys
to select the task that you wish to
work on and press F3 (SL).
RFCE screen showing details for CRM
If you wish to close the CRM

If you wish to add a comment task without adding a If you wish to exit without
before closing the CRM task: comment: closing the CRM task:
a) Key in your comment and a) Press F3 (PR) to process the a) Press F4 (EX) to exit without
press Enter. task. closing the CRM task.
b) When prompted to close the b) When prompted to close the
task, key in Y for Yes and task, key in Y for Yes and
press Enter. press Enter.
c) Press Enter to continue when c) Press Enter to continue when
the CRM Closed message the CRM Closed message
appears. appears.
4 Press F4 (EX) to exit RFCE.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 335

Checking Your Bar Codes in RFBR
Checking Your Bar Codes in RFBR
This program allows you to scan in any bar code to find out the number of empty spaces between each
segment. Empty spaces are indicated by hyphens.
1 Enter RFBR.
RFBR screen
2 Scan in your bar code.
RFBR screen showing embedded spaces indicated by hyphen
3 Press F4 (RT)
336 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

VOICE-ACTIVATED PICKING AND ORDER
ASSIGNMENT SYSTEM
Overview .......................................................................................................... 338
Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking .............................................................. 338
Setting Up Your Voice Profile in VOPR ..................................................... 338
Setting Up Your Voice Profile (Customer) in VOPC .................................. 341
Setting Up Your Task Profile in REGI ........................................................ 344
Setting Up Your RF Operators in RFOP .................................................... 345
Setting Up Your Check Digit Parameters in WARE (Optional) .................. 345
Setting Up Your Check Digit Parameters in WARE (Optional) .................. 345
Assigning Check Digits to Locations in LOCA ........................................... 346
Setting Up Your Reason Codes in REAS .................................................. 348
Activating Your Voice Terminals in MHEC................................................. 349
Picking Orders in RFPV.................................................................................. 351
Assigning RF Operators to Orders in RFOT................................................. 354
Assigning RF Operators to Orders and Order Lines .................................. 354
Assigning RF Operators to Loads .............................................................. 357
Assigning RF Operators to Pick Methods .................................................. 359
Removing an Operator Assignment ........................................................... 359
Clearing Work Assignments in CTPA ........................................................... 360
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 337

VOICE-ACTIVATED PICKING AND ORDER ASSIGNMENT SYSTEM
Overview
Overview
Voice-activated picking using Vocollect Voice allows you to perform easy, hands-free picking. You can set up
voice profiles defining various Vocollect Voice options and attach these profiles to task profiles that define
which customers, carriers, consignees, items, orders, locations and warehouses can be picked. If required,
voice-directed picking can be combined with scanning when certain inventory levels are too long to be
spoken.
You can also define voice operator overrides that temporarily override an operator’s standard task profiles in
order to perform work that is particularly urgent.
The order assignment system allows you to assign specific orders and/or order lines to specific operators and
define a picking sequence for each order. When the designated operator enters RFPIC, only orders assigned
to that operator will display in the pick list. If required, an operator can cancel order assignments in RFPIC;
when this happens, the order line appears in the pick list of all RF operators.
The order assignment system shares two voice-activated picking programs — RFOP and RFOT — but does
not use voice profiles defined in VOPR and VOPC.
Setting Up Voice-Activated Picking
There are up to eight setup programs for voice-activated picking:

 VOPR (Voice Profile)
 VOPC (Voice Profile - Customer)
 REGI (Task Profile)
 RFOP (RF Operator)
 WARE (Warehouses and Location Format)
 LOCA (Locations)
 REAS (Reason Code)
 MHEC (Material Handling Equipment Code)
There are two voice profiles in voice-activated picking: VOPR and VOPC. VOPR defines properties that are
specific to particular task profiles and operators, while VOPC defines properties that are specific to particular
customers.
SETTING UP YOUR VOICE PROFILE IN VOPR

In this program, you define your voice profiles. A voice profile is a user-defined code that identifies a number
of Vocollect Voice options or properties. When you attach this code to a task profile in REGI and then attach
the task profile to an operator in RFOP, the properties that you define in VOPR will be assigned to the
operator.
You can create a single voice profile for all operators or you can create multiple voice profiles and assign
them to the appropriate task profiles and operators.
In VOPR, you define the following properties:
 whether or not the operator requests work or the system assigns it automatically
 which inventory level(s) the operator will hear for each pick
338 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

 whether or not the operator will be prompted with the delivery location
 the number of digits in a work ID
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Voice Profile Code Mandatory
Your voice profile code.
The description for your voice profile code.
Auto-Assign Options Operator requests work

System assigns operator assignment
If you select Operator requests work, the operator will be prompted to read out
the order number that he or she wishes to pick. If you select System assigns
operator assignment, assignments are automatically assigned to operators
and no order number is required.
Inventory Level Prompt No Inventory Levels

Level 1 Only
Level 2 Only
Level 3 Only
Level 4 Only
Level 1, 2, etc.
In this field, you specify which inventory levels (if any) the operator will hear
from Vocollect Voice for each pick.
Delivery Location Prompt with delivery location

Prompt with and confirm delivery location
In this property, you specify whether or not you want AccellosOne 3PL to
prompt the operator for the delivery or staging location and whether or not you
want the operator to confirm the delivery or staging location.
If the order has been assigned an appointment, AccellosOne 3PL will use the
appointment’s door/location as the delivery location. If the order has NOT
been assigned an appointment, AccellosOne 3PL will use the staging location
in the operator’s task profile.
The operator can override the delivery location by saying “override”. The sys-
tem will ask him or her for a new location. From that time on, the new location
will be used for the next delivery until the operator overrides it again.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 339

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Work ID Length The number of digits in a work ID. If an operator provides a work ID with fewer
than this number of digits, it will be rejected by AccellosOne 3PL.
If you enter the value -1, the operator must provide the entire work ID number.
Assignment Message If populated, this field will be read out to the voice operator for each assign-
ment that he or she is going to work on. This is the default message. It will not
be read out if there are higher level assignment messages that replace the
VOPR default message. There are four possible higher level assignment mes-
sages:
1) pallet code description will be read out if a pallet code is attached to the
CONS record for the order
2) message code description will be read out or added to the above if a mes-
sage code is attached to the CONS record for the order
3) message code description will be read out or added to the above if a mes-
sage code is attached to the order header
4) appointment time and door number will be read out or added to the above
if an appointment is attached to the load of the order
1 Enter VOPR.
VOPR screen
2 Click on Create.
340 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

5 Click on Save.
6 Proceed to select the appropriate option for each property by either selecting the option from a dropdown
list or by keying in a value.
7 When you finish selecting your properties, click on Save.
8 Click on Exit to exit VOPR.
SETTING UP YOUR VOICE PROFILE (CUSTOMER) IN VOPC

In this program, you define your customer-based voice profiles. A customer-based voice profile is a user-
defined code that identifies a number of Vocollect Voice options or properties. When you attach this code to a
customer in CUST, the properties that you define in VOPC will be assigned to that customer.
In VOPC, you define the following properties:
 whether or not you want AccellosOne 3PL to state a given inventory level before each pick
 whether or not you want the operator to read back the inventory level as confirmation
 whether or not cycle counting is activated and the rules to follow when the inventory count by the opera-
tor does not match the on hand quantity
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Your customer-based voice profile code.
The description for your customer-based voice profile code.
Data 1 Use Do not process data 1

Process data 1
In this property, you specify whether or not you want AccellosOne 3PL to pro-
cess the data 1 value of product being picked. Data 1 can refer to any inven-
tory level. If you select the “Do not process data 1” option, AccellosOne 3PL
will specify a quantity and location for each pick, but no inventory levels.
Data 1 Heading None

Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
The inventory level that data 1 refers to.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 341

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Data 1 Confirmation Only available if Data 1 Use is set to “Process data 1”
Do not capture data 1 information

If you select this option, the data 1 value is spoken but the operator does not
read it back.
Capture data 1 information

If you select this option, the data 1 value is spoken and the operator must read
it back. The value read back must match the product being picked or must be
a valid substitution product.
Do not speak the data 1 field but allow operator to enter confirmation
value
If you select this option, the data 1 value is not spoken but the operator must
confirm it. The value confirmed must match the product being picked or must
be a valid substitution product.
Data 1 Minimum Capture In this property, you specify the number of characters in the inventory level
Length that the operator must read out. For example, if you set this property to two,
the operator must read out the last two characters in the inventory level.
This value is a minimum only; if the inventory level has five characters and this
value is set to two, the operator can read out the last two characters, the three
last characters, the four last characters or all five characters. However, he or
she cannot read out the last character only as this value is less than the mini-
mum.
If you leave this field blank, the operator must read out all characters in the
inventory level.
Data 2 Use See Data 1 Use
Data 2 Heading See Data 1 Heading
Data 2 Confirmation See Data 1 Confirmation
Data 2 Minimum Capture See Data 1 Minimum Capture Length

Length
342 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS

Length

Length
Cycle Count Active Flag Do not cycle count this location

Cycle count this location - Blind
Cycle count this location - Known
In this field, you activate cycle count countbacks for your voice customer. See
“Performing Count Backs in RFPIC” on page 221 for further information.
Cycle Count Rules Ignore investigation

Supervisor must override
Flow advancement not allowed
Supervisor override/No flow advance
See the Inventory Count Rules field in MRFP (RFPIC 2).
1 Enter VOPC.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 343

VOPC screen

5 Click on Save.
6 Proceed to select the appropriate option for each property by either selecting the option from a dropdown
list or by keying in a value.
7 When you finish selecting your properties, click on Save.
8 Click on Exit to exit VOPR.

9 When you finish setting up your voice profile, open CUST and proceed to attach your voice profile to the
appropriate customer by entering the voice profile code in the Voice Profile Code field.
SETTING UP YOUR TASK PROFILE IN REGI

In this program, you attach your voice profile code set up in VOPC to your task profile. You also define the
length of your UI check digit, the length of the spoken portion of the OPIC and whether the spoken value must
be numeric. See “Task Profile (REGI)” on page 101 for further information on this program.
344 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

The following fields in REGI apply exclusively to voice-activated picking:
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS

(VOPR)
The task profile’s voice profile.
Default Customer Voice The default customer voice profile for the task profile. This profile is used if the
Profile Code (VOPC) customer has not been assigned a voice profile in CUST.
Length of UI Check Digit Optional
The length of the UI check digit. For example, if you enter 3 in this field, the
operator must read out the last three digits belonging to the UI of the product
to picked in the location that the product is to be picked from.
For example, suppose the order line is picking item ABC001, pallet ID PA987
from location LA001. The voice terminal will read out the location code to the
operator. The operator will go to the location LA001, find pallet ID PA987 and
read out “987” to confirm that he or she has arrived at the location.
Spoken Length The length of the spoken portion of the OPID. This value is added to the OPID
prefix to form the full OPID for the order line being picked. AccellosOne 3PL
will validate this number to ensure that it is unique and has not been used
before.
Spoken Value Numeric If this field is checked, the value spoken by the operator must be numeric. If
this field is NOT checked, the value spoken by the operator can be alphanu-
meric.
SETTING UP YOUR RF OPERATORS IN RFOP

See “RF Operator (RFOP)” on page 79.
SETTING UP YOUR CHECK DIGIT PARAMETERS IN WARE (OPTIONAL)

You can define up to three manual check digits for each location in AccellosOne 3PL. Check digits are
alternate location codes that Vocollect Voice uses whenever the actual location code is too long to be read
out by the operator for each pick.
You define the number of check digits as well as the days of the week that each check digit will be used in
WARE (Warehouse and Location Format). Then you enter your manual check digits for each location in the
Voice Check Digit 1/2/3 fields in LOCA (Locations).
1 Enter WARE.
2 Retrieve the warehouse that you wish to set up for manual check digits.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 345

3 Press Enter until your cursor is positioned in the Voice Check Digit Usage field. Then select the appropri-
ate manual check digit option.
4 Depending on the option that you selected in the previous step, key in the days of week separated by
commas for each check digit and then press Enter. For example, to enter Monday, Wednesday and Fri-
day, you would key in MON,WED,FRI.
WARE screen showing two check digits for warehouse 1
5 When you finish setting up your check digit parameters, click on Return to Main and Exit.
ASSIGNING CHECK DIGITS TO LOCATIONS IN LOCA

If you specified one or more check digit days in WARE, you must add one check digit in LOCA for each check
digit day in WARE.
1 Enter LOCA.
2 Retrieve the location that you wish to assign a check digit to.
3 Key in your check digits for the location.
346 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

LOCA screen showing two check digits for location A100
4 Repeat the above steps for any additional locations in the warehouse that require check digits.
5 When you finish assigning check digits to your locations, click on Return to Main and Exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 347

SETTING UP YOUR REASON CODES IN REAS

In this program, you set up your reason codes for voice-activated picking. Pickers use these codes to record
a reason when the pick quantity for a given order line does not match the order quantity.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Reason The following reason codes are supported:
1 (Split-picking a Line)
This option is used for short picks; that is, the picker wishes to pick a partial
quantity from the location and return for the remaining quantity at a later time.
For example, if the pick quantity is five cases and the picker picks two cases,
AccellosOne 3PL will split the line into two lines. Line 1 (two cases) will be
marked as picked, while line 2 (three cases) will be marked as unpicked.
2 (Not Enough Product SUSP Hold)

3 (Location is Empty SUSP Hold)
With this option, the allocated product is put on a SUSP hold. The original
order will be zeroed out and a new P-type line will be created and allocated. If
allocation is successful, the new order line can be picked at a later time.
4 (Not enough Product LOST Hold)

5 (Location is Empty LOST Hold)
With this option, the allocated product is put on the hold code that you enter in
the Hold Code field of REAS (and not on SUSP hold). The original order line
will be zeroed out and a new P-type line will be created but NOT allocated. To
allocate the new order line, you must either do so manually in ASOR (Assign
Locations to Orders) or print a document.
You must set up at least one reason code in order to voice pick in Vocollect
Voice.
Description Your description for the reason code. See Reason field.
Type Set to P for Pick.
External Reference Reserved for future use.
Attached To Set to PICK.
Hold Code Only available for reason code 4 and 5.
The hold code that product is placed on when an order line cannot be picked.
1 Enter REAS.
348 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

3 Key in your reason code (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) and press Enter.

4 Key in an appropriate description for your reason code and press Enter.
5 In the Type field, key P for Pick and press Enter.
6 In the Attached To field, key in PICK and press Enter.
7 Repeat the above steps for each additional reason code that you wish to set up.
REAS screen showing standard reason code for voice-activated picking
8 When you finish setting up your reason codes, click on Return to Main to exit create record mode.
ACTIVATING YOUR VOICE TERMINALS IN MHEC

Voice terminals need to be activated in MHEC before you can use them in AccellosOne 3PL.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Equipment Code The terminal ID of your Talkman voice terminal.
Description A description for your Talkman voice terminal.
Type Set to TALK.
Hourly Cost Reserved for future use
Warehouse Code The warehouse code for your voice terminal.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 349

FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Location Code The location code of your voice terminal. The warehouse and location code
that you attach to a voice terminal in MHEC will be assigned to any product
picked using this voice terminal.
For example, if you assign staging location S100 to a given voice terminal and
then pick 10 cases of product using this terminal, AccellosOne 3PL will create
a record in the Location Block of LOEN showing 10 cases of product in loca-
tion S100.
In LOCA, the following setup is required for this location:

 its location type in LOTP must be staging
 its location structure type code in LOCA must be MHE
1 Enter MHEC.
2 Click on New .
3 In the Equipment Code field, key in your Talkman terminal ID and press Enter.
4 Key in a description for your new terminal ID and press Enter.
5 In the Type field, key in TALK and press Enter.
6 Press Enter to bypass the Hourly Cost field.
7 Key in your warehouse code and press Enter or select it from the pick list.
8 Key in your staging type location code and press Enter or select it from the pick list.
9 Repeat the above steps for each additional voice terminal that you wish to activate.
MHEC screen showing three voice terminals
10 When you finish adding your voice terminal(s), click on Save to save your changes.
350 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

Picking Orders in RFPV
If you do not want to pick certain orders using your voice-activated equipment, you can pick the orders in
RFPV (RF Picking Voice) using standard RF guns.
1 Enter RFPV.
RFPV screen showing RF operator’s region
2 Press Enter to continue.
RFPV screen showing first order line to pick
If you do NOT want to pick the

If you wish to pick the order line: order line:
a) Press F3 (SL) to select it. a) Press F1 (SK) to skip it.
4 If an item message displays, press F4 (EX) to continue.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 351

RFPV screen showing prompt for pick location
5 Key in or scan in your pick location.
RFPV screen showing prompt for UI
6 Key in or scan in your UI (Unique Identifier).
352 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFPV screen showing prompt for pick quantity
RFPV screen showing prompt for to location
8 If prompted to do so, key in or scan in the check digit for the location.
RFPV screen showing “Assignment Completed” message
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 353

Assigning RF Operators to Orders in RFOT
9 Press Enter to acknowledge the “Assignment Completed” message.
RFPV screen showing “Assignment Completed” message
10 Press Enter to continue with the next pick or key in 2 and press Enter to exit RFPV.
If you use Vocollect Voice to pick your orders, you can temporarily override the orders in an operator’s
standard task profile(s) in order to give priority to orders that are particularly urgent. You define overrides by
selecting individual orders and order lines in RFOT and assigning them to the appropriate voice operator.
If you do not use Vocollect Voice and pick your orders in RFPIC, assigning operators to orders in RFOT will
reserve those orders/order lines for the designated operator in RFPIC. When the designated operator enters
RFPIC, only assigned orders for that operator will display in the pick list.
RFOT also allows you to define the picking sequence of orders assigned to a particular RF operator. If you do
not define a picking sequence, orders will be sequenced by order priority followed by order number.
ASSIGNING RF OPERATORS TO ORDERS AND ORDER LINES

You can assign either order lines or entire orders to a given operator.
1 Enter RFOT.
2 If required, click on the Pick/Interleave (2) tab.
354 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFOT screen showing Pick/Interleave (2) tab
3 Key in your filter criteria and click on Execute Query. AccellosOne 3PL will retrieve all order lines
that meet your filter criteria.
RFOT supports the following search criteria:
ABC = code ABC
!ABC does not = code ABC
>ABC is greater than code ABC
>=ABC is greater than or equal to code ABC
<ABC is less than code ABC
<=ABC is less than or equal to code ABC
ABC,DEF,GHI = codes ABC, DEF, GHI
!ABC,!DEF,!GHI does not equal codes ABC, DEF, GHI
ABC~DEF a range of codes falling between ABC and DEF
TODAY Only orders with a to ship date of today
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 355

TODAY +1, etc. On orders with a to ship date of tomorrow (+1) or the day
before yesterday (-2)
RFOT screen showing orders that meet the filter criteria
4 If required, you can resort the order records in either ascending or descending sequence by clicking on
the appropriate header buttons (Order #, Customer, Consignee, To Ship Date, Flow or Cust. Order #).
5 If there is a line remark attached to the order line, click on Remarks to view it.
6 If you wish to assign order lines to an operator, click on the Lines tab.
7 Proceed to assign the orders/order lines that you want the operator to work on by one of the following
methods:
If you wish to assign individual If you wish to assign all

operators to individual orders/ unassigned orders/order lines to
order lines: a given operator:
a) Select your operator from the a) Select your operator from the
Assign Operator dropdown list. Assign Operator dropdown list.
b) Click on the checkbox to the left
b) Click on Assign All.
of the operator code to complete
c) If you make a mistake and wish
the assignment.
to undo all assignments made in
the current session, click on

Unassign All.
8 If required, you can assign a sequence number to an order/order line and the order/order line must be
picked in that sequence. If you do not specify a sequence number, orders will be sequenced by order pri-
ority followed by order number.
9 When you finish assigning your orders/order lines, click on Save.
356 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RFOT screen showing three orders assigned to the operator DALLEN
10 Click on Exit to exit RFOT.
ASSIGNING RF OPERATORS TO LOADS

You can restrict RF operators to loads, buildings and doors. When you assign an operator to an entire load,
the assignment is applied to all orders on the load. The restrictions that you enforce in RFOT apply to OLOP
(Outbound Loading Process).
1 Enter RFOT.
2 Click on Outbound Loads.
RFOT screen
3 Key in your filter criteria and click on Execute Query. AccellosOne 3PL will retrieve all loads that
meet your filter criteria.
RFOT supports the following search criteria:
ABC = code ABC
!ABC does not = code ABC
>ABC is greater than code ABC
>=ABC is greater than or equal to code ABC
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 357

<ABC is less than code ABC
<=ABC is less than or equal to code ABC
ABC,DEF,GHI = codes ABC, DEF, GHI
!ABC,!DEF,!GHI does not equal codes ABC, DEF, GHI
ABC~DEF a range of codes falling between ABC and DEF
TODAY Only orders with a to ship date of today
TODAY +1, etc. On orders with a to ship date of tomorrow (+1) or the day
before yesterday (-2)
RFOT screen showing loads that meet the filter criteria
4 If required, you can resort the load records in either ascending or descending sequence by clicking on
the appropriate header buttons (Load #, Ext. Load #, Building, Door or Operator).
5 Proceed to assign the loads that you want the operator to work on by one of the following methods:
If you wish to assign all

If you wish to assign individual unassigned loads to a given
operators to individual loads: operator:
a) Select your operator from the a) Select your operator from the
Assign Operator dropdown list. Assign Operator dropdown list.
b) Click on the checkbox to the left
of the operator code to complete b) Click on Assign All.
the assignment. c) If you make a mistake and wish
to undo all assignments made in
the current session, click on

Unassign All.
358 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

6 If required, you can assign a sequence number to a load and the load will be picked in that sequence. If
you do not specify a sequence number, loads will be sequenced by order priority followed by order num-
ber.
7 When you finish assigning your loads, click on Save.
RFOT screen showing three loads assigned to the operator DALLEN
ASSIGNING RF OPERATORS TO PICK METHODS

You can assign RF operators to one of two pick methods: DEPL (Depleted Picks Only) or NEDP (Non-
Depleted Picks Only). A depleted pick is a pick that completely empties a location, while a non-depleted pick
is a pick that leaves at least one unit of product in the location.
If you do not specify a pick method, your query will include both pick methods (DEPL and NDEP).
1 Enter RFOT.
2 Click on Pick/Interleave (2).
3 Select your pick method from the Pick Method pick list.
REMOVING AN OPERATOR ASSIGNMENT

You can remove an operator assignment in RFOT if the operator has not already started it. Once an
assignment is started in either RFPIC or Vocollect Voice, removing an operator assignment in RFOT will have
no affect on the order currently being worked on.
1 Enter RFOT.
2 On the Filter window, key in the RF operator code of the operator whose assignments you wish to
remove and click on click on Execute Query. You can query by multiple operators by separating
each operator by a comma; for example, “BOB1,BOB2”.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 359

Clearing Work Assignments in CTPA
RFOT screen showing three order lines assigned to the operator DALLEN
If you wish to remove an RF If you wish to remove an RF

operator from an order: operator from an order line:
a) Click on the Order tab to access a) Click on the Operator dropdown

your orders. list and select the blank “opera-
b) Click on the Operator dropdown tor” at the end of the list.
list and select the operator “--
NONE--”.
4 When you finish removing your operator assignments, click on Save.
You can look up the current work assignments of your Vocollect Voice operators in CTPA (Clear Terminal Pick
Assignments). In the Detail Block of this program, you can clear all work assignments for a given voice
operator and make these work assignments available to another voice operator.
NOTE The Execute Query command in this program is limited to a screen refresh
only. It does not allow you to perform actual queries.
1 Enter CTPA.
360 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CTPA screen showing 3 work lines assigned to the operator E80568
2 Select the operator whose work assignments you wish to look up or clear and click on Detail Block.
CTPA screen showing current work assignments for operator E80568
If you wish to look up the

operator's work assignments If you wish to clear the operator’s
only: work assignments:
a) When you finish looking up the a) Click on Clear All Assignments.

work assignments, click on Mas- All current work assignments for
ter Block. the operator that you selected
will be released and made avail-
able to other Vocollect Voice
operators.
4 Click on Exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 361

362 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Overview .......................................................................................................... 364
Cartonization Tab (MRFP) .............................................................................. 364
Carton Size Setup (CTSZ)............................................................................... 366
Outbound Process Configuration (CCCC).................................................... 368
Packing Station Code (PKST) ........................................................................ 371
Item Cartonization Profile Code (ICNP)......................................................... 373
Consignees (CONS) ........................................................................................ 374
Performing Manual Cartonization in RFSC................................................... 375
Performing System-Driven Cartonization in RFPK ...................................... 380
Performing Second Level Cartonization ....................................................... 387
Performing Manual Packing in EPSD ............................................................ 388
Looking Up Cartons in LOCN ........................................................................ 395
Deleting Closed Cartons in DCAR ................................................................. 397
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 363

CARTONIZATION
Overview
Overview
There are four cartonization options in AccellosOne 3PL:

 manual cartonization in RFSC
 system-directed or first level cartonization in RFPK (also known as “Pick & Pack”)
 second level cartonization for product that cannot be cartonized in RFPK
 manual packing in EPSD
Cartonization Tab (MRFP)
On this tab, you configure your cartonization options.
Cartonization tab
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( C A RTON I Z AT I O N )
Requirement for Item Scan Item Code and Enter Quantity

Scanning Scan Item Code for Each Case
Reserved for future use.
364 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Cartonization Tab (MRFP)
F I E L D D E S C R I P T I O N S ( C A RTON I Z AT I O N )
Default Container Size Prompt Entering Carton Size Code

Code Prompt Entering Pallet Size Code (reserved for future use)
Your default carton size code in RFSC.
Default Sorting Location Your default sorting location in RFSC.
Picking Path Mode for Keep items together as much as possible

System-Driven Cartoni- Pick in Location Sequence
zation Pick in Location Sequence, do not split order lines
Pick in Wine Sequence (custom use only)
Cartons for one item all one pallet
Your picking path mode for the BATP and LABL pick methods in RFPK. See
“Task Profile (REGI)” on page 101 for a complete descriptions of picking path
modes.
Cartonization Sort The sort sequence or “snaking” of your pick locations for cartonization.
Sequence Code (SOSE)
Validate Inventory Level Validate Item Only

in RFPK Cartonization Validate Item and Level 2
The inventory level(s) that must be validated in RFPK.
Picking Style in RFPK Pick by Carton ID

Cartonization Pick by Carton Position
If you select “Pick by Carton ID”, the RF operator will scan in the carton ID as
a confirmation step in RFPK. If you select “Pick by Carton Position”, the RF
operator will scan in the carton position on a cart or trolley as a confirmation
step in RFPK.
RFSC Carton Sorted by Sorted by Item

Sorted by Item/Level 2
Sorted by Item/Level 3
If you select “Sorted by Item”, the RF operator must scan in the item code in
RFSC. If you select “Sorted by Item/Level 2”, the RF operator must scan in the
item code plus level 2 value in RFSC. If you select “Sorted by Item/Level 3”,
the RF operator must scan in the item code plus level 3 value in RFSC.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 365

CARTONIZATION
Carton Size Setup (CTSZ)
In this program, you set up your carton size codes. Carton size codes are attached to customer/carrier/
consignee combinations in CCCC. For each carton size code, you define the following:
 a carton size code and description
 whether or not the carton’s dimensions/weight are inherited from the item’s dimensions and weight
 if required, the linear measure code and the length/width and height
 if required, the weight measure code, the maximum weight and the weight of an empty carton
 the usable percentage of the cube
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Carton Size Code Mandatory
Your carton size code.
A description for your carton size code.
Utilize Standard Configu- If you select this option, the carton dimensions/weight are inherited from the
ration item’s dimensions/weight in ITEM. If you do not select this option, you must
enter the carton’s dimensions/weight manually.
Linear Measure Code Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
Your linear measure code for the carton size code.
Length / Width / Height Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
The length, width and height of your carton size code.
Total Cube Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
The carton’s actual cube calculated by multiplying the carton’s length, width
and height.
366 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Carton Size Cube Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
In this field, you can define an override cube for a carton. For example, sup-
pose carton A has dimensions of 24 x 16 x 5 for a total of 1920 cubic inches. If
you define an override cube of 2500, you can place any number of items
whose total cube does not exceed 2500 cubic inches in this carton size.
Weight Measure Code Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
Your weight measure code for the carton size code.
Maximum Weight Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
The maximum weight allowed in the carton.
Weight of Empty Carton Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is not selected
The tare weight or weight of an empty carton.
SKU Class (SKCL) Only available if Utilize Standard Configuration is selected
The SKU class that the standard configuration applies to.
Usable Percentage The usable percentage of the cube. The non-usable percentage is reserved
for packing materials.
Variable Dimensions If you select this option, the user will be prompted to enter the carton dimen-
sion in EPSD.
UCC-128 Package Type Carton

Pallet
The UCC-128 package type.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 367

CARTONIZATION
CTSZ screen
In this program, you set up your cartonization rules for different customer/carrier/consignee combinations.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Customer Code The customer that the outbound process configuration applies to or.ALL for all
customers.
Carrier Code The carrier that the outbound process configuration applies to or.ALL for all
carriers.
Consignee Code The consignee that the outbound process configuration applies to or.ALL for
all consignees.
368 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Follow System Cartoniza- Reserved for future use.

tion at Packing
Maximum Cube/Weight In these fields, you specify the maximum cube and weight for second level
cartonization. Second-level cartonization applies to product that cannot be
cartonized by the cartonization engine because it is oversized, has no ICNP
profile attached to it or has missing dimensions in ITEM.
Default Carton Size Code Your default carton size code in RFSC and second level cartonization.
(CTSZ)
Cartonization Sort Rules Give Priority to Carton Size Cube

Give Priority to Carton Size Dimensions
If you select Give Priority to Carton Size Cube, the cube will be considered
first then the weight for second level cartonization. If, on the other hand, you
select Give Priority to Carton Size Dimensions, the weight will be considered
first then the cube.
Cartonization Break by Only available for first level cartonization in RFPK

Zone Type Code
Location Grouping
Material Handling Type Groups
Pickup and Delivery Groupings
Voice
In this field, you specify which zone type (if any) AccellosOne 3PL should look
at when comparing warehouse zones codes for the purposes of determining
the next pick location.
Suppose two adjacent locations — location A and location B — are both

attached to the following three zone types: Interleaving, PnD and Grouping. If
you select Pick and Delivery Groupings as your Cartonization Break by Zone
Code value, the system will compare location A’s PnD warehouse zone code
to location B’s warehouse zone code. If there is a match, the picker can pick
from A and then B. If there is no match, the picker can pick from A but not B.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 369

CARTONIZATION
CCCC screen
CARTON SIZE CODE BLOCK

In this block, you define which carton size codes are valid for different customer/carrier/consignee combina-
tions.
370 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Packing Station Code (PKST)
Carton Size Code Block
In this program, you set up your packing stations. Packing stations are only required for manual packing in
EPSD. For each packing station, you define:
 a packing station code and description
 a material handling equipment code
 the labels that will be printed at the packing station and the printers that they will be printed on
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Packing Station Code Mandatory
Your packing station code.
The description for your packing station code.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 371

CARTONIZATION
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
MHE Code (MHEC) Mandatory
Your material handling equipment code for the packing station. The material
handling equipment code that you enter must be attached to a material han-
dling equipment type whose Location Required flag has been set to Y for Yes
because packing stations require a warehouse code and location code.
The location attached to the material handling equipment code in MHEC must
be a staging location.
Auto-Weight Reserved for future use
Device Name Reserved for future use
Executable Reserved for future use
Wave Duration Set to 999.
Wave Margin Set to 1.
Wave Release Sequence Set to 1.

Number
Start / End Time Use the system defaults.
Order Unit Capacity Reserved for future use
Single/Multiple Order Reserved for future use

Lines
Overflow Shift Flag Reserved for future use
Overflow Day Flag Reserved for future use
In the Documents Block, you assign your labels to packing station printers.
372 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Item Cartonization Profile Code (ICNP)
Documents Block showing printer code for shipping label
Item Cartonization Profile Code (ICNP)
In this program, you set up your item cartonization profile codes. Each profile code defines the factor to be
applied to a given set of items. For example, for your standard weight items, you set the factor to 1 for your
STD code in ICNP and attach STD to all standard weight items in ITEM. As for your non-standard weight
items, for each weight or cube category such as 1.15, 1.25, 1.35 times the standard weight or cube, you
attach the appropriate factor to a profile code.
For example, a fragile item like a teapot requiring a lot of extra packing materials might have a cube factor
of.85 meaning that 15% of each carton would be reserved for packing materials. On the other hand, a
“squishy” item like a stuffed animal might have a cube factor 1.25 meaning that a carton designed to hold four
stuffed animals could in fact hold five.
Item Cartonization Profile Codes are only required for system-driven cartonization in RFPK.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Include Case Pick When this field is not checked, cartonization will only be activated for EACH
Method picks. When this field is checked, cartonization will be activated for both CASE
and EACH picks.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 373

CARTONIZATION
Consignees (CONS)
ICNP screen showing factors for standard weight and cube as well as factors for deviations from the
standard weight and cube
After setting up your item cartonization profile codes in ICNP, you attach them to the appropriate items in
ITEM.
ITEM screen showing cartonization profile code
Consignees (CONS)
You can deactivate system-directed cartonization for individual consignees by setting the Skip Cartonization
Flag in CONS to Y for Yes.
374 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Performing Manual Cartonization in RFSC
CONS screen showing Skip Cartonization Flag set to Y for Yes
You perform manual cartonization in the program RFSC (RF Sort Carton). With manual cartonization, you sort
the product on an outbound order and manually assign a carton ID to the inventory in the carton. The carton
ID’s that you manually assign are not validated by AccellosOne 3PL.
A carton is restricted to product from a single order only.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
RFPIC The order must be case picked and assigned an outbound pallet ID in RFPIC/
RFPK.
LABELS You need a carton label set up in DOCU and this label must be attached to the
appropriate customers and consignees in CCDU (Customer / Consignee Doc-
ument Setup).
PARCEL PROCESSING Closing a carton in RFSC can trigger a special parcel processing process.
CARTON SIZES Carton sizes must be set up in CTSZ (Carton Size Setup). However, there is
no validation of your carton sizes in CTSZ to ensure that the total weight or
cube has been exceeded.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 375

CARTONIZATION
FUNCTION KEYS
Results Mode
F1 RM (Remove) Removes product from a carton.
F2 QR (Query) Displays the first unpicked order line of the

F3 CL (Close) Closes a carton.
F4 EX (Exit) Exits program.
1 Enter RFSC.
RFSC screen
376 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
RFSC screen showing carton size prompt
3 Press Enter to accept the default carton size or key in a new carton size and press Enter.
4 Enter or scan in your carton ID.
RFSC screen showing item prompt
5 Enter or scan in your item code or UPC code.

6 If required, enter or scan in your level 2 or 3 value.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 377

CARTONIZATION
remaining number of units

of this item on this order to
be sorted/packed
RFSC screen showing quantity prompt
7 Key in the quantity of product that you wish to place in the carton and press Enter.
8 If the quantity that you entered completes the order, the “Order completed” message will appear. Press
Enter to acknowledge it.
RFSC screen showing RM, CL and RT commands
378 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
If you wish to leave the carton

If you wish to remove the open and work on another
If you wish to close the carton: product from the carton: carton:
a) Press F3 (CL). a) Press F1 (RM). a) Press F4 (RT).

b) Key in your order number and
press Enter.
b) Key in Y to continue with the

removal and press Enter.
c) Enter or scan in your item to
be removed.
d) When the removal confirma-

tion message appears, press
Enter to accept it.
10 When you finish manual cartonization in RFSC, press F4 (RT) and F4 (EX) to exit.
WORKING WITH CLOSED CARTONS

When a carton is closed, you have three options: you can re-open the carton to make adjustments to it, you
can delete the carton or you can enter a new carton.
1 When you enter or scan in the carton ID of a closed carton, the following message will appear:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 379

CARTONIZATION
Performing System-Driven Cartonization in RFPK
RFSC screen showing options for closed carton
To re-open the carton: To delete the carton: To enter a new carton:
a) Key in 1 and press Enter. a) Key in 2 and press Enter. a) Key in 3 and press Enter.
b) Proceed to add new product to b) Enter or scan in a new carton b) Enter or scan in a new carton
the carton or removing exist- ID or press F4 twice to exit ID and continue processing in
ing product from the carton. RFSC. RFSC.
You perform system-driven cartonization in the program RFPK (RF Wave Pick). With system-driven cartoni-
zation, you scan in your carton ID’s first and then pick the product to be placed in these newly scanned
cartons.
During allocation in Wave Manager, AccellosOne 3PL performs the following tasks:
 calculates the number and size of cartons required for each order in the wave based on the item dimen-
sions and your carton sizes in CTSZ
 generates a unique UCC-128 number or carton ID for each carton
In RFPK, you scan in your carton ID and slot number for each carton and then scan in the level 1/2 values of
the product that you are packing in the carton.
380 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Pick & Pack trolley
QUANTITY BREAK- Only items with a quantity breakdown of pallet/case/each can be cartonized.
DOWN
appropriate customers/carriers/consignees in CCDU (Customer / Consignee
Document Setup).
WAVE MANAGER Only orders that have been waved in the Wave Manager can be cartonized in
RFPK.
CARTON SIZES Carton sizes must be set up in CTSZ (Carton Size Setup).
ITEM Accurate item dimensions (that is, the weights and cube) are required.
CARTON ID’S A UCC-128 label is generated for each carton based on the value in the EAN
UCC Prefix field in CUST. You can customize the serial number portion of the
UCC-128 label by setting up a number series in NUSE (Number Series).
PICK METHOD 6 (Carton Pick)
COMP System-driven cartonization must be activated at the company level by Accel-

los.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 381

CARTONIZATION
FUNCTION KEYS
Results Mode
F1 RM (Remove) Deletes a scanned in carton ID/slot.
F2 QR (Query) Displays the first unpicked order line of the

F3 SP (Start Picking) Prompts you to start picking.
F3 SK (Skip) Skips the current pick.
F3 SQ (Short Quantity) Moves cursor to the QTYP field.
F4 EX (Exit) Exits program.
1 Enter RFPK.
2 Key in your wave number and press Enter.
3 If prompted to do so, key in your material equipment type code and press Enter.
RFPK screen showing prompt for pick method
4 Key in 6 (Carton Pick) and press Enter.
382 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
RFPK screen showing prompt for carton ID
5 Key in or scan in your carton ID.
RFPK screen showing prompt for slot number
6 Key in or scan in your slot number.
RFPK screen showing prompt for carton ID
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 383

CARTONIZATION
If your carton ID or slot number

If your carton ID and slot number is incorrect and you wish to
are correct: rescan:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Use your arrow keys to position

your cursor over the carton ID
that you wish to delete.
b) Press F2 (RM).
c) Re-enter or rescan your carton
ID and slot.
8 Repeat the above steps for each additional carton ID/slot that you wish to add to your trolley.
9 When you have added all your carton ID’s/slots and are ready to pick, use your arrow keys to position
your cursor over the carton ID that you wish to pack and F3 (SP) to start picking.
RFPK screen showing prompt for level 1
To skip the current pick and

To select the current pick: display your next pick:
a) Proceed to next step. a) Press F3 (SK).

b) Proceed to next step to pick this
pick or press F3 (SK) to advance
to the following pick.
11 Key in or scan in your level 1 value.

12 If prompted to do so, key in or scan in your level 2 value.
384 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
RFPK screen showing prompt for quantity
13 Key in your quantity and press Enter.
RFPK screen showing prompt for carton ID/slot number
14 If the quantity that you enter is less than the pick quantity, the following screen will appear:
RFPK screen showing “Short Pick” message
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 385

CARTONIZATION
15 Key in 1 and press Enter to accept the short pick or key in 3 and press Enter to re-enter the full quantity.
If your picking style is set to If your picking style is set to

“Pick by Carton ID”: “Pick by Carton Position”:
a) Key in or scan in your carton ID a a) Key in or scan in your slot num-

second time to confirm the pick ber a second time to confirm the
and pack. pick and pack.
RFPK screen showing prompt for staging location
17 Key in or scan in your staging location.
RFPK screen showing “Move Completed” message
18 Press Enter to acknowledge the “Move Completed” message.

19 If you picked all orders on the wave, press Enter to acknowledge the “All Orders Completed” message.
Then press F4 to exit.
If you did not pick the entire wave, the following screen will appear:
386 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Performing Second Level Cartonization
RFPK screen showing “Wave Not Completed” message
If you wish to continue with If you wish to start a new

the same wave: wave: If you wish to exit the wave:
a) Key in 1 and press Enter. a) Key in 2 and press Enter. a) Key in 3 and press Enter.
b) Go to step 4. b) Key in your new wave number
and press Enter.
Performing Second Level Cartonization
Second-level cartonization applies to product that cannot be cartonized by the cartonization engine because
it is oversized, has no ICNP profile attached to it or has missing dimensions in ITEM.
You pick the order normally in RFPK and then manually pack it using a special pick sheet. The pick sheet will
assign system-generated carton ID’s to the product on the order based on the maximum weight and cube
values that you define in CCCC (Outbound Process Configuration) for second-level cartonization.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 387

CARTONIZATION
Performing Manual Packing in EPSD
You perform manual packing in the program EPSD (Enter Packing Details). In this program, you can create
your own carton ID’s or you can use system-generated carton ID’s based on the order number.
RFPIC The order must be case picked and assigned an outbound pallet ID in RFPIC/
RFPK.
appropriate customers/carriers/consignees in CCDU (Customer / Consignee
Document Setup).
PARCEL PROCESSING Closing a carton in EPSD will trigger a special parcel processing process.
CARTON SIZES Carton sizes must be set up in CTSZ (Carton Size Setup).
PACKING STATION Packing stations are required in PKST.
AUTO-CONFIRMATION EPSD can be configured to automatically confirm order lines upon successful
completion of packing. Contact Accellos for assistance.
PICK METHOD Pick method in LOOR = PKST.
FULL CASE QUANTI- Instead of scanning a case label for each full case, you can simply scan the
TIES item and enter the total number of cases. Weights and dimensions are auto-
matically pulled from the item master and AccellosOne 3PL prints the required
number of shipping labels.
Processing full case quantities requires special setup by Accellos.
OTHER Many options in EPSD are not configurable by end-users. Contact Accellos for
further information on these options.
1 Enter EPSD.
388 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
EPSD screen
2 Key in your packing station code and press Enter or select it from the pick list.
If you are packing product from a If you are repacking product from
full pallet picked in Normal a pallet with an OPID (outbound
mode: pallet ID):
a) Key in your order number and a) Key in your OPID and press
press Enter. Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 389

CARTONIZATION
EPSD screen showing prompt for carton ID
4 Key in your carton ID and press Enter or click on Carton ID based on Order for a system-gener-
ated carton ID.
5 Scan in your item code.
6 If required, scan in your level 2 value.
390 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
EPSD screen showing prompt for pack quantity
7 Key in your pack quantity and press Enter.

8 Repeat the above two/three steps for each additional item that you wish to pack.
9 If you wish to look up order carton details, click on Order Carton Details . When you finish looking
up your order carton details, click on Return to exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 391

CARTONIZATION
EPSD screen showing Order Carton Details
If the Confirmed flag is selected, it means that the order line has been confirmed.
10 If you wish to look up your carton details, click on Carton Details . When you finish looking up your
carton details, click on Return to exit.
EPSD screen showing Carton Details
11 When you are ready to close your carton, click on Close Carton .
12 Key in your carton size code and press Enter or select it from the pick list.
392 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
EPSD screen showing prompt for length
13 If prompted to do so, enter the carton’s dimensions.

14 If required, enter or make a manual adjustment to the total carton weight.
15 Key in your label printer code and press Enter or select it from the pick list.
16 When the Enter Packing Details window appears showing that your label is printing, press Enter to
acknowledge it.
TRACKING YOUR PROGRESS IN EPSD

The following fields allow you to track your progress in EPSD to find out what percentage of an order has
been packed and what percentage of an order remains to be packed.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 393

CARTONIZATION
EPSD screen showing tracking fields
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Units to Repack Only available if you are repacking a pallet with an OPID
The remaining number of units on the current order to be repacked.
Cartons Packed The total number of cartons on the current order that have been packed.
Units Packed The total number of units on the current order that have been packed.
Units to Pick The remaining number of units on the current order to be picked.
Cartons to Pick The remaining number of cartons on the current order to be picked.
DELETING A CARTON’S CONTENTS

If a carton is not closed, you can delete the carton’s contents and re-use the carton for other product.
1 Enter EPSD.
2 Key in your packing station code and press Enter.
3 Key in your order number or OPID number and press Enter.
4 Key in the carton ID of the carton that you wish to delete and press Enter.
5 Click on Delete .
6 Click on Yes when prompted to confirm your deletion.
WORKING WITH UNCLOSED CARTONS

Unclosed cartons remain in EPSD until you either close the carton or delete the carton’s contents.
394 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Looking Up Cartons in LOCN
You can look up cartons in LOCN to find out which orders shipped in which cartons. The Header Block shows
the carton ID, order number, the carrier tracking number (if any), the carton size code, UCC number and
status.
The Detail Block shows the customer code, item code, order number, line number and current flow. If the
checkbox after the Flow field is selected, the order line has been fully picked.
If you perform an extended query, you can search for carton information by customer code and item code.
1 Enter LOCN.
LOCN screen
2 Press Enter until your cursor is positioned in the field that you wish to query. Then key in your search cri-
teria and click on Execute Query.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 395

CARTONIZATION
LOCN screen showing carton for order 3072
3 If you wish to query by customer code or item code, click on Extended Query.
Extended Query screen
4 Key in or select your customer/item code and click on Execute Query.
5 When you finish looking up your carton information, click on Exit to exit.
396 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

CARTONIZATION
Deleting Closed Cartons in DCAR
If you are a desktop user, you can delete a closed carton in the program DCAR. When you delete a closed
carton, you can choose to reduce the order line quantity accordingly (the carton did not ship) or you can leave
the order line quantity unchanged (the original carton was damaged and had to be replaced).
1 Enter DCAR.
DCAR screen showing cartons for order 2096
3 If required, click on the Reduce Order Line Quantity checkbox to deselect it.
4 In the Detail Block, click on Delete Carton for each carton that you wish to delete. Alternatively, you can
click on Select All or Deselect All to select/deselect all cartons.
5 When you finish selecting your cartons, click on Process .
6 Click on Exit twice to exit.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 397

CARTONIZATION
398 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Overview .......................................................................................................... 400
Company Code (COMP).................................................................................. 401
RF Checklist (MCHK) ...................................................................................... 401
Material Handling Types (MHET) ................................................................... 404
Material Handling Equipment Code (MHEC)................................................. 406
RF Operator (RFOP) ........................................................................................ 408
Locations (LOCA)............................................................................................ 409
Warehouse Shift Setup (WASH) .................................................................... 409
Looking Up Equipment Tracking Data .......................................................... 410
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 399

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Overview
Overview
The equipment tracking system allows you to track the equipment used by each RF operator, restrict certain
activity types such as picking, packing, etc. to certain types of equipment and restrict certain RF operators to
certain activity types and equipment types.
When equipment tracking is enabled, the following screen will appear each time an RF operator logs on:
Prompt for MHE code
The RF operator must enter a valid material handling equipment code in order to proceed. If the RF operator
enters a material handling equipment type code already in use, one of the following message will appear:
Prompt to remove lock or change MHE Prompt to take over the MHE or reenter MHE
code
The REMOVE THE LOCK message means that there are no active sessions attached to the MHE code and
thus the MHE code is empty. It is safe to remove the lock.
The TAKE OVER THE MHE message means that the Oracle session is still active even though the Unix
session has been dropped (for example, the RF operator switches off the device or removes the batteries). If
400 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Company Code (COMP)
you take over another user’s session, that person will lose all his or her work and the gun will be frozen. This
option must be used with extreme caution.
Company Code (COMP)
In this program, you activate equipment tracking by selecting Yes in the Enable Equipment Tracking in RF
flag.
Company Parameters block in COMP showing equipment tracking activated
RF Checklist (MCHK)
In this program, you set up your checklists for RF equipment types. In the checklist, you define one or more
questions for the RF operator as well as possible answers to these questions. One of the answers is marked
as failed.
In the Header Block, you create a code and description for your new checklist. In the Question Block, you
create a list of questions in the desired sequence. If the Information Only flag is turned on, an answer is not
required for that question. In the Answer Block, you define possible answers.
The checklist code that you create in MCHK is attached to the Checklist tab in MHET for the appropriate
equipment type. It can also be attached to loads in SELO. When an RF operator enters any equipment code
belonging to that equipment type in any RF program, the following prompt appears:
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 401

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
RF Checklist (MCHK)
Checklist prompt for forklift
If the RF operator enters 1 for Pass, he or she can proceed to pick the order, put-away the receipt, etc. If the
RF operator enters 2 for Fail, he or she cannot proceed with that equipment code.
MCHK screen
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Checklist Code Mandatory
Your checklist code.
402 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
RF Checklist (MCHK)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
The description of your checklist code.
Checklist Sequence Mandatory

Number
A unique sequence number for your question. Your checklist can contain as
many questions as you require.
Question Mandatory
The question or instruction that will display to the RF operator in every RF pro-
gram.
Information Only If you select this flag, the question or statement in the previous field does not
require an answer.
Answer Sequence Num- Mandatory if Information Only flag is not checked

ber
A unique sequence number for your answer. You can have as many answers
as you like for a given question.
Answer Mandatory if Information Only flag is not checked
Your answer text. For example, “Pass”, “Fail”, etc.
Fail Flag If you select this flag, the answer is a fail and the RF operator
will not be able to proceed if he or she selects that answer. At
least one answer for each question should be set up as a fail.
1 Enter MCHK.
2 Click on New .
3 Key in your checklist code and press Enter.
4 Key in a description for your checklist code and press Enter.
5 Click on the Checklist Sequence Number field, key in 1 as your sequence number and press Enter.
6 Key in your first question.
7 Click in the Answer Sequence Number field, key in 1 as your sequence number and press Enter.
8 Key in your answer.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 403

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Material Handling Types (MHET)
9 If required, click on the Fail Flag if the answer is a fail.
10 Click on Save .
11 Click in the Answer Sequence Number field, key in 2 as your sequence number and press Enter.
12 Key in your answer.
13 If required, click on the Fail Flag if the answer is a fail.
14 Click on Save .
15 Repeat the above three steps for each additional answer to your first question.
16 if you wish to add a second question to your checklist, click in Checklist Sequence Number field, key in 2
as your sequence number and press Enter.
17 Repeat steps 7 to 10 for the first answer to your second checklist question.
18 Add your additional answers to the second checklist question.
19 When you finish setting up your checklist, Click on Exit to exit.
In this program, you attach the checklist code that you created in MCHK to the Checklist tab in MHET for the
appropriate equipment type. If you perform RF interleaving in RFITLV, you must specify the equipment type’s
vertical height factor and excluded warehouse activity types (if any).
MHET screen
404 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Material Handling Type Mandatory

Code
Your material handling type code.
The description for your material handling type code.
Hourly Cost Reserved for future use.
Labor Standard Modifier See the “Operational Board” section in the Operations 2 Guide.
Unit Pack Reserved for future use.
Outer Pack Reserved for future use.
Location Required N = No
Y = Yes
If you select N for No, a staging location is not required in MHEC for material
handling equipment codes assigned this equipment type. If you select Y for
Yes, a staging location is required in MHEC for material handling equipment
codes assigned this equipment type.
Staging locations are not mandatory for material handling equipment codes.
However, they allow you to track product more effectively on an open order.
For example, if you assign staging location S100 to a given forklift and then
pick 10 cases of product using this forklift, AccellosOne 3PL will create a
record in the Location Block of LOEN showing 10 cases of product in location
S100.
Location Vertical Height Only supported in RFITLV
The height or vertical reach of this equipment type, The vertical height factor
code in this field must match the vertical height factor code of the location
before an RF operator assigned this equipment type can be assigned an inter-
leaving task for the location.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 405

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Material Handling Equipment Code (MHEC)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Exclude Whse Activity Only supported in RFITLV

Type
If you enter one or more activity types in this field, the RF operator will not be
able to use this equipment type for this activity type in RFITLV.
Checklist In this field, you enter the checklist code that you created in MCHK.
MHET screen showing electric lift equipment type that can be assigned to locations whose vertical
height factor = 1 to 5
In this program, you set up your material handling equipment codes. RF operators must enter one of these
equipment codes each time that they enter an RF program.
406 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
MHEC screen
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Equipment Code Mandatory
Your material handling equipment code.
Your description for this material handling equipment code.
Type (defined in MHET) Mandatory
The material handling type for this material handling equipment code.
Hourly Cost Reserved for future use
Warehouse Code Only available if Location Required flag set to Yes in MHET for the material
handling type
The warehouse code for this material handling equipment code.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 407

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
RF Operator (RFOP)
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Location Code Only available if Location Required flag set to Yes in MHET for the material
handling type
The staging location code for this material handling equipment code. In LOCA,
the following setup is required for this location:
 its location type in LOTP must be staging
 its location structure type code in LOCA must be MHE
RF Operator (RFOP)
In this program, you set up your activity type and material handling type exclusions for RF operators. If you
specify one or more task profiles for the RF operator on the Task Profiles tab, the RF operator will be
restricted to those task profiles.
NOTE Activity type and material handling type exclusions are only supported in
RFITLV.
RFOP screen showing activity type restrictions for ALEX
408 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Locations (LOCA)
Locations (LOCA)
In this program, you define your location height restrictions for each location. Only equipment types whose
vertical height factor code matches the location’s vertical height factor code can be assigned a task in this
location.
LOCA screen showing location assigned a vertical height factor code of 3
Warehouse Shift Setup (WASH)
In this program, you set up your warehouse shifts. Warehouse shifts are optional in equipment tracking. If you
set up warehouse shifts, the RF checklist will need to be performed by the RF operator only once per shift. If
you do not set up warehouse shifts, the RF checklist will need to be performed each time that an RF operator
logs on (that is, more than once per shift if the RF operator logs off during a shift).
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 409

EQUIPMENT TRACKING
Looking Up Equipment Tracking Data
WASH screen showing three shifts
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Shift Code Mandatory
Your warehouse shift code.
Your description for this warehouse shift code.
Warehouse Code Mandatory
The shift’s warehouse.S
Shift ID in Time & Atten- Reserved for future use

dance
Start Time The start time in 24-hour format of the shift.
End Time The end time in 24-hour format of the shift.
Looking Up Equipment Tracking Data
Equipment tracking data is stored in the Oracle database. If you wish to look this data up, you must write a
d’Amigo query.
410 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

TASK INTERLEAVING
Overview .......................................................................................................... 412
Company Parameters (COMP) ....................................................................... 412
Warehouse Activity Type Priority (WATP) .................................................... 413
Material Handling Types (MHET) ................................................................... 414
Warehouse Zones (WHZO) ............................................................................. 414
Warehouse and Location Format (WARE) .................................................... 415
Locations (LOCA)............................................................................................ 416
Task Profile (REGI).......................................................................................... 416
RF Interleaving in RFITLV .............................................................................. 417
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 411

TASK INTERLEAVING
Overview
Overview
Task interleaving is a fully automated solution to task assignment. Instead of RF operators entering individual
RF programs to perform put-way, picking, directed moves and replenishments at their own pace and in a
sequence that does not take into account the tasks of other RF operators, AccellosOne 3PL consolidates all
tasks in a single centralized “bucket”.
When an RF operator logs into RF, he or she is assigned the next available task in the bucket be it put-away,
picking, a directed move or a replenishment. The next available task is based on a number of factors
including:
 the RF operator’s equipment
 the RF operator’s proximity to the task’s location
 the RF operator’s task profile
 the location’s height restrictions
 the priority assigned to the task’s activity type
 the task’s pick method (full pallet pick vs. case pick)
 the level of congestion in a particular aisle
If an RF operator chooses to skip a task, AccellosOne 3PL will record the skipped task as well as the operator
who skipped it.
This purpose of task interleaving is to optimize the distribution of warehouse tasks such that travel times in
the warehouse are reduced to a minimum, urgent tasks are performed first and congestion in warehouse
aisles is avoided whenever possible.
The RF operator performs task interleaving in RFITLV (RF Interleaving). RFITLV supports all the standard
functions performed in RFCH, RFPU, RFPIC/RFPV, RFRP and RFCE. RFITLV does NOT support manual
relocations in RFRL, merging OPID’s in RFMG, merging inventory in RFMI, moving product in RFST or
loading product in OLOP.
Company Parameters (COMP)
In this program, you activate task interleaving by setting the Enable Task Interleaving flag to the appropriate
value: Create All Tasks or Create Tasks According to Zone Setting.
If you select “Create All Tasks”, task interleaving will be activated for all warehouse zones whose zone type is
set to I for Interleaving in WHZO. If you select “Create Tasks According to Zone Setting”, task interleaving will
be activated only for warehouse zones whose zone type has been set to I for Interleaving and whose Task
Required flag has been set to Yes.
412 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

TASK INTERLEAVING
Warehouse Activity Type Priority (WATP)
COMP screen showing Enable Task Interleaving set to Create All Tasks
Warehouse Activity Type Priority (WATP)
In this program, you assign priorities to different activity types by warehouse.
WATP screen
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 413

TASK INTERLEAVING
AccellosOne 3PL supports the following activity types:
A C T I V I T Y D E S CR I P T I O N A CT I V I T Y D E S CR I P T I O N
1 Clock-in 26 Picking
2 Clock-out 27 Unloading
5 Sign On/Off RF menu 40 Relocation
6 Log In/Out RF program 41 Replenishment
11 Receiving 42 Cycle Count
12 Put Away 43 Inventory Count Back
13 Item Process Tracking Inbound 44 Adjustment
22 Loading 51 Pallet Restacking
23 Order Move 52 Pallet Wrapping
24 Item Process Tracking Outbound 90 Texting / Messaging
25 Packing
See “Material Handling Types (MHET)” on page 404.
Only locations attached to a warehouse zone whose zone type code has been set to I for Interleaving can be
used for interleaving. See “Warehouse Zones (WHZO)” on page 84 for further information on WHZO.
If you selected the Create Tasks According to Zone Setting option in COMP, you must set the Task Required
flag to Yes for each warehouse zone in WHZO that you wish to activate.
414 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

TASK INTERLEAVING
Warehouse and Location Format (WARE)
WHZO screen showing interleaving type zone code and Task Required flag
Warehouse and Location Format (WARE)
You must define your aisles in the Location Attributes Block of WARE. See the Setup Guide for further infor-
mation on WARE.
WARE screen showing aisle defined as first character in location code
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 415

TASK INTERLEAVING
Locations (LOCA)
Locations (LOCA)
In this program, you define your location height restrictions for each location. Only equipment types whose
vertical height factor code matches the location’s vertical height factor code can be assigned a task in this
location.
LOCA screen showing location assigned a vertical height factor code of 3
Task Profile (REGI)
In this program, you define the maximum number of RF operators allowed in a warehouse aisle at any one
time.
416 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

TASK INTERLEAVING
RF Interleaving in RFITLV
REGI screen showing five as the maximum number of operators
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Max. Number of Opera- In this field, you define “congestion” in a warehouse aisle for interleaving pur-
tors poses; that is, if the number of operators in a task profile exceeds this number,
the extra operators will not be assigned any tasks until one or more existing
operators completes his or her task(s).
You perform task interleaving in RFITLV (RF Interleaving). Depending on the next available task, RFITLV calls
one of the following programs: RFCH, RFPU, RFPIC/RFPV, RFRP and RFCE. Refer to the documentation on
these programs for further information.
COMP Task Interleaving must be activated.
COMP The following fields must be configured: RFITLV First Check Same Location
for Task, RFITLV Second Check Same Aisle for Task and RFITLV Third Check
Same Zone for Task.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 417

TASK INTERLEAVING
PALLET BUILDING If you wish to take advantage of the Pallet Build engine, setup is required in
IPBR, ITEM, REGI and CONS.
OPERATOR RESTRIC- You can deactivate task interleaving for some or all RF operators by setting up
TIONS activity type exclusions in RFOP. For example, RF operator 1 can only pick,
RF operator 2 can only put-away and RF operator 3 can only relocate.
1 Enter RFITLV.
2 If prompted to do so, key in your task profile code and press Enter. Otherwise, press Enter to acknowl-
edge your pre-assigned task profile code.
RFITLV screen showing picking task
418 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

TASK INTERLEAVING
To perform the task: To skip the task:
a) Press F3 (SL) to select the line a) Press F4 (RT).

that you wish to work on.
b) Proceed to pick/put-away/relo-
cate, etc. the task.
b) Key in Y for next task and press

Enter or key in N for exit and
press Enter.
4 Repeat the above steps for each additional task assigned to your task profile.
5 When you finish performing all your tasks, press F4 (RT) to exit. Then key in N for exit and press Enter.
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 419

TASK INTERLEAVING
420 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INDEX
INDEX
A E
accessing RF 118 entry of expiry dates in RFCH 150
adjusting non-serial number inventory 301 EOSU (Exclude Orders from RF Substitution) 245
adjusting serial number inventory 310 EPSD (Enter Packing Details) 388
alternate item codes in RFCH 170 equipment tracking 400
alternate item codes in RFPU 187 excluding orders from overpicking in EOSU 218
assignments, pick method 196 extra charge setup 81
auto-confirming receipts in RFCH 143 extra charges, adding to receipt/order in RFEC 325
auto-confirming receipts in RFPU 143, 179
F
B first level cartonization 364
BAPR (Bar Code Profile Code) 11
blind receiving in RFCH 140 H
holds, placing product on in RFCH 172
C holds, placing product on in RFPIC 214
cartonization 364
Cartonization tab (MRFP) 364 I
cartons, deleting in DCAR 397 ICIN (Inventory Count Investigation) 223
cartons, looking up in LOCN 395 ICNP (Item Cartonization Profile Code) 373
CASE (Case Picking) 236 ICOC (Item Consignee Configuration) 106
case picking 206 IHZV (Item Hazardous Material Violation) 97
catch weight tolerances 259 inbound flows, understanding 139
CCCC (Outbound Process Configuration) 107, 368 interleaving See task interleaving
CCDU (Customer / Consignee Document Setup) 96 inventory counting in RFPIC 221
CCOR (Customer Consignee Outbound Rules) 111 inventory, merging 318
changing your company 118 IPBR (Item Pallet Build Restrictions) 98
CONS (Consignees) 374 Item Consignee Configuration (ICOC) 106
Consolidation Method for Allocated Lines field (CUST) 94 Item Hazardous Material Violation (IHZV) 97
count backs, performing in RFPIC 221
CRM tasks, performing in RF 334 L
CTPA (Clear Terminal Pick Assignments) 360
LOCN (Look Up Carton) 227, 395
CTSZ (Carton Size Setup) 366 LOENRF (RF Look Up Entity Information) 130
CUST (Customer Codes) 94
LOLORF (Look Up Location - RF) 128
Customer/Consignee Outbound Rules (CCOR) 111
looking up temperature and trailer information in LORE 175
look-up programs 117
D LOORRF (Look Up Orders - RF) 133
DCAR (Delete Carton) 397 LORERF (RF Look Up Receipts) 131
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 421

INDEX
M RF Order Assign (RFOT) 354

MCHK (RF Checklist) 401 RF Substitution Profile Code (PSPR) 242
merging inventory 318 RF supervisors 92
merging OPID’s 284 RFAJ (RF Adjustment)
MHEC (Material Handling Equipment Code) 349, 406 adjusting in inventory 311
MHET (Material Handling Types) 404 adjusting out cases 313
MIRP (Item RF Profile) 77 adjusting out full pallets 314
Miscellaneous (2) tab (MRFP) 62 adjusting out using Remove command 315
Miscellaneous (3) tab (MRFP) 66 overview 301
Miscellaneous tab (MRFP) 59 recovering from a lost connection 317
mixed product, receiving in RFCH 173 RFAJB (RF Adjustment)
MRFP (RF Profile Code) 15 overview 310
RFBR (RF Bar Code Read) 336
O RFCD (RF Check Digit) 329
RFCE (RF CRM Entry) 334
one-step put-away 138
OPID’s, looking up in LOCN/LOOR 227 RFCH (RF Check Unload)
creating a new line 169
OPID’s, merging 284
entering expiry dates 150
outbound flows, understanding 196
outbound pallet building 98 entering partial U-type receipt lines in 161
entering process values 166
overpicking, excluding orders from in EOSU 218
entering trailer and pallet information 156
overriding the system-assigned location in RFCH 155
overriding the system-assigned location in RFPU 184 looking up remarks in 176
overview 140
performing queries in 160
P printing labels in 162
Pallet Build engine 98
processing variances 163
Pick & Pack 364 receiving mixed product 173
pick and pack cartonization 380
receiving product on automatic hold 172
pick methods 196
receiving product under an alternate item code 170
picking orders in RFPIC 199 receiving product with a variable quantity breakdown
picking pick line product from a non-pick line location in RF-
173
PIC 219
validating process values in 168
picking programs, overview of 198 RFCH Only (2) tab (MRFP) 24
picking substitution 241
RFCH Only tab (MRFP) 17
process values
RFCH Queries tab (MRFP) 15
entering in RFOPS 260 RFCH Shared tab (MRFP) 28
entering in RFPIC 211
RFCL (RF Count Log) 224, 226
entering in UOPR 250
RFCO (RF Confirm OPID) 230
PSPR (RF Substitution Profile Code) 242 RFCU (RF Confirm UI) 232
putting away to a pick line location in RFPU 188
RFDL (RF Delete Line) 190
RFEC (RF Extra Charge) 325
Q RFIL (RF Receipt Line Look-Up) 122
queries, performing in RFCH 160 RFINC (RF Incidents) 331
RFIPS (RF Inbound Process Scanning) 188
R RFIT (RF Item Look-Up) 118
REAS (Reason Code) 348 RFITLV (RF Interleaving) 417
receiving mixed product in RFCH 173 RFLOIP (RF Look Up Item Process) 127
REGI (Task Profile) 100, 344 RFLR (RF Look Up Reserve Logic Customers) 134
relocating inventory in RFRL 292 RFMG (RF Merge OPID) 284
replenishments, performing in RFPIC 220 RFMI (RF Merge Inventory) 318
RF Bar Code Read (RFBR) 336 RFNCO (OPID Look-Up) 228
RF Confirm OPID (RFCO) 230 RFOA (RF Outbound Audit) 287
RF Confirm UI (RFCU) 232 RFOL (RF Order Line Look-Up) 124
RF CRM Entry (RFCE) 334 RFOLP (Outbound Label Printing) 233
RF Delete Line (RFDL) 190 RFOP (RF Operator) 79, 408
RF Extra Charge (RFEC) 325 RFOPS (RF Outbound Process Scanning)
RF Merge Inventory (RFMI) 318 capturing the weight dynamically from a bar code 265
RF Merge OPID (RFMG) 284 incomplete scans 276
RF Operator (RFOP) 79 manually entering weight when weight cannot be cap-
422 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

INDEX
tured 270 supervisors (RF) 92

overview 260 suspended hold options 42
removing cases from a fully scanned order 274 system-driven cartonization 364, 380
removing cases that have been scanned 273
removing labels that have been scanned 271 T
transferring inbound process values to outbound or- task interleaving 412
ders 277 Task Profile (REGI) 344
weight discovery 265 temperature and trailer information, looking up in LORE
RFOT (RF Order Assign) 354 175
RFPIC (2) tab (MRFP) 45 three-step put-away 146
RFPIC (3) tab (MRFP) 51 two-step put-away 138
RFPIC (RF Pick)
case picking 206 U
entering pallet information 216
unique identifier, overview 139
entering process values 211
UOPR (Update Order Process Values)
excluding orders from overpicking 218 looking up summary information 258
looking up remarks in 220
overview 250
overview 199
removing cases from a fully scanned order 256
performing countbacks in 221 removing cases that have not been scanned 255
performing picking substitution in 247
removing process values from scanned in cases 254
performing replenishments in 220
picking full pallets from bulk 204
picking partial quantities of product with process val-
V
ues 213 validating process values in RFCH 168
variances in RFCH, overview 163
picking pick line product from a non-pick line location
variances, entering in RFCH 164
219
placing product on hold 214 variances, entering in RFPU 185
Voice Profile - Customer (VOPC) 341
RFPIC tab (MRFP) 39
Voice Profile (VOPR) 338
RFPK (RF Wave Pick) 278
RFPR (RF Product Look-Up by Location) 120 voice-activated picking, overview 338
VOPC (Voice Profile - Customer) 341
RFPU (RF Put-Away) 178
VOPR (Voice Profile) 338
RFPU tab (MRFP) 35
RFPV (RF Picking Voice) 199, 351
RFRL (RF Relocate) 292 W
RFSC (RF Sort Carton) 375 Warehouse Customer Consignee OPID Rule (WCCO) 110
RFST (RF Staging) 282 Warehouse Zones (WHZO) 84
RFTT (RF Temperature and Trailer) 177, 226 WASH (Warehouse Shift Setup) 409
WATP (Warehouse Activity Type Priority) 413
S WCCO (Warehouse Customer Consignee OPID Rule) 110
SCPR (Scan Parameter Profile) 6 weight discovery in RFOPS 265
WHZO (Warehouse Zones) 84
second-level cartonization 387
substitution (picking) 241
RF GUIDE 4.0.1* 423

INDEX
424 4.0.1* RF GUIDE

RF Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

RF Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ACC E LLO S ON E

GENERAL SETUP PROGRAMS 5

GENERAL NAVIGATION AND LOOK-UP PROGRAMS 117

OUTBOUND PROCESSING 193

RF GUIDE 4.0.1* iii

MISCELLANEOUS PROCESSING 291

VOICE-ACTIVATED PICKING AND ORDER ASSIGNMENT SYSTEM 337

EQUIPMENT TRACKING 399

TASK INTERLEAVING 411

RF GUIDE 4.0.1* vii

Before You Begin

AccellosOne 3PL Documentation Set

The AccellosOne 3PL documentation set includes 12 volumes:

Standard Reports core reports in AccellosOne 3PL

Scan Parameter Profile (SCPR)

Scan Profile Code Mandatory

Your scan profile code.

The description for your scan profile code.

Variable Length Y = Yes

Scan Profile Code Length Mandatory

The total length of the bar code.

The extraction of an inventory level from multiple sequences of a bar code is

Type EDT1 = YYMMDD

Start Position Mandatory for fixed position bar codes

End Position Mandatory for fixed position bar codes

Start Character Reserved for future use

End Character Reserved for future use

Length Only applicable to fixed position bar codes

Action The following actions are supported:

The unit of measure for the captured value.

Data Type CHAR = Character

Use CHAR for serial and purchase order numbers.

Validate Item Code Only available for item code validation

Item Code Start Position Only available for position-based validation

The start position for the item code.

Item Code End Position Only available for position-based validation

The end position of the item code.

APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION BLOCK

Bar Code Profile Code (BAPR)

BAR CODE(S) SCPR SETUP BAPR SETUP ITEM SETUP

---L1--- N/A N/A N/A

---L3--- N/A N/A N/A

BAR CODE(S) SCPR SETUP BAPR SETUP ITEM SETUP

Bar Code Profile Code Mandatory

Your bar code profile code.

The description for your bar code profile code.

Scan Parameter Profile Mandatory

The bar code profile’s scan parameter profile code.

Bar Code ID Optional

Start Position Mandatory if you enter a bar code ID

The starting position of the bar code ID.

End Position Mandatory if you enter a bar code ID

The ending position of the bar code ID.

The length of the variable portion of the bar code.

Bar Code Length Mandatory

See your Accellos implementation consultant for further information on this

RFCH Queries tab

Customize Query Results Yes

RFCH pick list screen showing customization

RFCH Only tab

Label Document Printed Optional

Show Temperature and Not required

Show Temperature and